Icom Stereo Amplifier IC 7700 User Manual
HF/50 MHz TRANSCEIVER  
i7700  
Instruction Manual  
A-6612H-1EX  
Printed in Japan  
© 2007 Icom Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRECAUTIONS  
DO NOT use chemical agents such as benzine or al-  
cohol when cleaning the IC-7700, as they can damage  
the transceiver’s surfaces.  
R WARNING HIGH RF VOLTAGE! NEVER  
attach an antenna or internal antenna connector during  
transmission. This may result in an electrical shock or  
burn.  
DO NOT push the PTT switch when you don’t actu-  
ally desire to transmit.  
R WARNING! NEVER operate the transceiver  
with a headset or other audio accessories at high vol-  
ume levels. Hearing experts advise against continuous  
high volume operation. If you experience a ringing in  
your ears, reduce the volume or discontinue use.  
AVOID using or storing the transceiver in areas with  
temperatures below ±0°C (+32°F) or above +50°C  
(+122°F).  
AVOID placing the transceiver in excessively dusty en-  
vironments or in direct sunlight.  
R CAUTION! NEVER change the internal set-  
tings of the transceiver. This may reduce transceiver  
performance and/or damage to the transceiver.  
AVOID placing the transceiver against walls or putting  
anything on top of the transceiver. This may overheat  
the transceiver.  
In particular, incorrect settings for transmitter circuits,  
such as output power, idling current, etc., might dam-  
age the expensive final devices.  
Always place unit in a secure place to avoid inadver-  
tent use by children.  
The transceiver warranty does not cover any problems  
caused by unauthorized internal adjustment.  
BE CAREFUL! If you use a linear amplifier, set the  
transceiver’s RF output power to less than the linear  
amplifier’s maximum input level, otherwise, the linear  
amplifier will be damaged.  
R CAUTION! NEVER touch the transceiver top  
cover when transmitting continuously for long periods.  
The top cover may be hot.  
Use Icom microphones only (supplied or optional).  
Other manufacturers’ microphones have different pin  
assignments, and connection to the IC-7700 may dam-  
age the transceiver or microphone.  
R CAUTION! NEVER let metal, wire or other ob-  
jects protrude into the transceiver or into connectors  
on the rear panel. This may result in an electric shock.  
R CAUTION! NEVER block any cooling vents on  
The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections that  
appear as small dark or light spots. This is not a mal-  
function or defect, but a normal characteristic of LCD  
displays.  
the top, rear or bottom of the transceiver.  
R CAUTION! NEVER expose the transceiver to  
rain, snow or any liquids.  
During maritime mobile operation, keep the transceiver  
and microphone as far away as possible from the mag-  
netic navigation compass to prevent erroneous indica-  
tions.  
R CAUTION! NEVER install the transceiver in a  
place without adequate ventilation. Heat dissipation  
may be reduced, and the transceiver may be dam-  
aged.  
Turn [I/O] switch (on the rear panel) OFF and/or dis-  
connect the AC power cable from the AC outlet when  
you will not use the transceiver for long period of time.  
R CAUTION! NEVER operate or touch the trans-  
ceiver with wet hands. This may result in an electric  
shock or damage to the transceiver.  
For U.S.A. only  
R CAUTION! The transceiver weighs approx. 22.5  
kg (50 lb). Always have two people available to carry,  
lift or turn over the transceiver.  
CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this device,  
not expressly approved by Icom Inc., could void your  
authority to operate this device under FCC regulations.  
R CAUTION! The line-voltage receptacle must be  
near the transceiver and must be easily accessible.  
Avoid extension cords.  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES  
q
w
e
r
t
o
!
y
u
i
!
!
!
!
*May differ from that shown according to version.  
† These screw are used when removing rack mounting han-  
dles. See p.2-3 for rack mounting handle detachment de-  
tails.  
q AC power cable* ………………………………… 1  
w Feet …………………………………………… 1 pair  
e Spare fuse (FGB 2 A) …………………………… 1  
r RCA plugs ………………………………………… 2  
t DC plug …………………………………………… 1  
‡ See p.2-2 for main dial attachment details.  
1
y 2-conductor ⁄8″ plugs …………………………… 3  
1
u 3-conductor ⁄8″ plugs …………………………… 2  
1
i 3-conductor ⁄4″ plugs …………………………… 3  
o ACC plugs (7-pin) ………………………………… 1  
! ACC plugs (8-pin) ………………………………… 1  
! Antenna connector caps ………………………… 4  
†
! Hiding screws for screw hole …………………… 6  
! Main dial‡ …………………………………………… 1  
! Main dial screw and hexagonal wrench‡ …… 1 set  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Section 1  
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
■ Front panel ……………………………………………………………… 1-2  
■ Rear panel ……………………………………………………………… 1-12  
■ LCD display …………………………………………………………… 1-14  
■ Screen menu arrangement …………………………………………… 1-16  
Section 2  
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
■ Unpacking ……………………………………………………………… 2-2  
■ Main dial attachment …………………………………………………… 2-2  
■ Rack mounting handle detachment …………………………………… 2-3  
■ Selecting a location …………………………………………………… 2-3  
■ Grounding ……………………………………………………………… 2-4  
■ Antenna connection …………………………………………………… 2-4  
■ USB-Memory connection ……………………………………………… 2-4  
■ Required connections ………………………………………………… 2-5  
D Front panel …………………………………………………………… 2-5  
D Rear panel …………………………………………………………… 2-5  
■ Advanced connections ………………………………………………… 2-6  
D Front panel …………………………………………………………… 2-6  
D Rear panel—1 ……………………………………………………… 2-6  
D Rear panel—2 ……………………………………………………… 2-7  
■ Linear amplifier connections …………………………………………… 2-8  
D Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO …………………………………… 2-8  
D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier …………………………… 2-8  
■ Transverter jack information …………………………………………… 2-9  
■ FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections ………………………………… 2-9  
■ Microphone connector information ………………………………… 2-10  
■ Microphones (options) ………………………………………………… 2-10  
D SM-20 ……………………………………………………………… 2-10  
D HM-36 ……………………………………………………………… 2-10  
■ Accessory connector information …………………………………… 2-11  
Section 3  
BASIC OPERATIONS  
■ When first applying power (CPU resetting) ………………………… 3-2  
■ Initial settings …………………………………………………………… 3-2  
■ Selecting VFO/memory mode ………………………………………… 3-3  
■ VFO selection …………………………………………………………… 3-3  
D Selecting VFO-A/VFO-B …………………………………………… 3-3  
D VFO equalization …………………………………………………… 3-3  
■ Selecting an operating band …………………………………………… 3-4  
D Using the band stacking registers ………………………………… 3-4  
■ Frequency setting ……………………………………………………… 3-5  
D Tuning with the main dial …………………………………………… 3-5  
D Direct frequency entry with the keypad …………………………… 3-5  
D Quick tuning step …………………………………………………… 3-6  
D Selecting “kHz” step ………………………………………………… 3-6  
1
D ⁄4 tuning step function ……………………………………………… 3-6  
D Selecting 1 Hz step ………………………………………………… 3-7  
D Auto tuning step function …………………………………………… 3-7  
D Band edge warning beep …………………………………………… 3-7  
■ Operating mode selection ……………………………………………… 3-8  
■ Volume setting ………………………………………………………… 3-9  
■ RF gain adjustment …………………………………………………… 3-9  
■ Squelch level adjustment ……………………………………………… 3-9  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
■ Meter indication selection …………………………………………… 3-10  
D Multi-function digital meter ………………………………………… 3-10  
D Meter type selection ……………………………………………… 3-11  
■ Voice synthesizer operation ………………………………………… 3-11  
■ Basic transmit operation ……………………………………………… 3-12  
D Transmitting ………………………………………………………… 3-12  
D Microphone gain adjustment ……………………………………… 3-12  
D Drive gain adjustment ……………………………………………… 3-13  
Section 4  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
■ Operating SSB ………………………………………………………… 4-2  
D Convenient functions for receive ……………………………………4-2  
D Convenient functions for transmit ……………………………………4-3  
D About 5 MHz band operation (USA version only) …………………4-3  
■ Operating CW …………………………………………………………… 4-4  
D Convenient functions for receive ……………………………………4-4  
D Convenient functions for transmit ……………………………………4-5  
D About CW reverse mode ……………………………………………4-5  
D About CW pitch control ………………………………………………4-5  
D CW side tone function ………………………………………………4-5  
D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation …………………………………4-6  
■ Electronic keyer functions ……………………………………………… 4-7  
D Memory keyer screen …………………………………………………4-8  
D Editing a memory keyer ………………………………………………4-9  
D Contest number set mode …………………………………………4-10  
D Keyer set mode ………………………………………………………4-11  
■ Operating RTTY (FSK) ……………………………………………… 4-13  
D Convenient functions for receive …………………………………4-14  
D About RTTY reverse mode …………………………………………4-14  
D Twin peak filter ………………………………………………………4-14  
D Functions for the RTTY decoder indication ………………………4-15  
D Setting the decoder threshold level ………………………………4-15  
D RTTY memory transmission ………………………………………4-16  
D Automatic transmission/reception setting …………………………4-16  
D Editing RTTY memory ………………………………………………4-17  
D RTTY decode set mode ……………………………………………4-18  
D Data saving …………………………………………………………4-20  
■ Operating PSK ………………………………………………………… 4-21  
D Convenient functions for receive …………………………………4-22  
D About BPSK and QPSK modes ……………………………………4-22  
D Functions for the PSK decoder indication ………………………4-23  
D Setting the decoder threshold level ………………………………4-23  
D PSK memory transmission …………………………………………4-24  
D Automatic transmission/reception setting …………………………4-24  
D Editing PSK memory ………………………………………………4-25  
D PSK decode set mode ………………………………………………4-26  
D Data saving …………………………………………………………4-28  
■ Operating AM ………………………………………………………… 4-29  
D Convenient functions for receive …………………………………4-29  
D Convenient functions for transmit …………………………………4-30  
■ Operating FM ………………………………………………………… 4-31  
D Convenient functions for receive …………………………………4-31  
D Convenient functions for transmit …………………………………4-31  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
■ Repeater operation …………………………………………………… 4-32  
D Repeater tone frequency setting …………………………………4-33  
■ Tone squelch operation ……………………………………………… 4-34  
■ Data mode (AFSK) operation ………………………………………… 4-35  
Section 5  
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
■ Spectrum scope screen ……………………………………………… 5-2  
D Center mode ………………………………………………………… 5-2  
D Fixed mode …………………………………………………………… 5-3  
D Mini scope screen indication ……………………………………… 5-4  
D Scope set mode ……………………………………………………… 5-4  
■ Preamplifier ……………………………………………………………… 5-9  
■ Attenuator ……………………………………………………………… 5-9  
■ RIT function …………………………………………………………… 5-10  
D RIT monitor function …………………………………………………5-10  
■ AGC function …………………………………………………………… 5-11  
D Selecting the preset value …………………………………………5-11  
D Adjusting the AGC time constant …………………………………5-11  
D Setting the AGC time constant preset value ………………………5-11  
■ Twin PBT operation …………………………………………………… 5-12  
■ IF filter selection ……………………………………………………… 5-13  
D IF filter selection …………………………………………………… 5-13  
D Filter passband width setting (except FM mode) ……………… 5-13  
D Roofing filter selection ……………………………………………… 5-14  
D DSP filter shape …………………………………………………… 5-14  
D Filter shape set mode ……………………………………………… 5-14  
■ Noise blanker ………………………………………………………… 5-16  
D NB set mode ………………………………………………………… 5-16  
■ Noise reduction ………………………………………………………… 5-17  
■ Dial lock function ……………………………………………………… 5-17  
■ Notch function ………………………………………………………… 5-18  
■ Digital selector ………………………………………………………… 5-18  
■ Autotune function ……………………………………………………… 5-19  
Section 6  
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT  
■ VOX function …………………………………………………………… 6-2  
D Using the VOX function …………………………………………… 6-2  
D Adjusting the VOX function ………………………………………… 6-2  
D VOX set mode ……………………………………………………… 6-2  
■ Break-in function ………………………………………………………… 6-3  
D Semi break-in operation …………………………………………… 6-3  
D Full break-in operation ……………………………………………… 6-3  
■ ∂TX function …………………………………………………………… 6-4  
D ∂TX monitor function ………………………………………………… 6-4  
■ Monitor function ………………………………………………………… 6-4  
■ Transmit filter width setting (SSB only) ……………………………… 6-5  
■ Speech compressor (SSB only) ……………………………………… 6-5  
■ Split frequency operation ……………………………………………… 6-6  
■ Quick split function ……………………………………………………… 6-7  
D Split lock function …………………………………………………… 6-7  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Section 7  
Section 8  
Section 9  
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS  
■ About digital voice recorder …………………………………………… 7-2  
■ Recording a received audio …………………………………………… 7-3  
D Basic recording ……………………………………………………… 7-3  
D One-touch recording ………………………………………………… 7-3  
■ Playing the recorded audio …………………………………………… 7-4  
D Basic playing ………………………………………………………… 7-4  
D One-touch playing …………………………………………………… 7-4  
■ Protect the recorded contents ………………………………………… 7-5  
■ Erasing the recorded contents ………………………………………… 7-5  
■ Recording a message for transmit …………………………………… 7-6  
D Recording …………………………………………………………… 7-6  
D Confirming a message for transmit ………………………………… 7-6  
■ Programming a memory name ……………………………………… 7-7  
■ Sending a recorded message ………………………………………… 7-8  
D Transmit level setting ……………………………………………… 7-8  
■ Voice set mode ………………………………………………………… 7-9  
■ Saving a voice memory into the USB-Memory …………………… 7-10  
D Saving the received audio memory ……………………………… 7-10  
D Saving the TX memory …………………………………………… 7-10  
MEMORY OPERATION  
■ Memory channels ……………………………………………………… 8-2  
■ Memory channel selection …………………………………………… 8-2  
D Using the  
/
keys ………………………………………… 8-2  
∫
√
D Using the keypad …………………………………………………… 8-2  
■ Memory channel programming ……………………………………… 8-3  
D Programming in VFO mode ………………………………………… 8-3  
D Programming in memory mode …………………………………… 8-3  
■ Frequency transferring ………………………………………………… 8-4  
D Transferring in VFO mode ………………………………………… 8-4  
D Transferring in memory mode ……………………………………… 8-4  
■ Memory list screen ……………………………………………………… 8-5  
D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen …… 8-5  
D Confirming programmed memory channels ……………………… 8-5  
■ Memory names ………………………………………………………… 8-6  
D Editing (programming) memory names …………………………… 8-6  
■ Memory clearing ………………………………………………………… 8-6  
■ Memo pads ……………………………………………………………… 8-7  
D Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads …… 8-7  
D Calling up a frequency from a memo pad ………………………… 8-7  
SCANS  
■ Scan types ……………………………………………………………… 9-2  
■ Preparation ……………………………………………………………… 9-2  
■ Voice squelch control function ………………………………………… 9-3  
■ Scan set mode ………………………………………………………… 9-3  
■ Programmed scan operation ………………………………………… 9-4  
■ ∂F scan operation ……………………………………………………… 9-4  
■ Fine programmed scan/Fine ∂F scan ……………………………… 9-5  
■ Memory scan operation ………………………………………………… 9-6  
■ Select memory scan operation ……………………………………… 9-6  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
■ Setting select memory channels ……………………………………… 9-7  
D Setting in scan screen ……………………………………………… 9-7  
D Setting in memory list screen ……………………………………… 9-7  
D Erasing the select scan setting …………………………………… 9-7  
■ Tone scan ……………………………………………………………… 9-8  
Section 10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION  
■ Antenna connection and selection ………………………………… 10-2  
■ Antenna memory settings …………………………………………… 10-3  
D Antenna type selection …………………………………………… 10-3  
D Temporary memory ………………………………………………… 10-4  
D Antenna selection mode …………………………………………… 10-4  
D Receive antenna I/O setting ……………………………………… 10-5  
■ Antenna tuner operation ……………………………………………… 10-6  
D Tuner operation …………………………………………………… 10-6  
D If the tuner cannot tune the antenna …………………………… 10-7  
Section 11 CLOCK AND TIMERS  
■ Time set mode ………………………………………………………… 11-2  
■ Daily timer setting ……………………………………………………… 11-3  
■ Setting sleep timer …………………………………………………… 11-4  
■ Timer operation ………………………………………………………… 11-4  
Section 12 SET MODE  
■ Set mode description ………………………………………………… 12-2  
D Set mode operation ………………………………………………… 12-2  
D Screen arrangement ……………………………………………… 12-3  
■ Level set mode ………………………………………………………… 12-4  
■ ACC set mode ………………………………………………………… 12-7  
■ Display set mode ……………………………………………………… 12-9  
■ Others set mode …………………………………………………… 12-12  
■ USB-Memory set menu …………………………………………… 12-19  
D USB-Memory set screen arrangement ………………………… 12-19  
D Save option set mode …………………………………………… 12-20  
D Load option set mode …………………………………………… 12-21  
■ File saving …………………………………………………………… 12-22  
■ File loading …………………………………………………………… 12-23  
■ Changing a file name ……………………………………………… 12-24  
■ Deleting a file ………………………………………………………… 12-25  
■ Unmounting USB-Memory ………………………………………… 12-25  
■ Formatting the USB-Memory ……………………………………… 12-26  
Section 13 MAINTENANCE  
■ Troubleshooting ……………………………………………………… 13-2  
D Transceiver power ………………………………………………… 13-2  
D Transmit and receive ……………………………………………… 13-2  
D Scanning …………………………………………………………… 13-3  
D Display ……………………………………………………………… 13-3  
D Format USB-Memory ……………………………………………… 13-3  
■ Main dial brake adjustment ………………………………………… 13-3  
■ SWR reading …………………………………………………………… 13-4  
■ Screen type and font selections …………………………………… 13-4  
■ Frequency calibration (approximate) ……………………………… 13-5  
■ Opening the transceiver’s case ……………………………………… 13-6  
■ Clock backup battery replacement ………………………………… 13-6  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
■ Fuse replacement …………………………………………………… 13-7  
■ Resetting the CPU …………………………………………………… 13-7  
■ About protection indications ………………………………………… 13-8  
■ Screen saver function ………………………………………………… 13-8  
Section 14 CONTROL COMMAND  
■ Remote jack (CI-V) information ……………………………………… 14-2  
D CI-V connection example ………………………………………… 14-2  
D Data format ………………………………………………………… 14-2  
D Command table …………………………………………………… 14-3  
D To send/read memory contents …………………………………… 14-9  
D Band stacking register …………………………………………… 14-9  
D Codes for memory keyer contents ……………………………… 14-9  
D Codes for memory name, opening message  
and CLOCK2 name contents ……………………………………… 14-9  
D Offset frequency setting ………………………………………… 14-10  
D Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency setting ………………… 14-10  
D SSB transmission passband width setting …………………… 14-10  
D Color setting ……………………………………………………… 14-10  
D Bandscope edge frequency setting …………………………… 14-10  
D Data mode with filter width setting ……………………………… 14-10  
D Antenna memory setting ………………………………………… 14-10  
Section 15 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS  
■ Specifications ………………………………………………………… 15-2  
D General ……………………………………………………………… 15-2  
D Transmitter ………………………………………………………… 15-2  
D Receiver …………………………………………………………… 15-3  
D Antenna tuner ……………………………………………………… 15-3  
■ Options ………………………………………………………………… 15-4  
Section 16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
■ General ………………………………………………………………… 16-2  
■ Caution ………………………………………………………………… 16-2  
■ Preparation …………………………………………………………… 16-3  
D Firmware and firm utility …………………………………………… 16-3  
D File downloading …………………………………………………… 16-3  
■ Firmware update— USB-Memory …………………………………… 16-4  
■ Firmware update— PC ……………………………………………… 16-6  
D Connections ………………………………………………………… 16-6  
D IP address setting ………………………………………………… 16-7  
D Updating from the PC ……………………………………………… 16-8  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
Section 1  
■ Front panel ……………………………………………………………… 1-2  
■ Rear panel ……………………………………………………………… 1-12  
■ LCD display …………………………………………………………… 1-14  
■ Screen menu arrangement …………………………………………… 1-16  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
■ Front panel  
i o ! ! ! ! !  
TX  
RX  
SPLIT  
LOCK  
1.8  
10  
POWER  
1
4
7
q
w
TRANSMIT  
VOX  
BK-IN  
MONITOR  
DELAY  
21  
MIC  
RF PWR KEY SPEED  
GENE  
TUNER  
TIMER  
e
r
P  
AGC  
SQL  
NR  
NB  
PHONES  
XFC  
t
y
ELEC-KEY  
AGC VR  
NR  
AF  
NB  
RF  
F-1  
F-2  
CW  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
F-7  
MIC  
AUTO  
TUNE  
SSB  
RTTY/PSK  
AM/FM  
DATA  
M.SCOPE  
EXIT/SET  
u
REC  
PLAY  
DRIVE  
COMP  
MONI GAIN  
VOX GAIN  
ANTI VOX  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
VOICE MEMORY  
!
!
q POWER SWITCH POWER (p. 3-2)  
TIMER  
r TIMER SWITCH  
(p. 11-4)  
➥ Turns the sleep or daily timer function ON and  
Turn the internal power supply ON in first. The in-  
ternal power supply switch is located on the rear  
panel. (p. 3-2)  
OFF.  
• The [TIMER] indicator above this switch lights green  
when the timer is in use.  
➥ Enters timer set mode when pushed and held for  
1 sec.  
➥ Push to turn the transceiver power ON.  
• The [POWER] indicator above this switch lights green  
when powered ON.  
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the transceiver  
power OFF.  
t HEADPHONE JACK [PHONES]  
Accepts standard stereo headphones.  
• Output power: 5 mW with an 8 Ω load.  
• When headphones are connected, the internal speaker  
or connected external speaker does not function.  
• The [POWER] indicator lights orange when the trans-  
ceiver is OFF when the internal power supply is  
switched ON.  
y ELECTRONIC KEYER JACK [ELEC-KEY] (p. 2-5)  
Accepts a paddle to activate the internal electronic  
keyer for CW operation.  
w TRANSMIT SWITCH TRANSMIT  
Selects transmit or receive.  
• The [TX] indicator lights red while transmitting and the  
• You can select internal electronic keyer, bug-key or  
straight key operation in keyer set mode. (p. 4-12)  
• A straight key jack is located on the rear panel. See [CW  
KEY] on p. 1-12.  
• Keyer polarity (dot and dash) can be reversed in keyer  
set mode. (p. 4-12)  
[RX] indicator lights green when the squelch is open.  
e ANTENNA TUNER SWITCH TUNER (p. 10-6)  
➥ Turns the internal antenna tuner ON and OFF  
(bypass) when pushed momentarily.  
• The [TUNER] indicator above this switch lights green  
when the tuner is turned ON, goes off when tuner is  
turned OFF (bypassed).  
• 4-channel memory keyer is available for your conve-  
nience. (p. 4-8)  
(dot)  
➥ Tunes the antenna tuner manually when pushed  
and held for 1 sec.  
(com)  
(dash)  
• The [TUNER] indicator blinks red during manual tun-  
ing.  
• When the tuner cannot tune the antenna, the tuning  
circuit is bypassed automatically after 20 sec.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
1
u MICROPHONE CONNECTOR [MIC]  
Accepts an optional microphone.  
! ELECTRONIC CW KEYER SPEED CONTROL  
[KEY SPEED] (p. 4-4)  
• See p. 15-4 for appropriate microphones.  
• See p. 2-10 for microphone connector information.  
Adjusts the internal electronic CW keyer’s speed.  
• 6 wpm (min.) to 48 wpm (max.) is the available range.  
i MIC GAIN CONTROL [MIC] (p. 3-12)  
Adjusts microphone input gain.  
Max.  
48 wpm  
• The transmit audio tone in SSB, AM and FM modes can  
be adjusted independently in set mode. (p. 12-5)  
Min.  
6 wpm  
✔ How to set the microphone gain.  
Set the [MIC] control so that the ALC meter occasionally  
moves up-scale during normal voice transmission in SSB,  
AM or FM mode.  
! MONITOR SWITCH MONITOR (p. 6-4)  
Monitors your transmitted IF signal.  
• The CW sidetone functions regardless of MONITOR  
switch setting in CW mode.  
Recommended level for  
an Icom microphone  
• The [MONITOR] indicator above this switch lights green  
while the function is activated.  
Increases  
! BREAK-IN DELAY CONTROL [DELAY] (p. 6-3)  
Adjusts the transmit-to-receive switching delay time  
for CW semi-break-in operations.  
Decreases  
Increases  
Decreases  
o VOX SWITCH VOX  
Long delay for  
➥ Push to turn the VOX function ON and OFF dur-  
ing SSB, AM and FM mode operation. (p. 6-2)  
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter VOX set mode.  
(p. 6-2)  
slow speed keying  
Short delay for  
high speed keying  
✔ What is the VOX function?  
! AGC CONTROL [AGC] (p. 5-11)  
Adjusts the continuously-variable AGC circuit time  
constant.  
The VOX function (voice operated transmission) activates  
transmission without pushing the transmit switch or PTT  
switch when you speak into the microphone; then auto-  
matically returns to receive when you stop speaking.  
• To use [AGC] control, push AGC VR ([AGC VR] indi-  
cator lights).  
! RF POWER CONTROL [RF PWR] (p. 3-12)  
Continuously varies the RF output power from min-  
imum (5 W*) to maximum (200 W*).  
Slow  
*AM mode: 5 W to 50 W  
Fast  
Increases  
! SQUELCH CONTROL [SQL]  
(outer control; p. 3-9)  
Decreases  
Adjusts the squelch threshold level. The squelch  
mutes noise output from the speaker (closed condi-  
tion) when no signal is received.  
! BREAK-IN SWITCH BK-IN  
• The squelch is particularly effective for FM. It is also  
Push to turn the break-in function ON (semi-break-in,  
full-break-in) and OFF during CW mode operation.  
(p. 6-3)  
available in other modes.  
• The 11 to 12 o’clock position is recommended for the  
most effective use of the [SQL] control.  
Deep  
Squelch  
threshold  
Noise squelch  
✔ What is the break-in function?  
The break-in function switches transmit and receive with  
CW keying. Full break-in (QSK) can monitor the receive  
signal between CW dots and dashes.  
S-meter  
squelch  
Shallow  
Squelch is  
open  
Shallow  
Deep  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
■ Front panel (continued)  
TX  
RX  
SPLIT  
LOCK  
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER  
POWER  
1.8  
10  
1
4
7
i7700  
TRANSMIT  
TUNER  
VOX  
BK-IN  
MONITOR  
DELAY  
21  
MIC  
RF PWR KEY SPEED  
GENE  
P  
TIMER  
AGC  
SQL  
NR  
NB  
PHONES  
!
!
XFC  
ELEC-KEY  
AGC VR  
NR  
AF  
NB  
RF  
F-1  
F-2  
CW  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
F-7  
MIC  
AUTO  
TUNE  
SSB  
RTTY/PSK  
AM/FM  
DATA  
M.SCOPE  
EXIT/SET  
REC  
PLAY  
DRIVE  
COMP  
MONI GAIN  
VOX GAIN  
ANTI VOX  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
VOICE MEMORY  
! @ @  
@ @ @ @  
@
@
@
@
#
#
#
! NOISE REDUCTION LEVEL CONTROL [NR]  
@ USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTOR [USB]  
(p. 2-4)  
(inner control; p. 5-17)  
Adjusts the DSP noise reduction level when the  
noise reduction function is in use. Set for maximum  
readability.  
➥ Insert USB-Memory* for both reading/storing a  
wide variety of the transceiver’s information and  
data.  
• To use this control, push NR  
.
• The indicator above the connectors lights or blinks  
when the transceiver reads or writes to the memory  
data.  
• Unmount operation is necessary before removing the  
USB-Memory* (p.12-25).  
Increases  
➥ Connects a PC keyboard for RTTY and PSK31  
operations.  
Decreases  
• USB keyboard* is supported.  
*: USB-Memory or USB keyboard is not supplied by  
Icom.  
! NOISE BLANKER CONTROL [NB]  
(outer control; p. 5-16)  
Adjust the noise blanker threshold level.  
@ NOISE REDUCTION SWITCH NR (p. 5-17)  
Push to switch DSP noise reduction ON and OFF.  
• The [NR] indicator above this switch lights green when  
the function is activated.  
• To use this control, push NB  
.
Deep  
@ AF CONTROL [AF] (inner control; p. 3-9)  
Varies the audio output level of the speaker or  
headphones.  
Shallow  
! AGC VOLUME SWITCH AGC VR (p. 5-11)  
➥ Push to toggle [AGC] control usage ON and OFF.  
• Use [AGC] control to set the AGC time constant when  
switched ON.  
Audio output  
increases  
• The [AGC VR] indicator above this switch lights  
green when the control is ON.  
➥ Turns the AGC function OFF when pushed and  
held for 1 sec.  
Audio output  
decreases  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
1
@ RF GAIN CONTROL [RF] (outer control; p. 3-9)  
Adjusts the RF gain level.  
@ VOX GAIN CONTROL [VOX GAIN] (p. 6-2)  
Adjusts the transmit/receive switching threshold  
level for VOX operation.  
While rotating the RF gain control, you may hear  
noise. This comes from the DSP unit and does  
not indicate a malfunction.  
High  
sensitivity  
Push  
Sensitivity  
increases  
Low  
sensitivity  
Sensitivity  
decreases  
@ ANTI VOX CONTROL [ANTI VOX] (p. 6-2)  
Adjusts the VOX sensitivity to speaker audio to pre-  
vent unwanted VOX activation.  
@ NOISE BLANKER SWITCH NB (p. 5-16)  
➥ Switches the noise blanker ON and OFF when  
pushed. The noise blanker reduces pulse-type  
noise such as that generated by automobile igni-  
tion systems. This function cannot be used in FM  
mode, or non-pulse-type noise.  
‘Less sensitive’  
and confirm  
proper operation  
Push  
‘More sensitive’  
and confirm proper operation  
• The [NB] indicator above this switch lights green  
while the function is activated.  
➥ Enters blanking-width set mode when pushed  
and held for 1 sec.  
# LCD CONTRAST CONTROL [CONTRAST]  
Adjusts the LCD contrast.  
High  
contrast  
Push  
@ DRIVE GAIN CONTROL [DRIVE] (p. 3-13)  
Adjusts the transmitter level at the driver stage. Ac-  
tive in all modes (other than SSB mode with [COMP]  
OFF).  
Low  
contrast  
# LCD BRIGHTNESS CONTROL [BRIGHT]  
Increases  
Adjusts the LCD brightness.  
Push  
Decreases  
Bright  
Push  
Dark  
@ COMPRESSION LEVEL CONTROL [COMP]  
(p. 6-5)  
Adjusts the speech compression level in SSB.  
# AUTOMATIC TUNING SWITCH [AUTOTUNE]  
(p. 5-19)  
Compression  
Turns the automatic tuning function ON and OFF in  
CW and AM modes.  
gain increases  
Push  
Compression  
gain decreases  
IMPORTANT!  
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a sig-  
nal with interference, the automatic tuning func-  
tion may tune the receiver to an undesired signal.  
@ MONITOR GAIN CONTROL [MONI GAIN] (p. 6-4)  
Adjusts the transmit IF signal monitor level.  
Monitor gain  
increases  
Push  
Monitor gain  
decreases  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
■ Front panel (continued)  
#
# #  
#
#
#
#
$ $  
$
TWIN-PBT  
TX  
RX  
SPLIT  
LOCK  
NIVER  
1.8  
10  
3.5  
7
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
700  
FILTER  
14  
24  
50  
18  
28  
PBT-CLR  
M
21  
LAY  
GENE  
F-INPENT  
DIGI-SEL  
NOTCH  
DIGI-SEL  
APF/TPF  
NOTCH  
MP-W  
MP-R  
V/M  
MW  
A/B  
A=B  
TS  
RIT/∂TX  
RIT  
∂TX  
XFC  
CLEAR  
NB  
CW PITCH  
F-1  
F-2  
CW  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
F-7  
SPEECH  
SPLIT  
AUTO  
TUNE  
SSB  
RTTY/PSK  
AM/FM  
DATA  
M.SCOPE  
EXIT/SET  
LOCK  
REC  
PLAY  
DRIVE  
COMP  
MONI GAIN  
VOX GAIN  
ANTI VOX  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
VOICE MEMORY  
MF3 (MULTI-FUNCTION 3 SWITCH)  
# MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCHES  
➥ Selects one of 2 receive RF preamps  
or bypasses them. (p. 5-9)  
• “P. AMP1” activates 10 dB preamp.  
• “P. AMP2” activates 16 dB high-gain pre-  
amp.  
Push to select the functions indicated in the LCD  
display to the right of these switches.  
• Functions vary depending on the operating condition.  
P.AMP  
1
MF1 (MULTI-FUNCTION 1 SWITCH)  
➥ Selects the antenna connector from  
ANT  
1
✔ What is the preamp?  
ANT1, ANT2, ANT3 and ANT4 when  
The preamp amplifies signals in the receiver front end to  
improve S/N ratio and sensitivity. Select “P. AMP1” or “P.  
AMP2” when receiving weak signals..  
pushed. (p. 10-2)  
➥ Displays antenna selection memory  
when pushed and held for 1 sec.  
• When the receive antenna is activated,  
the antenna connected to [ANT4] is used  
for receive only.  
MF4 (MULTI-FUNCTION 4 SWITCH)  
➥ Selects 6 dB, 12 dB or 18 dB attenua-  
ATT  
tor when pushed. (p. 5-9)  
OFF  
When a transverter is in use, this [ANT]  
does not function and ‘TRV’ appears.  
➥ Turns the attenuator function OFF  
when pushed and held for 1 sec.  
(p. 5-9)  
MF2 (MULTI-FUNCTION 2 SWITCH)  
➥ Selects RF power (Po), SWR, ALC,  
METER  
Po  
✔ What is the attenuator?  
COMP, VD or ID metering during trans-  
mit. (p. 3-10)  
➥ Switches the multi-function digital  
meter ON and OFF when pushed and  
held for 1 sec. (p. 3-10)  
The attenuator prevents a desired signal from being dis-  
torted when very strong signals are near the desired fre-  
quency, or when very strong electromagnetic fields, such  
as from a broadcasting station, are near your location.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
1
MF5 (MULTI-FUNCTION 5 SWITCH)  
# LCD FUNCTION SWITCHES [F-1]–[F-7]  
➥ Activates and selects fast, mid-range  
Push to select the function indicated in the LCD dis-  
play above these switches.  
AGC  
MID  
or slow AGC time constant when  
• Functions vary depending on the operating condition.  
pushed. (p. 5-11)  
• In FM mode, only “FAST” is available.  
➥ Enters the AGC set mode when  
pushed and held for 1 sec. (p. 5-11)  
# TRANSMIT INDICATOR [TX]  
Lights red while transmitting.  
AGC time constant can be set between  
0.1 to 8.0 sec. (depends on mode), or  
turned OFF. When AGC is “OFF,” the  
S-meter does not function.  
# RECEIVE INDICATOR [RX]  
Lights green while receiving a signal and when the  
squelch is open.  
# LCD FUNCTION DISPLAY (p. 1-14)  
Shows the operating frequency, function switch  
menus, spectrum scope screen, memory list  
screen, set mode settings, etc.  
✔ What is the AGC?  
The AGC controls receiver gain to produce a constant  
audio output level, even when the received signal  
strength varies dramatically. Select “FAST” for tuning and  
then select “MID” or “SLOW” depending on the receiving  
condition.  
# SPLIT OPERATION INDICATOR [SPLIT]  
Lights during split frequency operation.  
# LOCK INDICATOR [LOCK] (p. 5-17)  
MF6 (MULTI-FUNCTION 6 SWITCH)  
Lights when the dial lock function is activated.  
➥ Turns the speech compressor ON and  
COMP  
OFF  
OFF in SSB mode. (p. 6-5)  
WIDE  
$ TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK SWITCH  
[XFC] (p. 6-6)  
➥ Switches the narrow, middle or wide  
compression when pushed and held  
for 1 sec.  
Monitors the transmit frequency (including ∂TX fre-  
quency offset) when pushed and held during split fre-  
quency operation.  
• While pushing this switch, the transmit frequency can be  
changed with the main dial, keypad, memo pad or  
✔ What is the speech compressor?  
The speech compressor compresses the transmitter  
audio input to increase the average audio output level, to  
increase talk power. This function is effective for long-dis-  
tance communication or when propagation conditions are  
poor.  
/
switches.  
∫
√
• When the split lock function is turned ON, pushing [XFC]  
cancels the dial lock function. (p. 6-7)  
$ MEMORY UP/DOWN SWITCHES  
/
∫
√
1
➥ Turns the ⁄4-speed tuning function ON  
1/4  
ON  
(p. 8-2)  
and OFF in SSB data, CW, RTTY and  
Push to select the desired memory channel.  
• Memory channels can be selected both in VFO and  
memory modes.  
PSK modes. (p. 3-6)  
• 1⁄4 function sets dial rotation to 1⁄4 of nor-  
mal speed for fine tuning.  
$ KEYPAD  
➥ Switches between the tone encoder,  
TONE  
➥ Pushing a key selects the operating band. (p. 3-4)  
tone squelch function and no-tone op-  
eration when pushed in FM mode.  
(pgs. 4-33, 4-34)  
OFF  
GENE  
•
selects the general coverage band.  
•
➥ Pushing the same key 2 or 3 times calls up other  
stacked frequencies in the band. (p. 3-4)  
• Icom’s triple band stacking register memorizes 3 fre-  
quencies in each band.  
➥ Enters the tone set mode when  
pushed and held for 1 sec. in FM  
mode. (pgs. 4-33, 4-34)  
F-INP  
➥ After pushing  
ENT , enters a frequency or  
F-INP  
memory channel. Pushing  
or  
/
∫
MF7 (MULTI-FUNCTION 7 SWITCH)  
ENT  
is necessary to end the entry. (pgs. 3-5,  
➥ Switches the voice squelch control  
√
VSC  
8-2)  
function ON and OFF; useful for scan-  
ning. (p. 9-3)  
OFF  
F-INP  
1.8  
F-INP  
ENT  
• e.g. to enter 14.195 MHz, push  
10  
ENT  
1
GENE  
1.8  
28  
14  
.
4
1
9
5
•
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
■ Front panel (continued)  
$ $  
$
$
$
$
$ % % %  
TWIN-PBT  
TX  
RX  
SPLIT  
LOCK  
VER  
1.8  
10  
3.5  
14  
24  
50  
7
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
70  
FILTER  
18  
28  
PBT-CLR  
M
21  
AY  
GENE  
F-INPENT  
DIGI-SEL  
NOTCH  
DIGI-SEL  
APF/TPF  
NOTCH  
MP-W  
MP-R  
V/M  
MW  
A/B  
A=B  
TS  
RIT/∂TX  
RIT  
∂TX  
XFC  
CLEAR  
B  
CW PITCH  
F-1  
F-2  
CW  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
F-7  
SPEECH  
SPLIT  
AUTO  
TUNE  
SSB  
RTTY/PSK  
AM/FM  
DATA  
M.SCOPE  
EXIT/SET  
LOCK  
REC  
PLAY  
DRIVE  
COMP  
MONI GAIN  
VOX GAIN  
ANTI VOX  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
VOICE MEMORY  
%
%
%
%
%
% % ^  
$ MODE SWITCHES  
Selects the desired mode. (p. 3-8)  
$ QUICK TUNING SWITCH [TS]  
➥ Turns the quick tuning step ON and OFF.  
• Announces selected mode via the speech synthesizer.  
(p. 12-15)  
(p. 3-6)  
• While the quick tuning indicator, “Z,” is displayed  
above the frequency indication, the frequency can be  
changed in programmed kHz steps.  
Selects USB and LSB modes alter-  
nately.  
SSB  
CW  
• 0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20 and 25 kHz steps are avail-  
able for each operating mode independently.  
➥ When the quick tuning step is OFF, push and  
hold for 1 sec. to turn the 1 Hz tuning step ON  
and OFF. (p. 3-7)  
➥ When the quick tuning step is ON, push and hold  
for 1 sec. to enter quick tuning step set mode.  
(p. 3-6)  
Selects CW and CW-R (CW reverse)  
modes alternately.  
RTTY/PSK ➥ Switches between RTTY and PSK  
mode.  
➥ Switches RTTY and RTTY-R (RTTY  
reverse) mode when pushed and held  
for 1 sec. in RTTY mode.  
➥ Switches PSK and PSK-R (PSK re-  
verse) mode when pushed and held  
for 1 sec. in PSK mode.  
$ VFO SELECT SWITCH A/B  
Switches the selected VFO between the VFO-A and  
VFO-B when pushed.  
• Switches between transmit frequency and receive fre-  
quency when the split frequency function is ON. (p. 6-6)  
AM/FM Selects AM and FM modes alternately.  
$ MEMORY WRITE SWITCH MW (p. 8-3)  
Stores the selected readout frequency and operat-  
ing mode into the displayed memory channel when  
pushed and held for 1 sec.  
DATA  
➥ Selects SSB, AM or FM data mode  
(USB-D, LSB-D, AM-D, FM-D) when  
pushed in SSB, AM or FM mode, re-  
spectively.  
➥ Switches D1, D2 and D3 when  
pushed and held for 1 sec.  
• This function is available both in VFO and memory  
modes.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
1
$ MEMO PAD-WRITE SWITCH MP-W (p. 8-7)  
Programs the displayed readout frequency and op-  
erating mode into a memo pad.  
% VOICE MEMORY RECORD SWITCH REC  
(p. 7-3)  
➥ Push to record the received signal for the preset  
• The 5 most recent entries remain in memo pads.  
• The memo pad capacity can be expanded from 5 to 10  
in set mode. (p. 12-15)  
time period.  
• After the preset time has passed, stops recording au-  
tomatically.  
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to record the received  
signal until the recording is canceled.  
• Push this switch momentarily to stop recording.  
• The memory records the latest 30 sec. of audio.  
$ MEMO PAD-READ SWITCH MP-R (p. 8-7)  
Each push calls up a frequency and operating mode  
in a memo pad. The 5 (or 10) most recently pro-  
grammed frequencies and operating modes can be  
recalled, starting from the most recent.  
% VOICE MEMORY PLAYBACK SWITCH PLAY  
(p. 7-4)  
• The memo pad capacity can be expanded from 5 to 10  
in set mode. (p. 12-15)  
➥ Plays back the previously recorded audio for the  
preset time period when pushed.  
➥ Plays back all of the previously recorded audio  
when pushed and held for 1 sec.  
$ VFO/MEMORY SWITCH V/M  
➥ Switches the selected readout operating mode  
between the VFO and memory when pushed.  
(pgs. 3-3, 8-2)  
➥ Transfers the memory contents to VFO when  
pushed and held for 1 sec. (p. 8-4)  
% EXIT/SET SWITCH EXIT/SET  
➥ Push to exit, or return to the previous screen in-  
dication during spectrum scope, memory, scan or  
set mode screen display.  
➥ Displays set mode menu screen when pushed  
and held for 1 sec.  
% VFO EQUALIZING SWITCH A=B (p. 3-3)  
Transfers the undisplayed VFO frequency to the  
displayed VFO frequency when pushed and held for  
1 sec.  
% MAIN DIAL  
Changes the displayed frequency, selects set mode  
setting, etc.  
% FILTER SWITCH FILTER (p. 5-13)  
➥ Selects one of 3 IF filter settings.  
➥ Enters the filter set screen when pushed and  
held for 1 sec.  
% LOCK SWITCH [LOCK] (p. 5-17)  
Push to switch the dial lock function ON and OFF.  
% AUDIO PEAK FILTER/TWIN PEAK FILTER  
SWITCH APF/TPF  
% SPEECH SWITCH SPEECH (p. 3-11)  
➥ Push to announce the S-meter indication and the  
selected frequency.  
➥ Push to turn the audio peak filter ON and OFF  
during CW mode operation. (p. 4-6)  
➥ The selected operating mode is additionally an-  
nounced when pushed and held for 1 sec.  
• “  
” appears when audio peak filter is in use.  
APF  
➥ Push to turn the twin peak filter ON and OFF dur-  
ing RTTY mode operation. (p. 4-14)  
^ SPLIT SWITCH SPLIT (p. 6-6)  
• “  
” appears when twin peak filter is in use.  
➥ Turns the split function ON and OFF when  
pushed.  
TPF  
➥ During CW mode operation, push and hold for  
1 sec. to select the APF passband width from  
320, 160 and 80 Hz. (p. 4-6)  
➥ Turns the split function ON. When pushed and  
held for 1 sec. in non-FM modes, transfers the  
unselected VFO’s readout frequency to the se-  
lected VFO’s readout and sets the unselected  
VFO to transmit VFO. (Quick split function)  
• The offset frequency is shifted from the selected VFO  
frequency in FM mode. (p. 12-13)  
% MINI SPECTRUM SCOPE SWITCH M.SCOPE  
(p. 5-4)  
➥ Turns the mini spectrum scope screen ON and  
OFF when pushed.  
• The mini spectrum scope screen can be displayed  
with another screen, such as memory or set mode  
screen, simultaneously.  
• The quick split function can be turned OFF using set  
mode. (p. 12-12)  
➥ Turns the split function ON and shifts the unse-  
lected VFO frequency after inputting an offset.  
➥ Turns the spectrum scope screen ON when  
pushed and held for 1 sec.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
■ Front panel (continued)  
TWIN-PBT  
TX  
RX  
SPLIT  
LOCK  
1.8  
10  
3.5  
14  
24  
50  
7
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
FILTER  
18  
28  
^
PBT-CLR  
21  
^
^
^
^
^
GENE  
F-INPENT  
DIGI-SEL  
NOTCH  
DIGI-SEL  
APF/TPF  
NOTCH  
MP-W  
MP-R  
V/M  
MW  
A/B  
A=B  
TS  
RIT/∂TX  
RIT  
∂TX  
XFC  
^
CLEAR  
CW PITCH  
F-1  
F-2  
CW  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
F-7  
SPEECH  
SPLIT  
AUTO  
TUNE  
SSB  
RTTY/PSK  
AM/FM  
DATA  
M.SCOPE  
EXIT/SET  
LOCK  
^
REC  
PLAY  
VE  
COMP  
MONI GAIN  
VOX GAIN  
ANTI VOX  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
VOICE MEMORY  
& &  
^
^ PASSBAND TUNING CONTROLS [TWIN-PBT]  
(p. 5-12)  
^ PBT CLEAR SWITCH PBT-CLR (p. 5-12)  
Clears the PBT settings when pushed and held for  
Adjusts the receiver’s IF filter “passband width” via  
1 sec.  
• The [PBT-CLR] indicator above this switch lights when  
PBT is in use.  
the DSP.  
• Passband width and shift frequency are displayed in the  
multi-function display.  
^ DIGITAL RF SELECTOR SWITCH DIGI-SEL  
(p. 5-18)  
• Push and hold PBT-CLR for 1 sec. to clear the PBT  
settings.  
• Adjustment range is set to half of the IF filter passband  
width. 25 Hz steps and 50 Hz steps are available.  
Turns the digital RF preselector ON and OFF.  
• The [DIGI-SEL] indicator lights green when the prese-  
lector is in use.  
✔ What is the PBT control?  
The PBT function electronically modifies the IF passband  
width to reject interference. This transceiver uses the  
DSP circuit for the PBT function.  
^ DIGITAL RF SELECTOR CONTROL [DIGI-SEL]  
(p. 5-18)  
Adjusts the digital RF selector center frequency.  
• The control can be reassigned as the audio peak filter  
adjustment (p. 12-16)  
PBT1  
PBT2  
Higher  
frequency  
Lower  
frequency  
–
+
High cut  
Center  
Low cut  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
1
^ MANUAL NOTCH FILTER CONTROL [NOTCH]  
(outer control; p. 5-18)  
^ CW PITCH CONTROL [CW PITCH] (p. 4-5)  
Shifts the received CW audio pitch and the CW side  
tone pitch without changing the operating frequency.  
Varies the “valley” frequency of the manual notch fil-  
ter to reject an interfering signal while the manual  
notch function is ON.  
High  
frequency  
• Notch filter center frequency:  
SSB : –1060 Hz to 4040 Hz  
CW : CW pitch freq. + 2540 Hz to CW pitch freq.  
–2540 Hz  
Low  
frequency  
AM : –5100 Hz to 5100 Hz  
^ RIT SWITCH RIT (p. 5-10)  
Higher  
frequency  
➥ Turns the RIT function ON and OFF when  
pushed.  
• Use [RIT/∂TX] control to vary the RIT frequency.  
➥ Adds the RIT shift frequency to the operating fre-  
quency when pushed and held for 1 sec.  
Lower  
frequency  
✔ What is the RIT function?  
Receiver incremental tuning (RIT) shifts the receive fre-  
quency without shifting the transmit frequency.  
^ NOTCH SWITCH NOTCH (p. 5-18)  
➥ Switches the notch function between auto, man-  
ual and OFF in SSB and AM modes.  
This is useful for fine tuning stations calling you off-fre-  
quency or when you prefer to listen to slightly different-  
sounding voice characteristics, etc.  
➥ Turns the manual notch function ON and OFF  
when pushed in CW, RTTY and PSK31 mode.  
➥ Turns the auto notch function ON and OFF when  
pushed in FM mode.  
& CLEAR SWITCH CLEAR (pgs. 5-10, 6-4)  
Clears the RIT/∂TX shift frequency when pushed  
and held for 1 sec. or when pushed momentarily,  
depending on the quick RIT/∂TX clear function set-  
ting (p. 12-15).  
• “  
” appears when manual notch is in use.  
MN  
• “  
” appears when auto notch is in use.  
AN  
➥ Switches the manual notch characteristics from  
wide, middle and narrow when pushed and held  
for 1 sec.  
∂TX  
& ∂TX SWITCH  
(p. 6-4)  
✔ What is the notch function?  
➥ Turns the ∂TX function ON and OFF when  
pushed.  
• Use [RIT/∂TX] control to vary the ∂TX frequency.  
➥ Adds the ∂TX shift frequency to the operating  
frequency when pushed and held for 1 sec.  
The notch function is a narrow filter that eliminates un-  
wanted CW or AM carrier tones while preserving the de-  
sired voice signal. The DSP circuit automatically adjusts  
the filtering frequency to effectively eliminate unwanted  
tones.  
∂
✔ What is the TX function?  
∂TX shifts the transmit frequency without shifting the re-  
ceive frequency. This is useful for simple split frequency  
operation in CW, etc.  
∂
∂
^ RIT/ TX CONTROL [RIT/ TX] (pgs. 5-10, 6-4)  
Shifts the receive and/or transmit frequency without  
changing the transmit and/or receive frequency  
shown on the main VFO.  
• Rotate the control clockwise to increase the frequency,  
or rotate the control counterclockwise to decrease the  
frequency. The RIT or ∂TX functions must be ON.  
Frequency  
increases  
Frequency  
decreases  
• The shift frequency range is ±9.999 kHz in 1 Hz steps  
(or ±9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps).  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
■ Rear panel  
q
w
e
r
t y  
u
i o  
!
-
REMOTE  
-
RS 232C  
EXT DISPLAY  
AC  
I
!
!
15A  
GND  
ANT 1  
ANT 2  
ANT 3  
ANT 4  
REF I/O  
10MHz  
-
10dBm  
DC OUT  
ACC  
1
RX ANT  
EXT  
KEYPAD  
S/P DIF  
OUT  
ALC  
ADJ  
15V  
-
2
CW KEY  
OUT  
IN  
EXT SP  
RELAY  
ALC  
-
METER  
X
VERTER  
MAX1A  
IN  
@
@
@
@ @  
@
@ @ @ ! ! ! ! ! ! !  
q ANTENNA CONNECTOR 1 [ANT 1] (p. 2-5)  
w ANTENNA CONNECTOR 2 [ANT 2] (p. 2-5)  
e ANTENNA CONNECTOR 3 [ANT 3] (p. 2-5)  
r ANTENNA CONNECTOR 4 [ANT 4] (p. 2-5)  
! RS-232C TERMINAL [RS-232C] (p. 2-6)  
Connects an RS-232C cable, D-sub 9-pin to con-  
nect the IC-7700 to a PC.  
Can be used to remotely control the IC-7700 with-  
out the optional CT-17, or for RTTY/PSK31 de-  
coded signal output. The [RS-232C] interface is  
wired as a modem (DCE).  
Accept a 50 Ω antenna with a PL-259 plug connec-  
tor.  
t GROUND TERMINAL [GND] (p. 2-4)  
Connect this terminal to a ground to prevent electri-  
cal shocks, TVI, BCI and other problems.  
! MAIN POWER SWITCH [I/O] (p. 3-2)  
Turns the internal power supply ON and OFF.  
y CIRCUIT BREAKER  
! AC POWER SOCKET [AC] (p. 2-5)  
Connects the supplied AC power cable to an AC  
line-voltage receptacle.  
Cuts off the AC input when over-current occurs.  
u EXTERNAL DISPLAY TERMINAL  
[EXT-DISPLAY] (p. 2-7)  
! REFERENCE SIGNAL INPUT/OUTPUT  
TERMINAL [REF I/O]  
Connects to an external display monitor.  
• At least 800×600 pixel display is necessary.  
Inputs/outputs a 10 MHz reference signal.  
i ETHERNET CONNECTOR (p. 16-6)  
Connects to a PC through a LAN (Local Area Net-  
work).  
! STRAIGHT KEY JACK [CW KEY] (p. 2-5)  
Accepts a straight key or external electronic keyer  
with 1⁄4 inch standard plug.  
• [ELEC-KEY] on the front panel can be used for a  
straight key or external electronic keyer. Deactivate the  
internal electronic keyer in keyer set mode. (p. 4-12)  
o CI-V REMOTE CONTROL JACK [REMOTE]  
(pgs. 2-6, 14-2)  
➥ Connects a PC via the optional CT-17 CI-V LEVEL  
CONVERTER for external control of the transceiver.  
➥ Used for transceive operation with another Icom  
CI-V transceiver or receiver.  
(+)  
(_)  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
1
! S/P DIF INPUT TERMINAL [S/P DIF– IN] (p. 2-7)  
! S/P DIF OUTPUT TERMINAL [S/P DIF– OUT]  
(p. 2-7)  
@ TRANSVERTER CONNECTOR [X-VERTER]  
(p. 2-6)  
External transverter input/output connector.  
Connects external equipment that supports S/P DIF  
input/output.  
Activated by voltage applied to [ACC 2] pin 6, or  
when the transverter function is in use. (pgs. 2-11)  
! ALC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT POT [ALC ADJ]  
Adjusts the ALC levels.  
@ RECEIVE ANTENNA IN [RX ANT– IN]  
@ RECEIVE ANTENNA OUT [RX ANT– OUT]  
Located between the transmit/receive switching cir-  
cuit and receiver’s RF stage.  
No adjustment is required when the ALC output  
level of a connected non-Icom linear amplifier is 0  
to –4 V a DC.  
Connects an external unit, such as preamplifier or  
RF filter, using BNC connectors, if desired.  
! ALC INPUT JACK [ALC] (p. 2-8)  
Connects to the ALC output jack of a non-Icom lin-  
ear amplifier.  
When no external unit is connected, [RX ANT– IN]  
and [RX ANT– OUT] must be deactivated and  
shorted by the switching relay internally. This set-  
ting is available on the antenna set screen. (p. 10-5)  
! T/R CONTROL JACK [RELAY] (p. 2-8)  
Connects to ground when transmitting to control an  
external unit, such as a non-Icom linear amplifier.  
NOTE: T/R control voltage and current must be  
lower than 16 V DC/0.5 A (or 250 V AC,  
200 mA with MOSFET switching).  
Transmitter  
Transmit/Receive  
switching circuit  
@ ACCESSORY SOCKET 1 [ACC 1]  
@ ACCESSORY SOCKET 2 [ACC 2]  
IN  
Enable connection of external equipment such as a  
linear amplifier, an automatic antenna selector/  
tuner, a TNC for data communications, etc.  
• See p. 2-11 for socket information.  
[RX ANT]  
OUT  
@
EXTERNAL SPEAKER JACK [EXT-SP] (p. 2-6)  
Connects an external speaker (4–8 Ω), if desired.  
Receiver  
@ EXTERNAL KEYPAD JACK [EXT KEYPAD]  
(p. 2-7)  
Connects an external keypad for direct voice mem-  
ory or electronic keyer control.  
Transceiver mute control line (both transmit and re-  
ceive) is also supported.  
@ METER JACK [METER] (p. 2-7)  
Outputs a signal showing received signal strength,  
transmit output power, VSWR, ALC, speech com-  
pression, VD or ID level for external meter indication.  
@ DC OUTPUT JACK [DC OUT] (p. 2-7)  
Outputs a regulated 14 V DC (approx.) for external  
equipment. Connected in parallel with 13.8 V out-  
puts of [ACC 1] and [ACC 2]. (max. 1 A in total)  
_
+
_
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
■ LCD display  
q
w
e
r t y  
u
i
o
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
@
@
@
@
@
!
@
!
!
q S/RF METER (pgs. 3-10, 3-11)  
w SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR (p. 5-12)  
Shows the signal strength while receiving. Shows  
the relative output power, SWR, ALC or compres-  
sion levels while transmitting.  
Shows the shift frequency of the IF filter.  
e BAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. 5-12)  
Shows the passband width of the IF filter.  
• A total of 3 meter types are available.  
r BANDPASS FILTER INDICATOR  
• Standard meter  
Appears when the narrow filter (500 Hz or less) is  
selected during CW, RTTY or PSK31 operation.  
9
+
20  
5
+
40  
1
+
60dB  
A
5
10  
S
0
50  
2
100  
150  
15  
200  
10  
ID  
0
t PASSBAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. 5-12)  
Graphically displays the passband width for twin  
PBT operation and center frequency for IF shift op-  
eration.  
250 W  
3
Po  
SWR  
COMP  
1.5  
20  
10  
1
∞
0
dB  
44  
ALC  
VD  
52V  
• Edgewise meter  
y NOTCH INDICATOR (p. 5-18)  
+
+
+
1
3
5
7
9
20  
40 60dB  
➥ “  
” appears when the manual notch function  
MN  
S
Po  
is in use. This function is available in SSB, CW,  
RTTY, PSK and AM modes.  
0
50  
100  
150  
200 250W  
➥ “  
” appears when the auto notch function is  
AN  
in use. This function is available in SSB, AM and  
FM modes.  
• Bar meter  
u RTTY TUNING INDICATOR  
1
3
5
7
9
+
+
+
20 40 60dB  
S
Shows the tuning condition in RTTY mode.  
Po  
0
10  
50  
100 150 200 250W  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
1
i APF/TPF INDICATOR  
@ TX INDICATOR  
➥ “  
” appears when the audio peak filter func-  
Indicates the frequency readout for transmit.  
APF  
tion is in use. This function is available in CW  
mode. (p. 4-6)  
@ VFO/MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. 3-3)  
Indicates the VFO mode or selected memory chan-  
nel number.  
➥ “  
” appears when the twin peak filter function  
TPF  
is in use. This function is available in RTTY  
mode. (p. 4-14)  
@ MODE INDICATOR  
Shows the selected mode.  
o CLOCK READOUT  
Shows the current time. Local and UTC time can be  
indicated at the same time.  
! USB-MEMORY INDICATOR  
Appears when USB-Memory is connected and  
blinks while reading or writing the USB-Memory.  
! RIT INDICATOR  
Appears when RIT function is in use.  
∂
!
TX INDICATOR  
Appears when ∂TX function is in use.  
! RIT/∂TX SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR  
Shows the shift frequency for the RIT or ∂TX func-  
tion.  
! IF FILTER INDICATOR (p. 5-13)  
Shows the selected IF filter number.  
! QUICK TUNING INDICATOR (p. 3-6)  
Appears when the quick tuning step function is in use.  
! FREQUENCY READOUTS  
Shows the operating frequency.  
! MULTI-FUNCTION SCREEN  
Shows the screens for the multi-function digital  
meter, spectrum scope, voice recorder, memory list,  
scan, memory keyer, RTTY decoder, PSK decoder,  
IF filter selection or set modes, etc.  
! LCD FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE  
Indicates the function of the LCD function switches  
([F-1] – [F-7]).  
! MEMORY CHANNEL READOUTS  
➥ Shows the selected memory channel contents in  
VFO mode.  
➥ Shows the VFO contents in memory mode.  
@ MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE  
Indicates the function of the multi-function switches.  
@ SELECT MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. 9-7)  
Indicates the displayed memory channel is set as a  
select memory channel.  
@ SELECT ANTENNA INDICATOR  
Indicates the selected antenna.  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION  
■ Screen menu arrangement  
The following screens can be selected from the start  
up screen. Choose the desired screen using the fol-  
lowing chart.  
Pushing EXIT/SET several times returns to the start up  
screen. See p. 12-3 for set mode arrangement.  
• PSK31 decoder screen (PSK mode; p. 4-21)  
F-1  
F-2  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
F-7  
F-3  
• Spectrum scope screen (p. 5-2)  
• Memory list screen (p. 8-5)  
F-4  
• Voice recorder screen (p. 7-3)  
• Scan screen (VFO mode; p. 9-4)  
F-2  
F-3  
F-3  
F-5  
• Memory keyer screen (CW mode; p. 4-8)  
• Scan screen (Memory mode; p. 9-6)  
F-5  
• RTTY decoder screen (RTTY mode; p. 4-13)  
• Set mode menu screen (p. 12-2)  
F-7  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
Section 2  
■ Unpacking ……………………………………………………………… 2-2  
■ Main dial attachment …………………………………………………… 2-2  
■ Rack mounting handle detachment …………………………………… 2-3  
■ Selecting a location …………………………………………………… 2-3  
■ Grounding ……………………………………………………………… 2-4  
■ Antenna connection …………………………………………………… 2-4  
■ USB-Memory connection ……………………………………………… 2-4  
■ Required connections ………………………………………………… 2-5  
D Front panel …………………………………………………………… 2-5  
D Rear panel …………………………………………………………… 2-5  
■ Advanced connections ………………………………………………… 2-6  
D Front panel …………………………………………………………… 2-6  
D Rear panel—1 ……………………………………………………… 2-6  
D Rear panel—2 ……………………………………………………… 2-7  
■ Linear amplifier connections …………………………………………… 2-8  
D Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO …………………………………… 2-8  
D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier …………………………… 2-8  
■ Transverter jack information …………………………………………… 2-9  
■ FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections ………………………………… 2-9  
■ Microphone connector information ………………………………… 2-10  
■ Microphones (options) ………………………………………………… 2-10  
D SM-20 ……………………………………………………………… 2-10  
D HM-36 ……………………………………………………………… 2-10  
■ Accessory connector information …………………………………… 2-11  
CAUTION!: The transceiver weighs approx. 24 kg (53 lb).  
Always have two people available to carry, lift or  
turn over the transceiver.  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
■ Unpacking  
After unpacking, immediately report any damage to the  
delivering carrier or dealer. Keep the shipping cartons.  
For a description and a diagram of accessory equip-  
ment included with the IC-7700, see ‘Supplied acces-  
sories’ on p. iii of this manual.  
■ Main dial attachment  
The main dial is shipped unattached to the transceiver  
to prevent possible damage to the dial shaft or rotary  
encoder during shipping. Please attach the dial as de-  
scribed below.  
q
R
CAUTION!: NEVER hold any controller  
knob(s), such as the main dial, when carrying or lift-  
ing the transceiver. This will damage the dial shaft or  
rotary encoder.  
q Slide the dial brake adjustment to the right position  
(Fig. 1).  
• The dial brakes move inward as shown.  
Dial brake adjustment  
w Remove the rubber cover of the main dial (Fig. 2).  
Fig. 1  
e Insert the main dial set-screw into the screw hole of  
the main dial, then tighten the screw until the screw  
extends into the shaft hole out slightly using sup-  
plied hexagonal wrench (2 mm) (Fig. 2).  
w
e
Shorter than  
1 mm ( /32 in)  
1
• Be careful that the screw does not extend out more than  
1
1 mm ( /32 in).  
r Attach the main dial as illustrated (Fig. 3).  
• Be careful to match the correct orientation of the flat face  
of the shaft and the screw hole of the dial knob.  
Fig. 2  
t Tighten the screw using supplied hexagonal wrench  
as illustrated (Fig. 3).  
r
t
y Install the rubber cover of the main dial (Fig. 4).  
Then adjust the main dial brake as desired.  
✔ When re-packing and shipping the transceiver:  
Slide the dial brake adjustment to the right position,  
then detach the main dial when re-packing and ship-  
ping the transceiver at any time.  
Fig. 3  
y
Fig. 4  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
2
■ Rack mounting handle detachment  
The rack mounting handles are supplied attached to  
the transceiver to stabilize the transceiver in the shock  
absorber material in the box. If you want to remove  
them, use the supplied screws as described below.  
FH: Flat head  
PH: Pan head  
q
q Remove the six screws from the rack mounting han-  
dles on both side and remove the rack mounting  
handles.  
w Tighten the supplied six screws (PH M4×8) on both  
sides of the front panel and side panel to hide the  
screw holes on both sides.  
FH M4×9 mm  
FH M4×15 mm  
✔ When re-packing and shipping the transceiver:  
Attach the rack mounting handles using original screws  
when re-packing and shipping the transceiver at any  
time.  
w
PH M4×8 mm  
■ Selecting a location  
Select a location for the transceiver that allows ade-  
quate air circulation, free from extreme heat, cold, or  
vibrations, and away from TV sets, TV antenna ele-  
ments, radios and other electromagnetic sources.  
The base of the transceiver has an adjustable feet for  
desktop use. Set the feet to one of two angles de-  
pending on your operating preference.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
■ Grounding  
To prevent electrical shock, television interference  
(TVI), broadcast interference (BCI) and other prob-  
lems, ground the transceiver through the GROUND  
terminal on the rear panel.  
For best results, connect a heavy gauge wire or strap  
to a long earth-sunk copper rod. Make the distance be-  
tween the [GND] terminal and ground as short as pos-  
sible.  
R WARNING: NEVER connect the [GND]  
terminal to a gas or electric pipe, since the connec-  
tion could cause an explosion or electric shock.  
■ Antenna connection  
For radio communications, the antenna is of critical im-  
portance, along with output power and receiver sensi-  
tivity. Select antenna(s), such as a well-matched 50 Ω  
antenna, and feedline. We recommend 1.5:1 or better  
of Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) for your de-  
sired band. Of course, the transmission line should be  
a coaxial cable.  
PL-259 CONNECTOR INSTALLATION EXAMPLE  
q
30 mm  
Slide the coupling ring  
down. Strip the cable  
jacket and in the braid.  
Coupling ring  
10 mm (soft solder)  
w
10 mm  
Soft  
Strip the cable as  
shown at left. Tin the  
center conductor.  
solder  
When using 1 antenna, use the [ANT1] connector.  
1–2 mm  
CAUTION: Protect your transceiver from lightning  
by using a lightning arrestor.  
solder solder  
e
r
Slide the connector  
body on and solder it.  
Antenna SWR  
Each antenna is tuned for a specified frequency  
range and SWR may be increased out-of-range.  
When the SWR is higher than approx. 2.0:1, the  
transceiver’s power drops to protect the final transis-  
tors. In this case, an antenna tuner is useful to match  
the transceiver and antenna. Low SWR allows full  
power for transmitting. The IC-7700 has an SWR  
meter to monitor the antenna SWR continuously.  
Screw the coupling  
ring  
onto  
the  
connector body.  
9
3
1
30 mm ≈ ⁄8 in 10 mm ≈ ⁄8 in 1–2 mm ≈ ⁄16 in  
■ USB-Memory connection (USB-Memory: Not supplied by Icom)  
Connect the USB-Memory* to the USB connector.  
• Unmount operation is necessary before removing the USB-  
Memory* (p.12-25).  
Make sure to connect the USB-Memory correctly.  
NEVER connect or remove the USB-Memory when  
the read/write indicator lights or blinks.  
A USB keyboard* or USB hub* can also be con-  
nected to the USB connector.  
or  
*: USB-Memory, USB keyboard or USB hub is not supplied  
by Icom.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
2
■ Required connections  
D
Front panel  
CW key  
TX  
RX  
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER  
POWER  
i7700  
TRANSMIT  
VOX  
BK-IN  
MONITOR  
DELAY  
MIC  
RF PWR KEY SPEED  
TUNER  
TIMER  
A straight or bug key can be used when  
the internal electronic keyer is turned  
OFF in keyer set mode. (p. 4-12)  
AGC  
SQL  
NR  
NB  
PHONES  
Microphones (p. 2-10)  
ELEC-KEY  
AGC VR  
NR  
AF  
NB  
RF  
F-1  
F-2  
CW  
MIC  
Optional  
SM-20  
Optional  
HM-36  
SSB  
S  
DRIVE  
COMP  
MONI GAIN  
VO
D
Rear panel  
Ground  
(p. 2-4)  
Use the heaviest gauge  
wire or strap available and  
make the connection as  
short as possible.  
AC outlet  
R WARNING:  
Use the supplied  
AC power cable  
only.  
Grounding prevents elec-  
trical shocks, TVI and oth-  
er problems.  
-
REMOTE  
-
RS 232C  
EXT DISPLAY  
AC  
I
15A  
GND  
ANT  
1
ANT  
2
ANT  
3
ANT  
4
REF I/O  
10MHz  
-
10dBm  
DC OUT  
ACC  
RX ANT  
EXT  
KEYPAD  
S/P DIF  
OUT  
ALC  
ADJ  
15V  
-
2
1
CW KEY  
OUT  
IN  
METER  
EXT SP  
RELAY  
ALC  
-
X
VERTER  
MAX1A  
IN  
Straight key  
Antenna 1, 2, 3, 4 (p. 2-4)  
[Example]: ANT1 for 1.8—18 MHz bands, ANT 2 for 21—28 MHz bands  
ANT3 for 50 MHz band, ANT 4 for receive antenna.  
NOTE: Attach the sup-  
plied antenna connec-  
tor cap when no anten-  
na or external equip-  
ment is connected.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
■ Advanced connections  
D
Front panel  
USB-Memory  
Headphones  
TX  
RX  
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER  
POWER  
i7700  
TRANSMIT  
VOX  
BK-IN  
MONITOR  
DELAY  
MIC  
RF PWR KEY SPEED  
TUNER  
TIMER  
Keyboard  
Connects an USB type PC key-  
board directly for RTTY/PSK31 op-  
eration, as well as other text edit op-  
erations.  
AGC  
SQL  
NR  
NB  
PHONES  
ELEC-KEY  
AGC VR  
NR  
AF  
NB  
RF  
F-1  
F-2  
CW  
F
MIC  
MIC  
SSB  
RTTY/P
The AFSK modulation signal can also  
be input to [MIC].  
DRIVE  
COMP  
MONI GAIN  
VOX GAIN  
D
Rear panel— 1  
Antenna 1, 2, 3, 4 (p. 2-8)  
Connects a linear amplifier,  
antenna selector, etc.  
[REMOTE], [RS-232C] (p. 14-2)  
Used for computer control and transceive operation.  
The optional CT-17 is required when connecting a  
PC to [REMOTE].  
[X-VERTER]  
Connects a transverter  
for V/UHF band use.  
-
REMOTE  
-
RS 232C  
EXT DISPLAY  
AC  
I
15A  
GND  
ANT  
1
ANT  
2
ANT  
3
ANT  
4
REF I/O  
10MHz  
-
10dBm  
DC OUT  
ACC  
RX ANT  
EXT  
KEYPAD  
S/P DIF  
OUT  
ALC  
ADJ  
15V  
-
2
1
CW KEY  
OUT  
IN  
METER  
EXT SP  
RELAY  
ALC  
-
X
VERTER  
MAX1A  
IN  
[RELAY], [ALC] (p. 2-8)  
Used for connecting a  
non-Icom linear amplifier.  
RX ANT IN/OUT  
Connects an external  
preamp or lowpass filter.  
External speaker (p. 15-4)  
RX ANT IN/OUT must be  
activated in the antenna  
set screen (p.10-5).  
ACC sockets  
(pgs. 2-9, 2-11)  
SP-20  
(option)  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
2
D
Rear panel— 2  
Ethernet connector (p. 16-6)  
External Display  
Connects a PC-style  
Connects a PC  
via a LAN for the  
CPU firmware  
update.  
monitor display (at least  
800×600 resolution).  
Video output signal can  
be turned ON and OFF  
in set mode (p. 12-11)  
-
REMOTE  
-
RS 232C  
EXT DISPLAY  
AC  
I
15A  
GND  
ANT  
1
ANT  
2
ANT  
3
ANT  
4
REF I/O  
10MHz  
-
10dBm  
DC OUT  
ACC  
RX ANT  
EXT  
KEYPAD  
S/P DIF  
OUT  
ALC  
ADJ  
15V  
-
2
1
CW KEY  
OUT  
IN  
METER  
EXT SP  
RELAY  
ALC  
-
X
VERTER  
MAX1A  
IN  
[METER]  
[S/P DIF IN/OUT]  
Connects an external meter, etc.  
Connects a PC for  
audio signal data  
(48 kHz, 16-bit)  
input/output.  
3.5 (d) mm; 1⁄8″ plug  
External keypad  
[DC OUT]  
Connects an external keypad for direct voice memory  
Outputs regulated 14 V  
(approx.) DC for external  
equipment power supply.  
(max. 1 A capacity)  
and memory keyer controls.  
EXTERNAL KEYPAD  
1.5 kΩ 1.5 kΩ 2.2 kΩ 4.7 kΩ  
3.5 (d) mm; 1⁄8″ plug  
5%  
5%  
5%  
5%  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
(T1/M1) (T2/M2) (T3/M3) (T4/M4)  
Mute switch: Mutes both transmission and  
reception when switched ON during trans-  
ceive operation, etc.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
■ Linear amplifier connections  
D
Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO  
ACC-1  
ACC cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)  
To an  
antenna  
Remote control cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)  
Be sure to connect the cable  
to the 7-pin ACC 2 jack.  
Coaxial cable  
(supplied with the  
IC-PW1/EURO)  
REMOTE  
ANT  
Connect  
[INPUT2]  
if necessary  
INPUT1  
INPUT2  
REMOTE  
Coaxial cable*  
EXCITER  
1&2  
1
ANT1  
ANT2  
GND  
ACC 2  
GND  
Transceiver  
IC-PW1/EURO  
*Optional  
AC outlet  
Ground  
(Non-European versions: 100–120/220–240 V  
European version : 230 V)  
D
Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier  
R WARNING:  
Set the transceiver output power and linear ampli-  
fier ALC output level after referring to the linear am-  
plifier instruction manual.  
The ALC input level must be in the range 0 V to  
–4 V. The transceiver does not accept positive volt-  
age. Non-matched ALC and RF power settings  
could overheat or damage the linear amplifier.  
ANT1  
Transceiver  
ALC  
To an  
antenna  
RELAY  
50 Ω  
coaxial cable  
The maximum signal level of [RELAY] jack is  
16 V/0.5 A DC with initial setting, and 250 V/200 mA  
with “MOSFET” setting (see p. 12-8 for details). Use  
an external relay unit if your non-Icom linear ampli-  
fier requires control voltage and/or current greater  
than specified.  
RF OUTPUT  
RF INPUT  
SEND  
ALC  
Non-Icom linear amplifier  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
2
■ Transverter jack information  
When 2 to 13.8 V is applied to pin 6 of [ACC 2], the [X-  
VERTER] connector is activated for transverter oper-  
ation and the antenna connectors do not receive or  
transmit any signals.  
While receiving, [X-VERTER] connector can be acti-  
vated as an input terminal from an external transverter.  
While transmitting, the [X-VERTER] connector outputs  
signals of the displayed frequency at –20 dBm (22 mV)  
as signals for the external transverter.  
Transverter connector  
■ FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections  
To connect a TNC or scan converter, etc., refer to the  
diagram below.  
D FSK operation— when connecting to [ACC 1]  
• When using a PC application  
Connect to serial port, parallel  
port, speaker jack, microphone  
jack and line IN/OUT jack, etc.  
See the instruction manual of the  
application for details.  
RTTY  
RTTY OUTPUT  
GND  
GND  
PC  
2
8
AF  
4
6
AUDIO INPUT  
PTT  
5
7
1
3
SEND  
Rear panel view  
TNC or scan converter  
• When using a TNC  
RS-232C  
RTTY  
GND  
RTTY OUTPUT  
GND  
2
4
AUDIO INPUT  
PTT  
5
7
AF  
1
3
8
SEND  
6
Rear panel view  
D AFSK operation  
• When connecting to [ACC 1]  
• When using a PC application  
z
Connect to serial port, parallel  
port, speaker jack, microphone  
jack and line IN/OUT jack, etc.  
See the instruction manual of  
the application for details.  
Audio output  
GND  
z
x
PC  
x
2
4
6
5
7
c
v
AF input  
PTT  
c
v
1
3
8
b
n†  
Rear panel view  
• When connecting to [MIC]  
• When using a TNC  
RS-232C  
AFSK output  
TNC or scan converter  
z
c
z
x
c
v
b
n†  
AF input  
PTT*  
q
u
x
b
w
i
r
y
e
t
GND  
SQL input†  
v*  
n†  
*When using the VOX function, no need to connect. Refer to the instruction  
manual of the external equipment (TNC, etc.).  
Rear panel view  
†When connecting the squelch line, consult the necessary manual (TNC, etc.).  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
■ Microphone connector information  
(Front panel view)  
[MIC]  
Pin No.  
i AF output (varies with [AF])  
FUNCTION  
DESCRIPTION  
Max. 10 mA  
q Microphone input  
u GND  
w
+8 V DC output  
Frequency up  
Frequency down  
Squelch open  
Squelch closed  
(Microphone ground)  
Ground  
w +8 V DC output  
y GND (PTT ground)  
e
Ground through 470 Ω  
“Low” level  
e Frequency up/down  
t PTT  
r
r Squelch switch  
“High” level  
CAUTION: DO NOT short pin 2 to ground as this  
can damage the internal 8 V regulator.  
NOTE: DC voltage is applied to pin 1 for micro-  
phone operation. Use caution when using a non-  
Icom microphone.  
■ Microphones (options)  
qUP/DOWN SWITCHES [UP]/[DN]  
Change the selected readout frequency or memory  
channel.  
D SM-20  
• Continuous pushing changes the frequency or memory  
channel number continuously.  
• While pushing [XFC], the transmit readout frequency can  
be controlled while in split frequency operation.  
• The [UP]/[DN] switch can simulate a key paddle. Preset  
in the keyer set mode. (p. 4-12)  
q
wPTT SWITCH  
Push and hold to transmit; release to receive.  
w
e
ePTT LOCK SWITCH (available for SM-20 only)  
Push to toggle between transmit and receive.  
D HM-36  
q
w
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
2
■ Accessory connector information  
ACC 1  
PIN No. NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
SPECIFICATIONS  
“High” level  
“Low” level  
Output current  
: More than 2.4 V  
: Less than 0.6 V  
: Less than 2 mA  
1
2
RTTY Controls RTTY keying  
GND Connects to ground.  
Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 2.  
Ground level  
Output current  
Input current (Tx) : Less than 200 mA  
Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 3.  
: –0.5 V to 0.8 V  
: Less than 20 mA  
Input/output pin.  
SEND Goes to ground when transmitting.  
When grounded, transmits.  
3
2
4
5
7
Modulator input.  
MOD  
Input impedance  
Input level  
: 10 kΩ  
: Approx. 100 mV rms  
4
5
1
3
Connects to a modulator.  
8
6
AF detector output.  
AF Fixed, regardless of [AF] position  
in default settings. (see notes below)  
Output impedance : 4.7 kΩ  
Output level  
: 100–300 mV rms  
Squelch output.  
SQLS  
SQL open  
: Less than 0.3 V/5 mA  
: More than 6.0 V/100 µA  
6
7
Goes to ground when squelch opens. SQL closed  
Output current  
Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 7.  
: Max. 1 A  
13.8 V 13.8 V output when power is ON.  
Control voltage  
Input impedance  
: –4 V to 0 V  
: More than 10 kΩ  
8
ALC ALC voltage input.  
Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 5.  
ACC 2  
PIN No. NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Output voltage  
Output current  
: 8 V ±0.3 V  
: Less than 10 mA  
1
8 V Regulated 8 V output.  
2
3
GND  
Same as ACC 1 pin 2.  
Same as ACC 1 pin 3.  
2
SEND  
4
5
7
1
3
Band voltage output.  
BAND  
4
5
6
7
Output voltage  
: 0 to 8.0 V  
6
(Varies with amateur band)  
ALC  
Same as ACC 1 pin 8.  
Activates [X-VERTER] input/output Input impedance  
: More than 10 kΩ  
: 2 to 13.8 V  
TRV  
when “HIGH” voltage is applied.  
Input voltage  
13.8 V  
Same as ACC 1 pin 7.  
NOTE: If the CW side tone level limit or beep level  
limit is in use, the CW side tone or beep tone de-  
creases from the fixed level when the [AF] control is  
rotated above a specified level. (p. 12-6)  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC OPERATIONS  
Section 3  
■ When first applying power (CPU resetting) ………………………… 3-2  
■ Initial settings …………………………………………………………… 3-2  
■ Selecting VFO/memory mode ………………………………………… 3-3  
■ VFO selection …………………………………………………………… 3-3  
D Selecting VFO-A/VFO-B …………………………………………… 3-3  
D VFO equalization …………………………………………………… 3-3  
■ Selecting an operating band …………………………………………… 3-4  
D Using the band stacking registers ………………………………… 3-4  
■ Frequency setting ……………………………………………………… 3-5  
D Tuning with the main dial …………………………………………… 3-5  
D Direct frequency entry with the keypad …………………………… 3-5  
D Quick tuning step …………………………………………………… 3-6  
D Selecting “kHz” step ………………………………………………… 3-6  
1
D ⁄4 tuning step function ……………………………………………… 3-6  
D Selecting 1 Hz step ………………………………………………… 3-7  
D Auto tuning step function …………………………………………… 3-7  
D Band edge warning beep …………………………………………… 3-7  
■ Operating mode selection ……………………………………………… 3-8  
■ Volume setting ………………………………………………………… 3-9  
■ RF gain adjustment …………………………………………………… 3-9  
■ Squelch level adjustment ……………………………………………… 3-9  
■ Meter indication selection …………………………………………… 3-10  
D Multi-function digital meter ………………………………………… 3-10  
D Meter type selection ……………………………………………… 3-11  
■ Voice synthesizer operation ………………………………………… 3-11  
■ Basic transmit operation ……………………………………………… 3-12  
D Transmitting ………………………………………………………… 3-12  
D Microphone gain adjustment ……………………………………… 3-12  
D Drive gain adjustment ……………………………………………… 3-13  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
BASIC OPERATIONS  
■ When first applying power (CPU resetting)  
Before first applying power, make sure all connections  
required for your system are complete by referring to  
Section 2. Then, reset the transceiver using the follow-  
ing procedure.  
Resetting CLEARS all programmed contents in  
memory channels and returns programmed values  
in set mode to default values.  
q Turn the main power ON with [I/O] on the rear  
[I/O]  
panel.  
• The transceiver power is still OFF and the power indi-  
cator lights orange.  
F-INP  
w While pushing and holding  
push POWER to turn power ON.  
• The CPU is reset.  
and MW  
,
ENT  
• The CPU start-up takes approx. 5 sec.  
• The transceiver displays its initial VFO frequencies  
when resetting is complete.  
e Change the set mode settings after resetting, if de-  
sired.  
F-INP  
POWER  
MW  
ENT  
In cooler temperatures, the LCD may appear dark  
and unstable after turning power ON. This is normal  
and does not indicate any equipment malfunction.  
■ Initial settings  
After resetting the transceiver, set controls as shown  
in the figure below.  
[NR]  
[KEY SPEED]  
: 10–12 o’clock  
: Max. counter clockwise  
[DELAY]  
[NB]  
: Max. clockwise  
: Max. counter clockwise  
TWIN-PBT  
TX  
RX  
SPLIT  
LOCK  
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER  
1.8  
10  
3.5  
14  
24  
50  
7
POWER  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
i7700  
FILTER  
18  
28  
TRANSMIT  
TUNER  
PBT-CLR  
VOX  
RF PWR  
BK-IN  
MONITOR  
DELAY  
21  
[MIC]  
: 10–12 o’clock  
[NOTCH]  
: 12 o’clock  
MIC  
KEY SPEED  
GENE  
F-INPENT  
DIGI-SEL  
NOTCH  
DIGI-SEL  
APF/TPF  
NOTCH  
MP-W  
MP-R  
V/M  
TIMER  
[DEGI-SEL]  
: 12 o’clock  
MW  
A/B  
[RF PWR]  
: Max. clockwise  
AGC  
SQL  
NR  
NB  
A=B  
TS  
PHONES  
RIT/∂TX  
RIT  
∂TX  
XFC  
[AGC]: 12 o’clock  
[SQL]  
: Max. counter-  
clockwise  
ELEC-KEY  
CLEAR  
AGC VR  
NR  
AF  
NB  
RF  
CW PITCH  
F-1  
F-2  
CW  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
F-7  
SPEECH  
SPLIT  
MIC  
AUTO  
TUNE  
SSB  
RTTY/PSK  
AM/FM  
DATA  
M.SCOPE  
EXIT/SET  
LOCK  
REC  
PLAY  
DRIVE  
COMP  
MONI GAIN  
VOX GAIN  
ANTI VOX  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHT  
VOICE MEMORY  
[AF]  
: Max. counter-  
clockwise  
[CW PITCH]  
: 12 o’clock  
[RF]  
: Max. clockwise  
[DRIVE], [COMP], [MONI GAIN],  
[VOX GAIN], [ANTI VOX]  
: 12 o’clock  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC OPERATIONS  
3
■ Selecting VFO/memory mode  
➥ Push V/M to switch between VFO and memory  
modes.  
• “VFO-A” or “VFO-B” appears when in VFO mode, or the  
selected memory channel number appears when in  
memory mode.  
• Pushing and holding V/M for 1 sec. transfers the  
contents of the selected memory channel to VFO.  
(p. 8-4)  
V/M  
“VFO” indicator  
Memory channel  
number  
■ VFO selection  
VFO is an abbreviation of Variable Frequency Oscilla-  
tor, and is commonly referred to as a main tuning func-  
tion.  
The main dial is often called the “VFO knob.”  
D
Selecting VFO-A/VFO-B  
➥ In VFO mode, push  
A/B  
to toggle VFO-A and  
VFO-B.  
• “VFO-A ” or “VFO-B ” appears when VFO-A or VFO-B is  
selected, respectively  
A/B  
D
VFO equalization  
➥ In VFO mode, push and hold A=B for 1 sec. to  
set the undisplayed VFO frequency and mode to  
those of the displayed VFO.  
• Three beeps sound when the VFO equalization is com-  
pleted.  
A=B  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
BASIC OPERATIONS  
■ Selecting an operating band  
The triple band stacking register provides 3 memories  
for each band key, storing frequency and mode infor-  
mation.  
Band keys  
This function is convenient when you operate 3 modes  
on one band. For example, one register is used for a  
CW frequency, another for an SSB frequency and the  
other one for an RTTY frequency.  
If a band key is pushed once, the frequency and oper-  
ating mode last used are called up. When the key is  
pushed again, another stored frequency and operating  
mode are called up.  
See the table below for a list of the bands available  
and the default settings for each band.  
BAND  
1.8 MHz  
3.5 MHz  
7 MHz  
REGISTER 1  
REGISTER 2  
REGISTER 3  
1.900000 MHz CW  
3.550000 MHz LSB  
7.050000 MHz LSB  
10.120000 MHz CW  
14.100000 MHz USB  
18.100000 MHz USB  
21.200000 MHz USB  
24.950000 MHz USB  
28.500000 MHz USB  
50.100000 MHz USB  
15.000000 MHz USB  
1.910000 MHz CW  
3.560000 MHz LSB  
7.060000 MHz LSB  
10.130000 MHz CW  
14.200000 MHz USB  
18.130000 MHz USB  
21.300000 MHz USB  
24.980000 MHz USB  
29.500000 MHz USB  
50.200000 MHz USB  
15.100000 MHz USB  
1.915000 MHz CW  
3.580000 MHz LSB  
7.020000 MHz CW  
10.140000 MHz CW  
14.050000 MHz CW  
18.150000 MHz USB  
21.050000 MHz CW  
24.900000 MHz CW  
28.100000 MHz CW  
51.000000 MHz FM  
15.200000 MHz USB  
10 MHz  
14 MHz  
18 MHz  
21 MHz  
24 MHz  
28 MHz  
50 MHz  
General  
D
Using the band stacking registers  
14  
q Push  
, then select a frequency and an op-  
5
[Example]: 14 MHz band  
erating mode.  
• Frequency and operating mode are memorized in the  
first band stacking register.  
1.8  
10  
3.5  
14  
24  
50  
7
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
14  
w Push  
again, then tune to another frequency  
5
18  
28  
and operating mode.  
• This frequency and operating mode are memorized in  
the second band stacking register.  
21  
14  
e Push  
again, then tune to another frequency  
5
and operating mode.  
• This frequency and operating mode are memorized in  
F-INPENT  
GENE  
the third band stacking register.  
• When a fourth frequency and operating mode are se-  
lected on a band, the first register set in step q, is over  
written.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC OPERATIONS  
3
■ Frequency setting  
The transceiver has several tuning methods for conve-  
nient frequency tuning.  
D
Tuning with the main dial  
q Push the desired band key on the keypad 1–3  
times.  
Band keys  
• 3 different frequencies can be selected on each band  
with the band key.  
w Rotate the main dial to set the desired frequency.  
If the dial lock function is activated, the lock indicator  
lights, and the main dial does not function. In this  
case, push [LOCK] to deactivate the lock function.  
(see p. 5-17 for details)  
Main dial  
D
Direct frequency entry with the keypad  
The transceiver has a keypad for direct frequency  
entry as described below.  
F-INP  
q Push  
.
ENT  
Keypad  
• “  
” indicator appears and keypad backlight lights.  
F-INP  
w Input the desired frequency  
GENE  
• Push  
to input “. (decimal point)” between the  
•
MHz units and kHz units.  
F-INP  
e Push  
to set the input frequency.  
ENT  
F-INP  
• To cancel the input, push  
/
instead of  
.
∫
ENT  
√
[EXAMPLE]  
7.00000 MHz  
F-INPENT 21  
F-INPENT  
Push  
7
21.24000 MHz  
F-INPENT 3.5  
1.8  
GENE  
Push  
2
1
10  
3.5  
F-INPENT  
2
4
21.24000 MHz ⇒ 21.36000 MHz  
F-INPENT GENE  
7
3
18  
F-INPENT  
Push  
6
850 kHz (0.85000 MHz)  
F-INPENT 50  
GENE  
24  
8
14  
F-INPENT  
Push  
5
0
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
BASIC OPERATIONS  
D
Quick tuning step  
The operating frequency can be changed in larger  
steps (0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20 or 25 kHz selectable)  
for quick tuning.  
q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function ON.  
• “Z” appears when the quick tuning function is ON.  
w Rotate the main dial to change the frequency in pro-  
grammed kHz steps.  
e Push [TS] again to turn OFF the indicator.  
r Rotate the main dial for normal tuning if desired.  
TS  
Select mode  
Main dial  
Quick tuning indicator  
D
Selecting “kHz” step  
q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function ON and  
OFF.  
• “Z” appears when the quick tuning function ON.  
w Push and hold [TS] for 1 sec. to enter quick tuning  
step set mode.  
• Selected tuning steps for all modes appear.  
e Select the desired operating mode.  
r
Rotate the main dial to select the desired tuning step.  
t Repeat steps e and r to select quick tuning steps  
for other modes, if desired.  
y Push EXIT/SET to exit the setting display.  
NOTE: When entering quick tuning step set mode,  
the quick tuning function must be activated first.  
1⁄4 tuning step function  
D
When operating in SSB data, CW, RTTY or PSK, the  
1
⁄4 tuning function is available. Dial rotation is reduced  
1
1
to ⁄4 of normal speed when the ⁄4 tuning function is  
ON for finer tuning control.  
1/4  
1
➥ Push [1/4] (MF6) to toggle the ⁄4 tuning function ON  
and OFF.  
• “1⁄4 ” appears when the 1⁄4 tuning function is ON.  
1⁄4 tuning step OFF  
1⁄4 tuning step ON  
1/4  
OFF  
1/4  
ON  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC OPERATIONS  
3
D
Selecting 1 Hz step  
A minimum tuning step of 1 Hz can be used for fine  
tuning.  
q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function OFF.  
w Push and hold [TS] for 1 sec. to turn the 1 Hz tuning  
step ON and OFF.  
1Hz step indicator  
D
Auto tuning step function  
When rotating the main dial rapidly, the tuning speed  
accelerates automatically as selected.  
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.  
• Pushing and holding EXIT/SET for 1 sec. also selects set  
mode menu screen.  
e Push [F-5•OTHERS] to enter Others set mode.  
r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select “MAIN DIAL Auto  
TS.”  
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired condition  
from high, low and OFF.  
EXIT/SET  
∫
√
OTHERS  
F-5  
SET  
F-7  
F-1  
F-2  
• High : Approx. 5 times faster  
• Low : Approx. twice faster  
• OFF : Auto tuning step is turned OFF.  
y Push EXIT/SET to exit the set mode.  
D
Band edge warning beep  
When you tune outside of an amateur band’s frequency  
range, a warning beep sounds.  
This function can be turned OFF in set mode, if de-  
sired.  
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.  
• Pushing and holding EXIT/SET for 1 sec. also selects set  
mode menu screen.  
e Push [F5•OTHERS] to enter Others set mode.  
r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select “Beep (Band  
Edge).”  
t Rotate the main dial to turn the band edge warning  
beep ON and OFF.  
y Push EXIT/SET to exit the set mode.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
BASIC OPERATIONS  
■ Operating mode selection  
SSB (USB/LSB), SSB data (USB data/LSB data), CW,  
CW reverse (CW-R), RTTY, RTTY reverse (RTTY-R),  
PSK, PSK reverse (PSK-R), AM, AM data, FM and FM  
data modes are available in the IC-7700. Select the  
desired operation mode as follows.  
To select a mode of operation, push the desired mode  
switch momentarily. Push the switch again to toggle  
between USB and LSB, CW and CW-R, RTTY/RTTY-  
R and PSK/PSK-R, AM and FM, if desired. Push and  
hold the switch for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and  
RTTY-R, PSK and PSK-R, if desired.  
See the diagram below left for the order of selection.  
SSB  
CW  
RTTY/PSK  
AM/FM  
DATA  
Microphone signals are muted when data mode is  
selected.  
• Selecting SSB mode  
➥ Push SSB to select USB or LSB.  
• USB is selected first when above 10 MHz; or LSB is se-  
lected first when below 10 MHz operation.  
(USB is selected when 5 MHz band is selected for the  
USA version.)  
USB  
LSB  
CW  
RTTY  
AM  
CW-R  
• After USB or LSB is selected, push SSB to toggle  
between USB and LSB.  
• Selecting CW mode  
RTTY-R  
PSK  
FM  
PSK-R  
➥ Push CW to select CW.  
• After CW is selected, push  
CW  
to toggle between  
CW and CW reverse mode.  
• Selecting RTTY/PSK mode  
➥ Push RTTY/PSK to select RTTY or PSK.  
• After RTTY or PSK is selected, push RTTY/PSK to toggle  
between RTTY and PSK.  
USB  
LSB  
AM  
USB-D1  
LSB-D1  
AM-D1  
FM-D1  
USB-D2  
LSB-D2  
AM-D2  
FM-D2  
• After RTTY or PSK is selected, push and hold RTTY/PSK  
for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY reverse,  
or, PSK and PSK reverse mode, respectively.  
FM  
USB-D3  
LSB-D3  
AM-D3  
FM-D3  
• Selecting AM/FM mode  
➥ Push AM/FM to select AM or FM.  
• After AM or FM is selected, push AM/FM to toggle be-  
tween AM and FM.  
Push mode switch  
for 1 sec.  
Push mode switch  
momentarily.  
• Selecting DATA mode  
➥ After USB, LSB, AM or FM is selected, push  
DATA to select USB data, LSB data, AM data or  
FM data mode, respectively.  
• After data mode is selected, push DATA to toggle be-  
tween regular voice and data mode.  
• After data mode is selected, push and hold DATA for  
1 sec. to select data 1, 2 and 3 in sequence.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC OPERATIONS  
3
■ Volume setting  
➥ Rotate [AF] control clockwise to increase, counter-  
clockwise to decrease the audio output level.  
• Set a suitable audio level.  
[AF]  
Audio output  
increases  
Audio output  
decreases  
■ RF gain adjustment  
➥ Rotate [RF] control clockwise to increase, counter-  
clockwise to decrease the receiver sensitivity.  
NOTE:  
When [RF] control is adjusted CCW in FM mode,  
audio output decreases then disappears. This is nor-  
mal, not a malfunction.  
[RF]  
Sensitivity  
increases  
Sensitivity  
decreases  
■ Squelch level adjustment  
The squelch mutes noise output from the speaker  
(closed squelch) when no signal is received.  
➥ When no signal is received, rotate [SQL] control  
fully counterclockwise first, then rotate [SQL] clock-  
wise to the point that the noise just disappears.  
• Push and hold MONITOR to open the squelch temporar-  
ily.  
MONITOR  
[SQL]  
Noise squelch  
(Recommended level; FM mode only)  
S-meter  
squelch  
Squelch is  
open  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
BASIC OPERATIONS  
■ Meter indication selection  
The S/RF meter indication, during transmit, can be se-  
lected from the following items as you desire.  
➥ Push [METER] (MF2) several times to select the de-  
METER  
sired item.  
Indicates the RF output power in watts.  
METER  
Po  
Indicates the VSWR on the transmission  
METER  
SWR  
line.  
Indicates the ALC level. The ALC circuit  
METER  
ALC  
begins to activate when the RF output  
power reaches a preset level.  
Signal strength  
level readout  
9
+
20  
5
+
40  
Indicates the compression level when  
the speech compressor is in use.  
1
+
METER  
COMP  
60dB  
A
5
10  
ID readout  
S
0
50  
2
100  
150  
15  
200  
10  
ID  
0
250 W  
3
Po  
SWR  
COMP  
1.5  
20  
10  
Power level  
readout  
1
∞
0
Indicates the drain current of the final  
amplifier MOSFETs.  
METER  
dB  
44  
ALC  
VD  
52V  
I
D
VSWR readout  
Indicates the drain terminal voltage of  
the final amplifier MOSFETs.  
METER  
Compression level  
readout  
VD  
ALC level readout  
VD readout  
D
Multi-function digital meter  
The IC-7700 can display the multi-function digital  
meter on the LCD display. This meter displays all  
transmit parameters simultaneously.  
P-HOLD  
METER  
F-1  
q Push and hold [METER] for 1 sec. to turn the multi-  
function digital meter ON.  
w Push [F-1•P-HOLD] to toggle the peak level hold  
function ON.  
• “  
” appears on the window title when the peak  
P-HOLD  
level hold function is ON.  
e Push and hold [METER] for 1 sec., or push  
EXIT/SET to turn the multi-function digital meter  
OFF.  
“P-HOLD” indicator  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC OPERATIONS  
3
D
Meter type selection  
A total of 3 meter types are available in the IC-7700—  
Standard, Edgewise and Bar meters.  
Follow the instructions below for the meter type selec-  
tion.  
q Push EXIT/SET several times to return to normal  
screen, if necessary.  
w Push [F-7•SET], then push [F-3•DISP] to select dis-  
play set mode.  
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select “Meter type (Nor-  
mal Screen)” item.  
r Rotate the main dial to select the desired meter type  
from “Standard,” “Edgewise” and “Bar.”  
t Push EXIT/SET to exit display set mode.  
EXIT/SET  
∫
√
DISP  
F-3  
SET  
F-7  
F-1  
F-2  
• Edgewise meter  
+
+
+
1
3
5
7
9
20  
40 60dB  
S
Po  
0
50  
100  
150  
200 250W  
• Bar meter  
1
3
5
7
9
+
+
+
20 40 60dB  
S
Po  
0
10  
50  
100 150 200 250W  
■ Voice synthesizer operation  
The IC-7700 has built-in voice synthesizer to an-  
nounce the frequency, mode, etc. (S-meter level can  
also be announced—p. 12-15) in clear, electroni-  
cally-generated voice, in English (or Japanese).  
➥ Push SPEECH to announce the currently se-  
lected frequency, etc.  
• Push and hold SPEECH for 1 sec. to additionally an-  
nounce the selected mode.  
➥ Pushing a mode switch also announces the ap-  
propriate mode. (p. 12-15)  
The output level of the voice synthesizer can be  
adjusted in level set mode. (p. 12-6)  
SPEECH  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
BASIC OPERATIONS  
■ Basic transmit operation  
Before transmitting, monitor your selected oper-  
ating frequency to make sure transmitting won’t  
cause interference to other stations on the same  
frequency. It’s good amateur practice to listen  
first, and then, even if nothing is heard, ask “is  
the frequency in use” once or twice, before you  
begin operating on that frequency.  
D
Transmitting  
Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating  
frequency to make sure transmitting won’t cause inter-  
ference to other stations on the same frequency.  
TRANSMIT  
[TX] indicator  
qPush TRANSMIT or [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.  
• The [TX] indicator lights red.  
wPush TRANSMIT again or release [PTT] (micro-  
phone) to return to receive.  
✔ Adjusting the transmit output power  
➥ Rotate [RF PWR].  
[RF PWR]  
• Adjustable range : 5 W to 200 W  
(AM mode: 5 W to 50 W)  
Increases  
max. 200 W  
(50 W for AM)  
Decreases  
min. 5 W  
D
Microphone gain adjustment  
Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating  
frequency to make sure transmitting won’t cause inter-  
ference to other stations on the same frequency.  
[MIC]  
METER  
qPush [METER] (MF2) to select the ALC meter.  
wPush [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.  
• Talk into the microphone at your normal voice level.  
eWhile talking into the microphone, rotate [MIC] so  
that the ALC meter reading doesn’t go outside the  
ALC zone. (see at left)  
r Release [PTT] (microphone) to return to receive.  
ALC zone  
9
+
20  
5
+
40  
1
+
60dB  
A
5
10  
S
0
50  
2
100  
150  
15  
250 W  
200  
10  
ID  
0
3
Po  
SWR  
COMP  
1.5  
20  
10  
1
∞
0
dB  
44  
ALC  
VD  
52V  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC OPERATIONS  
3
D
Drive gain adjustment  
The drive gain is active for all modes other than SSB  
mode with speech compressor OFF. The [DRIVE] con-  
trol adjusts the amplifying gain at the driver stage.  
Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating  
frequency to make sure transmitting won’t cause inter-  
ference to other stations on the same frequency.  
METER  
qPush [METER] (MF2) to select the ALC meter.  
wPush [PTT] (microphone; SSB with [COMP] ON, AM  
or FM), key down (CW) or push TRANSMIT (RTTY  
or PSK) to transmit.  
eWhile talking into the microphone, keying down or  
transmitting, rotate [DRIVE] so that the ALC meter  
reading is between 30 to 50% of the ALC scale. (see  
left)  
[DRIVE]  
Drive gain range  
• Talk into the microphone at your normal voice level.  
rRelease [PTT], stop keying or push TRANSMIT  
again to return to receive.  
9
+
20  
5
+
40  
1
+
60dB  
A
5
10  
S
0
50  
2
100  
150  
15  
200  
10  
ID  
0
250 W  
3
Po  
SWR  
COMP  
1.5  
20  
10  
1
∞
0
dB  
44  
ALC  
VD  
52V  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
Section 4  
■ Operating SSB ………………………………………………………… 4-2  
D Convenient functions for receive ……………………………………4-2  
D Convenient functions for transmit ……………………………………4-3  
D About 5 MHz band operation (USA version only) …………………4-3  
■ Operating CW …………………………………………………………… 4-4  
D Convenient functions for receive ……………………………………4-4  
D Convenient functions for transmit ……………………………………4-5  
D About CW reverse mode ……………………………………………4-5  
D About CW pitch control ………………………………………………4-5  
D CW side tone function ………………………………………………4-5  
D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation …………………………………4-6  
■ Electronic keyer functions ……………………………………………… 4-7  
D Memory keyer screen …………………………………………………4-8  
D Editing a memory keyer ………………………………………………4-9  
D Contest number set mode …………………………………………4-10  
D Keyer set mode ………………………………………………………4-11  
■ Operating RTTY (FSK) ……………………………………………… 4-13  
D Convenient functions for receive …………………………………4-14  
D About RTTY reverse mode …………………………………………4-14  
D Twin peak filter ………………………………………………………4-14  
D Functions for the RTTY decoder indication ………………………4-15  
D Setting the decoder threshold level ………………………………4-15  
D RTTY memory transmission ………………………………………4-16  
D Automatic transmission/reception setting …………………………4-16  
D Editing RTTY memory ………………………………………………4-17  
D RTTY decode set mode ……………………………………………4-18  
D Data saving …………………………………………………………4-20  
■ Operating PSK ………………………………………………………… 4-21  
D Convenient functions for receive …………………………………4-22  
D About BPSK and QPSK modes ……………………………………4-22  
D Functions for the PSK decoder indication ………………………4-23  
D Setting the decoder threshold level ………………………………4-23  
D PSK memory transmission …………………………………………4-24  
D Automatic transmission/reception setting …………………………4-24  
D Editing PSK memory ………………………………………………4-25  
D PSK decode set mode ………………………………………………4-26  
D Data saving …………………………………………………………4-28  
■ Operating AM ………………………………………………………… 4-29  
D Convenient functions for receive …………………………………4-29  
D Convenient functions for transmit …………………………………4-30  
■ Operating FM ………………………………………………………… 4-31  
D Convenient functions for receive …………………………………4-31  
D Convenient functions for transmit …………………………………4-31  
■ Repeater operation …………………………………………………… 4-32  
D Repeater tone frequency setting …………………………………4-33  
■ Tone squelch operation ……………………………………………… 4-34  
■ Data mode (AFSK) operation ………………………………………… 4-35  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
■ Operating SSB  
q Push a band key to select the desired band.  
w Push SSB to select LSB or USB.  
• “USB” or “LSB” appears.  
[MIC]  
[TX] indicator [RX] indicator Band keys  
• Below 10 MHz LSB is automatically selected; above  
10 MHz USB is automatically selected.  
e Rotate the main dial to tune a desired signal.  
• The S-meter indicates received signal strength when a  
signal is received.  
r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening  
level.  
t Push TRANSMIT or [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.  
• [TX] indicator lights red.  
y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice  
level.  
TRANSMIT  
SSB  
[AF]  
Main dial  
Appears  
• Adjust the microphone gain with [MIC] at this step, if  
necessary.  
u Push TRANSMIT or release [PTT] (microphone) to  
return to receive.  
D
Convenient functions for receive  
• Preamp (p. 5-9)  
• Noise reduction (p. 5-17)  
➥ Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the pre-  
amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.  
• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1 or  
preamp 2 is ON, respectively.  
➥ Push NR to turn the noise reduction ON and  
OFF.  
• Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction  
level.  
• Noise reduction indicator (above NR switch) lights  
when the noise reduction is ON.  
• Attenuator (p. 5-9)  
➥ Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-  
• Notch filter (p. 5-18)  
ator in 6 dB steps.  
➥ Push NOTCH to turn the auto or manual notch  
• Push and hold [ATT] (MF4) for 1 sec. to turn the  
attenuator function OFF.  
function ON and OFF.  
• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-  
ator is ON.  
• Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the “valley” frequency  
for manual notch operation.  
• Notch indicator (above NOTCH switch) lights when  
either the auto or manual notch is ON.  
• Noise blanker (p. 5-16)  
➥ Push NB to turn the noise blanker ON and  
OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust the  
threshold level.  
• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-11)  
➥ Push [AGC] (MF5) switch several times to select  
AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.  
• Noise blanker indicator (above NB switch) lights  
when the noise blanker is ON.  
➥ Push AGC VR to turn the AGC time constant  
• Push and hold NB for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker  
set mode.  
manual setting ON and OFF.  
• Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant.  
• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-12)  
➥ Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).  
• PBT indicator (above PBT-CLR switch) lights when  
PBT is in use.  
• VSC (voice squelch control) (p. 9-3)  
➥ Push [VSC] (MF7) to turn the VSC function ON  
and OFF.  
• The VSC indicator appears when the voice squelch  
function is set to ON.  
• Push and hold PBT-CLR for 1 sec. to clear the settings.  
• Audio tone control (p. 12-4)  
➥ Push [F-7•SET] then [F-1•LEVEL] to enter level  
set mode. Select an item with [F-1•Y]/[F-2•Z]  
then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
D
Convenient functions for transmit  
• Speech compressor (p. 6-5)  
➥ Push [COMP] (MF6) to turn the speech compres-  
sor ON and OFF.  
• Transmit quality monitor (p. 6-4)  
➥ Push MONITOR to turn the monitor function ON  
and OFF.  
• Push and hold [COMP] (MF6) for 1 sec. to select the  
compression bandwidth from wide, middle and nar-  
row.  
• Rotate [MONI GAIN] to adjust the monitor gain.  
• Monitor indicator (above MONITOR switch) lights  
when the monitor function is ON.  
• VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 6-2)  
➥ Push VOX to turn the VOX function ON and  
OFF.  
• Audio tone control (p. 12-5)  
➥ Push [F-7•SET] then [F-1•LEVEL] to enter level  
set mode. Select an item with [F-1•Y]/[F-2•Z]  
then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone.  
• “VOX” appears when the VOX function is ON.  
D
About 5 MHz band operation (USA version only)  
Operation on the 5 MHz band is allowed on 5 discrete  
frequencies and must adhere to the following:  
• USB mode  
• Maximum of 50 watts ERP (Effective Radiated Power)  
• 2.8 kHz bandwidth  
It’s your responsibility to set all controls so that trans-  
mission in this band meets the stringent conditions  
under which amateur operations may use these fre-  
quencies.  
IC-7700 Tuning  
Frequency*  
FCC Channel  
Center Frequency*  
5.33050 MHz  
5.34650 MHz  
5.36650 MHz  
5.37150 MHz  
5.40350 MHz  
5.33200 MHz  
5.34800 MHz  
5.36800 MHz  
5.37300 MHz  
5.40500 MHz  
NOTE: We recommend that you store these fre-  
quencies, mode and filter settings into memory  
channels for easy recall.  
*The FCC specifies center frequencies on the  
5 MHz band. However, the IC-7700 displays carri-  
er frequency. Therefore, tune the transceiver to  
1.5 kHz below the specified FCC channel center  
frequency.  
To assist you in operating the 5 MHz band within the  
rules specified by the FCC, transmission is illegal on  
any 5 MHz band frequency other than the five fre-  
quencies indicated in the table above.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
■ Operating CW  
[KEY SPEED] [TX] indicator [RX] indicator Band keys  
q Push a band key to select the desired band.  
w Push CW to select CW.  
• After CW mode is selected, push CW to toggle be-  
tween CW and CW-R modes.  
• “CW” or “CW-R” appears.  
e Rotate the main dial to tune a desired signal.  
• Try to match the specified signal’s tone to the side tone  
frequency.  
• The S-meter indicates received signal strength when  
signal is received.  
r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening  
level.  
t Push TRANSMIT to transmit.  
• [TX] indicator lights red.  
TRANSMIT  
CW  
[AF]  
Main dial  
Appears  
y Use the electric keyer or paddle to key your CW sig-  
nals.  
• The power meter indicates transmitted CW output  
power.  
u Adjust CW speed with [KEY SPEED].  
• Adjustable within 6–48 WPM.  
i Push TRANSMIT to return to receive.  
D
Convenient functions for receive  
• Preamp (p. 5-9)  
• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-12)  
➥ Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).  
• PBT indicator (above PBT-CLR switch) lights when  
PBT is in use.  
➥ Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the pre-  
amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.  
• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1 or  
preamp 2 is ON.  
• Push and hold PBT-CLR for 1 sec. to clear the set-  
tings.  
• Attenuator (p. 5-9)  
➥ Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-  
• Manual notch filter (p. 5-18)  
➥ Push NOTCH to turn the manual notch function  
ON and OFF.  
ator in 6 dB steps.  
• Push and hold [ATT] (MF4) for 1 sec. to turn the  
attenuator function OFF.  
• Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the attenuating fre-  
quency.  
• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-  
ator is ON.  
• Notch indicator (above NOTCH switch) lights when  
the manual notch is ON.  
• Noise blanker (p. 5-16)  
• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-11)  
➥ Push [AGC] switch several times to select  
AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.  
➥ Push NB to turn the noise blanker ON and  
OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust the  
threshold level.  
➥ Push AGC VR to turn the AGC time constant  
• Noise blanker indicator (above NB switch) lights  
when the noise blanker is ON.  
manual setting ON and OFF.  
• Push and hold NB for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker  
set mode.  
• Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant.  
1
• ⁄4 function (p. 3-6)  
1
• Noise reduction (p. 5-17)  
➥ Push [1/4] to turn the ⁄4 function ON and OFF.  
➥ Push NR to turn the noise reduction ON and  
• Auto tuning function (p. 5-19)  
➥ Push [AUTOTUNE] to turn the auto tuning func-  
tion ON and OFF.  
OFF.  
• Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction  
level.  
• The transceiver automatically tunes the desired sig-  
nal within a ±500 Hz range.  
• Noise reduction indicator (above NR switch) lights  
when the noise reduction is ON.  
IMPORTANT!  
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal  
with interference, the automatic tuning function may  
not tune properly, or tune onto an undesired signal.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
D
Convenient functions for transmit  
• Break-in function (p. 6-3)  
➥ Push BK-IN several times to select the break-in  
OFF, semi break-in and full break-in.  
• “  
” or “  
” appears when the semi break-  
F-BKIN  
BKIN  
in or full break-in function is ON, respectively.  
D
About CW reverse mode  
CW-R (CW Reverse) mode uses the opposite side  
band to receive CW signals.  
Push  
Use when interfering signals are near a desired signal  
and you want to use CW-R to reduce the interference.  
BFO  
BFO  
➥ During CW mode, push CW to select CW and  
Interference Desired signal  
Interference Desired signal  
CW-R mode.  
CW mode (LSB side)  
CW-R mode (USB side)  
D
About CW pitch control  
The received CW audio pitch and CW side tone can  
be adjusted to suit your preference (from 300 to  
900 Hz in 5 Hz steps). This does not change the oper-  
ating frequency.  
➥ Rotate [CW PITCH] to suit your preference.  
• Adjustable within 300 to 900 Hz in 5 Hz steps.  
[CW PITCH]  
D
CW side tone function  
When the transceiver is in receive (and the break-in  
function is OFF— p. 6-3) you can listen to the CW side  
tone without actually transmitting.  
This allows you to match your transmit frequency ex-  
actly to another station’s by matching the audio tone.  
You can also use the CW side tone (be sure to turn  
OFF break-in!) to practice CW sending. CW side tone  
level can be adjusted in level set mode (p. 12-6).  
[MONI GAIN]  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
D
APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation  
The APF changes the audio frequency response by  
boosting a particular frequency to enhance a desired  
CW signal.  
APF/TPF  
The peak frequency can be adjusted with [DIGI-SEL]  
control when “APF” is selected for “DIGI-SEL VR Op-  
eration” in Others set mode (p. 12-16).  
The audio filter shape is also selectable from “SOFT”  
and “SHARP” in Others set mode (p. 12-16).  
q During CW mode, push APF/TPF to turn the audio  
[DIGI-SEL]  
peak filter ON and OFF.  
• “  
” appears in the display and [APF/TPF] indicator  
APF  
above this switch lights green.  
w Push and hold APF/TPF for 1 sec. several times to  
select the desired audio filter width.  
• WIDE, MID and NAR filters, or, 320, 160 and 80 Hz fil-  
ters are available depending on APF type setting in level  
set mode.  
e If “APF” is selected for “DIGI-SEL VR Operation,”  
rotate [DIGI-SEL] control to suit your preference.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
■ Electronic keyer functions  
The IC-7700 has a number of convenient functions for  
the built-in electronic keyer.  
q During CW mode, push EXIT/SET several times to  
normal screen, if necessary.  
w Push [F-3•KEYER] to select memory keyer screen.  
e Push EXIT/SET to select memory keyer menu  
screen.  
r Push one of the LCD function switches ([F-1] to [F-  
4]) to select the desired menu. See the diagram  
below.  
–
F-1  
F-4  
CW  
EXIT/SET  
• Push EXIT/SET to return to the previous display.  
F-1  
F-2  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
F-7  
• Memory keyer screen (p. 4-8)  
• Memory keyer edit screen (p. 4-9)  
F-1  
F-2  
EXIT/SET  
• Memory keyer menu screen  
• Contest number set mode (p. 4-10)  
F-1  
F-2  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
F-7  
F-3  
• Keyer set mode screen (p. 4-11)  
F-4  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
D
Memory keyer screen  
Pre-set characters can be sent using the keyer send  
menu. Contents of the memory keyer are set using the  
edit menu.  
• Transmitting  
q During CW mode operation, push [F-3•KEYER] to  
select memory keyer screen.  
M1  
F-1  
M4  
F-4  
–1  
–
F-5  
w Push TRANSMIT to set the transceiver to transmit,  
or set the break-in function ON (p. 6-3).  
e Push one of the function keys ([F-1•M1] to [F-4•M4])  
to send the contents of the memory keyer.  
• Pushing and holding a function key for 1 sec. repeatedly  
sends the contents; push any function key to cancel the  
transmission.  
• The contest serial number counter is incremented each  
time the contents are sent.  
• Push [F-5•–1] to reduce the contest serial number count  
by 1 when resending contents to unanswered calls.  
TRANSMIT  
CW  
EXIT/SET  
• Memory keyer screen  
For your information  
When an external keypad is connected to [EXT  
KEYPAD] connector on the rear panel, the pro-  
grammed contents, M1—M4, can be transmitted  
without selecting the memory keyer screen.  
See p. 2-7 for details.  
r Push EXIT/SET twice to return to normal screen.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
D
Editing a memory keyer  
The contents of the memory keyer memories can be  
set using the memory keyer edit menu. The memory  
keyer can memorize and re-transmit 4 CW key codes  
for often-used CW sentences, contest serial numbers,  
etc. Total capacity of the memory keyer is 70 charac-  
ters per memory channel.  
• Programming contents  
q During CW mode operation, push  
F-3 to  
KEYER  
DEL  
F-3  
SPACE  
123  
Symbol  
ABC  
F-4  
select memory keyer screen.  
/
w Push EXIT/SET to select memory keyer menu, then  
push  
F-2 to select keyer edit screen.  
• Memory keyer contents of Channel 1 (M1) is selected.  
F-7 several times to select the de-  
EDIT  
e Push  
M1..M4  
sired memory keyer channel to be edited.  
r Push ABC (MF6) or 123 (MF7) or Symbol (MF7) to  
select the character group, then rotate the main dial  
to select the character, or push the keypad for num-  
ber input.  
EXIT/SET  
Ω
≈
M1..M4  
F-7  
F-1  
F-2  
• [Symbol] appears when  
(MF7) is pushed when  
123  
“123” character group is selected.  
• Selectable characters (using the main dial);  
• Memory keyer edit screen  
Key selection  
Editable characters  
A to Z (capital letters)  
ABC  
0 to 9 (numbers)  
123  
/ ? ^ . , @ ✱  
Symbol  
NOTE:  
“^” is used to transmit a following word with no  
space such as AR. Put “^” before a text string  
such as ^AR, and the string “AR” is sent with no  
space.  
• Example— entered “QSL TU DE JA3YUA TEST”  
into memory keyer channel 3  
“✱” is used to insert the CW contest serial num-  
ber. The serial number automatically increments  
by 1. This function is only available for one mem-  
ory keyer channel at a time. Memory keyer chan-  
nel M2 used “✱” by default.  
✔ For your convenience  
• Pre-programmed contents  
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-  
nector on the front panel, the memory keyer con-  
tents can also be edited from the keyboard.  
CH  
Contents  
M1 CQ TEST CQ TEST DE ICOM ICOM TEST  
M2 UR 5NN✱ BK  
M3 CFM TU  
M4 QRZ?  
t Push  
F-1 or  
F-2 to move the cursor  
Ω
≈
backwards or forwards, respectively.  
• Pushing  
SPACE  
deletes  
inserts a space.  
a
character and  
DEL  
F-3  
F-4  
y Repeat steps r and t to input the desired charac-  
ters.  
u Push EXIT/SET twice to return normal screen.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
D
Contest number set mode  
This menu is used to set the contest (serial) number  
and count-up trigger, etc.  
• Setting contents  
q During CW mode operation, push [F-3•KEYER] to  
select memory keyer screen.  
w Push EXIT/SET to select memory keyer menu, then  
push [F-3•001] to select contest serial number set  
mode.  
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired set  
item.  
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default  
condition or value.  
EXIT/SET  
∫
√
DEF  
F-4  
Main dial  
F-1  
F-2  
• Contest number set mode screen  
t Push EXIT/SET twice to normal screen.  
Number Style  
Normal  
This item sets the numbering system used for contest  
(serial) numbers— normal or short morse numbers.  
• Normal  
: Does not use short morse numbers  
(default)  
• 190➔ANO : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as O.  
• 190➔ANT : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as T.  
• 90➔ NO : Sets 9 as N and 0 as O.  
• 90➔ NT : Sets 9 as N and 0 as T.  
Count Up Trigger  
M2  
This selects which of the four memories will contain  
the contest serial number exchange. The count-up  
trigger allows the serial number to automatically in-  
crement after each complete serial number exchange  
is sent.  
• M1, M2, M3 and M4 can be set. (default: M2)  
Present Number  
001  
This item shows the current number for the count-up  
trigger channel set above.  
• Rotate the main dial to change the number, or push  
and hold [F-3•001CLR] for 1 sec. to reset the cur-  
rent number to 001.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
D
Keyer set mode  
This set mode is used to set the memory keyer repeat  
time, dash weight, paddle specifications, keyer type,  
etc.  
• Setting contents  
q During CW mode operation, push [F-3•KEYER] to  
select memory keyer screen.  
w Push EXIT/SET to select memory keyer menu, then  
push [F-4•CW KEY] to select keyer set mode.  
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired set  
item.  
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default  
condition or value.  
EXIT/SET  
∫
√
DEF  
F-4  
Main dial  
F-1  
F-2  
t Push EXIT/SET twice to normal screen.  
• Keyer set mode screen  
Keyer Repeat Time  
2s  
When sending CW using the repeat timer, this item  
sets the time between transmission.  
• 1 to 60 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be selected.  
(default: 2 sec.)  
Dot/Dash Ratio  
1:1:3.0  
This item sets the dot/dash ratio.  
• 1:1:2.8 to 1:1:4.5 (in 0.1 steps) can be selected.  
(default: 1:1:3.0)  
Keying weight example: Morse code “K”  
DOT (fixed*)  
Weight setting:  
1:1:3 (default)  
DASH  
DASH  
Weight setting:  
Adjusted  
Adjustable range  
SPACE (fixed*)  
*SPACE and DOT length can be  
adjusted with [KEY SPEED] only.  
Rise Time  
4ms  
This item sets the rise time of the transmitted CW en-  
velope.  
• 2, 4, 6 or 8 msec. can be selected. (default: 4 msec.)  
• About rise time  
Tx  
Key action  
Rx  
Set Tx power level  
Tx output power  
0
Time  
Rise time  
to be continued…  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
D
Keyer set mode (continued)  
Paddle Polarity  
Normal  
This item sets the paddle polarity.  
• Normal and reverse polarity can be selected.  
Keyer Type  
ELE-KEY  
This item selects the keyer type for [ELEC-KEY] con-  
nector on the front panel.  
• ELEC-KEY, BUG-KEY and Straight key can be se-  
lected. (default: ELEC-KEY)  
Mic Up/Down Keyer  
OFF  
This item allows you to set the microphone [UP]/[DN]  
keys to be used as a paddle.  
• ON  
: [UP]/[DN] switches can be used for CW.  
• OFF : [UP]/[DN] switches cannot be used for  
CW.  
NOTE: When “ON” is selected, the frequency and  
memory channel cannot be changed using  
the [UP]/[DN] switches.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
■ Operating RTTY (FSK)  
A DSP-based high-quality Baudot RTTY encoder/de-  
coder is built-in to the IC-7700. When connecting a PC  
keyboard (p. 2-6), RTTY operation can be performed  
without an external RTTY terminal, TNC or PC.  
If you would rather use your RTTY terminal or TNC,  
consult the manual that comes with the RTTY terminal  
or TNC.  
q Push a band key to select the desired band.  
w Push RTTY/PSK to select RTTY.  
[TX] indicator [RX] indicator  
Band keys  
• After RTTY mode is selected, push and hold RTTY/PSK  
for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes.  
• “RTTY” or “RTTY-R” appears.  
e Push [F-3•DECODE] to display the decode screen.  
• The IC-7700 has a built-in Baudot decoder.  
r To tune the desired signal, aim for a symmetrical  
waveform and ensure the peak points align with the  
mark (2125 Hz) and shift (170 Hz) frequency lines  
in the FFT scope.  
RTTY/PSK  
DECODE  
F-3  
[AF]  
Main dial  
• The S-meter indicates received signal strength when  
signal is received.  
Appears  
t Press [F12] on the connected keyboard to transmit.  
• [TX] indicator lights red.  
y Type from the keyboard to enter the contents that  
you want to transmit.  
• The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer  
screen and transmitted immediately.  
• The text color will be changed when transmitted.  
• Press one of [F1]–[F8] to transmit the TX memory con-  
tents.  
u Press [F12] on the keyboard to return to receive.  
✔ For your convenience  
The transmission contents can be typed before being  
transmitted.  
q Perform the steps q to r above.  
w Type from the connected keyboard to enter the  
message that you want to transmit.  
TX buffer screen  
FFT scope  
RX contents screen  
• The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer  
screen.  
Water-fall  
e Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit  
the typewritten contents.  
• The color of displayed text, in the TX buffer screen, will  
be changed when transmitted.  
• To cancel the transmission, press [F12] twice.  
r Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive.  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
D
Convenient functions for receive  
• Preamp (p. 5-9)  
• Noise reduction (p. 5-17)  
➥ Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the pre-  
amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.  
• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1 or  
preamp 2 is ON.  
➥ Push NR to turn the noise reduction ON and  
OFF.  
• Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction  
level.  
• Noise reduction indicator (above NR switch) lights  
when the noise reduction is ON.  
• Attenuator (p. 5-9)  
➥ Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-  
• Manual notch filter (p. 5-18)  
➥ Push NOTCH to turn the manual notch function  
ON and OFF.  
ator in 6 dB steps.  
• Push and hold [ATT] (MF4) for 1 sec. to turn the atten-  
uator function OFF.  
• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-  
ator is ON.  
• Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the attenuating fre-  
quency.  
• Notch indicator (above NOTCH switch) lights when  
the manual notch is ON.  
• Noise blanker (p. 5-16)  
➥ Push NB to turn the noise blanker ON and  
OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust the  
threshold level.  
• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-11)  
➥ Push [AGC] switch several times to select  
AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.  
• Noise blanker indicator (above NB switch) lights  
when the noise blanker is ON.  
➥ Push AGC VR to turn the AGC time constant  
• Push and hold NB for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker  
set mode.  
manual setting ON and OFF.  
• Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant.  
1
• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-12)  
➥ Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).  
• PBT indicator (above PBT-CLR switch) lights when  
PBT is in use.  
• ⁄4 function (p. 3-6)  
1
➥ Push [1/4] to turn the ⁄4 function ON and OFF.  
• Push and hold PBT-CLR for 1 sec. to clear the set-  
tings.  
D
About RTTY reverse mode  
Received characters are occasionally garbled when  
the received signal has Mark and Space tones re-  
versed. This reversal can be caused by incorrect TNC  
connections, setting, commands, etc. To receive re-  
versed RTTY signals correctly, select RTTY-R mode.  
Normal  
Reverse  
170 Hz  
2125 Hz  
2125 Hz  
170 Hz  
Mark  
Space  
Space  
BFO  
BFO  
Mark  
➥ During RTTY mode, push and hold RTTY/PSK for  
1 sec. to select RTTY and RTTY-R mode.  
D
Twin peak filter  
The twin peak filter changes audio frequency response  
by boosting the mark and space frequencies (2125 and  
2295 Hz) for better reception of RTTY signals.  
APF/TPF  
➥ During RTTY mode, push APF/TPF to turn the twin  
peak filter ON and OFF.  
• “  
” appears in the LCD and the [APF/TPF] indicator  
TPF  
above this switch lights green while the filter is in use.  
NOTE: When the twin peak filter is in use, the re-  
ceived audio output may increase. This is a normal,  
not a malfunction.  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
D
Functions for the RTTY decoder indication  
q Push a band key to select the desired band.  
w Push RTTY/PSK to select RTTY.  
HOLD/CLR  
F-2  
WIDE  
F-7  
• After RTTY mode is selected, push and hold RTTY/PSK  
for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes.  
• “RTTY” or “RTTY-R” appears.  
e Push [F-3•DECODE] to display the decode screen.  
• When tuned into an RTTY signal, decoded characters  
are displayed in the RX contents screen.  
r Push [F-2•HOLD/CLR] to freeze the current screen.  
• “HOLD ” appears while the function is in use.  
• Push [F-2•HOLD/CLR] again to release the function.  
t Push and hold [F-2•HOLD/CLR] for 1 sec. to clear  
the displayed characters.  
RTTY/PSK  
EXIT/SET  
• “HOLD ” indicator disappears at the same time when the  
hold function is in use.  
y Push [F-7•WIDE] to toggle the RTTY decode screen  
size from normal and wide.  
• S/RF meter type during wide screen indication can be  
selected in display set mode. (pgs. 3-11, 12-10)  
u Push EXIT/SET to close the RTTY decode screen.  
• Wide screen indication  
D
Setting the decoder threshold level  
Adjust the RTTY decoder threshold level if some char-  
acters are displayed when no signal is received.  
q Select the RTTY decode screen as described  
above.  
w Push [F-5•ADJ] to select the threshold level setting  
condition.  
e Rotate the main dial to adjust the RTTY decoder  
threshold level.  
• Push and hold [F-6•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default  
setting.  
r Push [F-5•ADJ] to exit from the threshold level set-  
ting condition.  
The UnShift On Space (USOS) function and new  
line code can be set in the RTTY set mode.  
(p. 4-18)  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
D
RTTY memory transmission  
Pre-set characters can be sent using the RTTY mem-  
ory. Contents of the memory are set using the edit  
menu.  
q During RTTY mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]  
to select RTTY decode screen.  
w Push [F-4•TX MEM] to select RTTY memory  
screen.  
e Push [F-7•1–4/5–8] to select memory bank then  
push one of the function keys ([F-1•RT1] to  
[F-4•RT4] or [F-1•RT5] to [F-4•RT8]).  
• When no keyboard is connected, the selected memory  
contents will be transmitted immediately.  
EXIT/SET  
1–4/5–8  
F-7  
RT1  
F-1  
RT4  
F-4  
RT5  
F-1  
RT8  
F-4  
or  
–
–
• When a keyboard is connected, the memory contents  
will be transmitted immediately when function key is  
pushed, or transmitted after [F12] on the connected key-  
board is pressed, depending on auto transmission/re-  
ception setting (see below).  
• The transmission date, time, reception date and/or time  
may be displayed in RX contents screen, depending on  
setting.  
D
Automatic transmission/reception setting  
q During RTTY mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]  
to select RTTY decode screen.  
w Push [F-4•TX MEM] to select RTTY memory  
screen, then push [F-6•EDIT] to select RTTY mem-  
ory edit screen.  
• RTTY memory contents of the Channel 1 (RT1) is se-  
lected.  
e Push [F-7•RT1..RT8] several times to select the de-  
sired RTTY memory.  
r Push [F-6•AUTO TX] several times to select the de-  
sired condition as follow.  
EXIT/SET  
AUTO TX  
F-6  
RT1..RT8  
F-7  
• AUTO TX/RX : Automatically transmits the se-  
lected memory and returns to re-  
ceive after the transmission.  
• AUTO TX  
: Automatically transmits the se-  
lected memory. To return to re-  
ceive, press [F12] on the key-  
board.  
• AUTO RX  
: Press [F12] on the keyboard to  
transmit the selected memory. Au-  
tomatically returns to receive after  
the transmission.  
• No indication : Press [F12] on the keyboard to  
transmit the selected memory and  
press [F12] again to return to re-  
ceive.  
t Push EXIT/SET to exit RTTY memory edit condition.  
NOTE: The transceiver always functions in the  
“AUTO TX/RX” setting when no keyboard is con-  
nected.  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
D
Editing RTTY memory  
The contents of the RTTY memories can be set using  
the memory edit menu. The memory can store and re-  
transmit 8 RTTY message for often-used RTTY infor-  
mation. Total capacity of the memory is 70 characters  
per memory channel.  
• Programming contents  
q During RTTY mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]  
to select RTTY decode screen.  
DEL  
F-3  
SPACE  
F-4  
123 Symbol  
ABC abc  
/
/
w Push [F-4•TX MEM] to select RTTY memory  
screen, then push [F-6•EDIT] to select RTTY mem-  
ory edit screen.  
• RTTY memory contents of the Channel 1 (RT1) is se-  
lected.  
e Push [F-7•RT1..RT8] to several times to select the  
desired RTTY memory channel to be edited.  
r Push [F-5•Ω ≈] to select the edit item between  
memory contents and memory name.  
t Push [ABC] (MF6), [abc] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Sym-  
bol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate  
the main dial to select the character, or push the  
keypad for number input.  
EXIT/SET  
Ω
≈
Ω ≈  
RT1..RT8  
F-7  
F-1  
F-2  
F-5  
• RTTY memory edit screen  
• [abc] (MF6) appears when [ABC] (MF6) is pushed when  
“ABC” character group is selected, and [Symbol] (MF7)  
appears when [123] (MF7) is pushed when “123” char-  
acter group is selected.  
• Selectable characters (with the main dial);  
Key selection  
Editable characters  
• Pre-programmed contents  
CH Name  
A to Z (capital letters)  
ABC  
Contents  
RT1 MYCALLx2 ↵DE ICOM ICOM K↵  
a to z (small letters)  
(selectable for memory name only)  
abc  
123  
RT2 MYCALLx3 ↵DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K↵  
RT3 QSLUR599 ↵QSL UR 599–599 BK↵  
0 to 9 (numbers)  
RT4 DE+UR599 ↵QSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 599–599  
BK↵  
! # $ % & ¥ ? “ ‘ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; =  
RT5  
73 GL SK ↵73 GL SK↵  
~
< > ( ) [ ] { } | _  
@
RT6 CQ CQ CQ ↵CQ CQ CQ DE ICOM ICOM ICOM  
K↵  
(For the memory contents set-  
ting, ! $ & ? “ ‘ – / . , : ; ( ) ↵ are  
selectable.)  
Symbol  
RT7  
RIG&ANT ↵MY TRANSCEIVER IS IC–7700 &  
ANTENNA IS A 3–ELEMENT  
TRIBAND YAGI.↵  
✔ For your convenience  
RT8  
EQUIP.  
↵MY RTTY EQUIPMENT IS  
INTERNAL FSK UNIT &  
DEMODULATOR OF THE  
IC–7700.↵  
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-  
nector on the front panel, the RTTY memory con-  
tents can also be edited from the keyboard.  
y Push [F-1•Ω] or [F-2•≈] to move the cursor back-  
wards or forwards, respectively.  
• Pushing [F-3•DEL] deletes a character and [F-4•SPACE]  
inserts a space.  
u Repeat steps t and y to input the desired charac-  
ters.  
i Push EXIT/SET to set the contents and exit RTTY  
memory edit screen.  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
D
RTTY decode set mode  
This set mode is used to set the decode USOS func-  
tion, time stamp setting, etc.  
• Setting contents  
q During RTTY mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]  
to select RTTY decode screen.  
Ω ≈  
WIDE  
F-7  
F-3  
w Push [F-1•<MENU1>] to select the second RTTY  
decode menu, then push [F-6•SET] to select RTTY  
decode set mode.  
• Push [F-7•WIDE] to toggle the screen size from normal  
and wide.  
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired set  
item.  
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default  
condition or value.  
EXIT/SET  
∫
√
DEF  
F-4  
Main dial  
F-1  
F-2  
• Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select the set contents for some  
items.  
• RTTY decode set mode screen  
t Push EXIT/SET to exit from set mode.  
RTTY FFT Scope Averaging  
OFF  
Select the FFT scope waveform averaging function  
from 2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF)  
Recommendation!  
If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning, use the  
default or smaller number setting is recommended.  
RTTY FFT Scope Waveform Color  
51  
153  
255  
Set the color for the FFT scope waveform.  
• The color is set in RGB format.  
• Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),  
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.  
and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.  
RTTY Decode USOS  
ON  
Turn the capability of letter code decoding after re-  
ceiving a “space” (USOS; UnShift On Space function)  
ON and OFF.  
• ON : Decode as letter code.  
• OFF : Decode as character code.  
RTTY Decode New Line Code  
CR,LF,CR+LF  
Selects the new line code of the internal RTTY de-  
coder.  
CR: Carriage Return, LF: Line Feed  
• CR,LF,CR+LF : Makes new line with any codes.  
• CR+LF  
: Makes new line with CR+LF code  
only.  
RTTY Diddle  
BLANK  
Selects the diddle condition.  
• BLANK : Transmits blank code during no code  
transmission.  
• LTRS  
: Transmits letter code during no code  
transmission.  
• OFF  
: Turns the diddle function OFF.  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
D
RTTY decode set mode (continued)  
RTTY TX USOS  
ON  
Explicitly inserts the FIGS character even though it is  
not required by the receiving station.  
• ON : Inserts FIGS.  
• OFF : Does not insert FIGS.  
RTTY Time Stamp  
ON  
Turn the time stamp (date, transmission or reception  
time) indication ON and OFF.  
• ON : Displays the time stamp.  
• OFF : No time stamp indication.  
RTTY Auto CR+LF by TX  
ON  
Selects the automatic new line code (CR+LF) trans-  
mission capability.  
• ON : Transmits CR+LF code once.  
• OFF : Transmits no CR+LF code.  
RTTY Time Stamp (Time)  
Local  
Selects the clock indication for time stamp usage.  
• Local : Selects the time that set in “Time (Now).”  
• UTC* : Selects the time that set in “CLOCK2.”  
NOTE: The time won’t be displayed when “OFF” is  
*The name of choice may differ according to  
“CLOCK2 Name” setting (p. 11-2). “UTC” is the  
default name of CLOCK2.  
selected in “RTTY Time Stamp” as above.  
RTTY Time Stamp (Frequency)  
OFF  
Selects the operating frequency indication for time  
stamp usage.  
• ON : Displays the operating frequency.  
• OFF : No operating frequency display.  
NOTE: The frequency won’t be displayed when “OFF”  
is selected in “RTTY Time Stamp” as above.  
RTTY Font Color (Receive)  
128  
255  
128  
Set the text color for received characters.  
• The color is set in RGB format.  
• Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),  
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.  
and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.  
RTTY Font Color (Transmit)  
255  
106  
106  
Set the text color for transmitted characters.  
• The color is set in RGB format.  
• Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),  
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.  
and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.  
RTTY Font Color (Time Stamp)  
0
155  
189  
Set the text color for time stamp indication.  
• The color is set in RGB format.  
• Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),  
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.  
and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.  
RTTY Font Color (TX Buffer)  
255  
255  
255  
Set the text color in the TX buffer screen.  
• The color is set in RGB format.  
• Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),  
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.  
and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
D
Data saving  
The contents of the RTTY memory and received sig-  
nal can be saved into the USB-Memory.  
The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom.  
q During RTTY decode screen indication, push  
[F-1•<MENU1>] to select the RTTY decode second  
menu.  
OPTION  
F-5  
SAVE  
F-6  
WIDE  
F-7  
w Push [F-5•SAVE] to select decode file save screen.  
e Change the following conditions if desired.  
• File name:  
z Push [F-4•EDIT] to select file name edit con-  
dition.  
• Push [F-1• DIR/FILE] several times to select the  
file name, if necessary.  
x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] or [Symbol] (MF7) to  
select the character group, then rotate the  
main dial to select the character.  
EXIT/SET  
DIR/FILE  
F-1  
EDIT  
F-4  
Main dial  
• [ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7): 0  
to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^ + –  
= ( ) [ ] { } _ ~ @ can be selected.  
• Decode file save screen  
• Push [F-1•Ω] to move the cursor left, push [F-2•≈]  
to move the cursor right, [F-3•DEL] delete a char-  
acter and push [F-4•SPACE] to insert a space.  
c Push EXIT/SET to set the file name.  
• File format  
• Decode file save screen— file name edit  
z Push [F-5•OPTION] to enter save option  
screen.  
x Rotate the main dial to select the saving for-  
mat from Text to HTML.  
• “Text” is the default setting.  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the  
default setting.  
c Push EXIT/SET to return to the previous indi-  
cation.  
• Save option screen  
• Saving location  
z Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view  
screen.  
x Select the desired directory or folder in the  
USB-Memory.  
• Push [F-4•Ω ≈] to select the upper directory.  
• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select folder in the  
same directory.  
• Push and hold [F-4•Ω ≈] for 1 sec. to select a  
folder in the directory.  
• Push [F-5•REN/DEL] to rename the folder.  
• Push and hold [F-5•REN/DEL] for 1 sec. to delete  
the folder.  
• Push and hold [F-6•MAKE] for 1 sec. to making a  
new folder. (Edit the name with the same manner  
as the “• File name” above.)  
c Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] twice to select the file  
name.  
r Push [F-6•SAVE].  
• After saving is completed, returns to RTTY decode sec-  
ond menu automatically.  
✔ For your convenience!  
Two formats, Text and HTML, are available for storage  
of data to your PC.  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
■ Operating PSK  
A high-quality DSP-based PSK31 encoder/decoder is  
built-in to the IC-7700. When connecting a PC key-  
board (p. 2-6), PSK31 operation can be performed  
without PSK software installed on your PC.  
If desired, you can also use your PSK software; con-  
sult the manual that comes with the software.  
q Push a band key to select the desired band.  
w Push RTTY/PSK to select PSK.  
[TX] indicator [RX] indicator  
Band keys  
• After PSK mode is selected, push and hold RTTY/PSK  
for 1 sec. to toggle between PSK and PSK-R modes.  
• “PSK” or “PSK-R” appears.  
e
Push [F-3•DECODE] to display the decode screen.  
• The IC-7700 has a built-in PSK31 decoder.  
r Tune to the desired signal with the main dial.  
• The signal is properly tuned when the radiated lines in  
the vector tuning indicator narrow, as show in the exam-  
ple below.  
RTTY/PSK  
DECODE  
F-3  
[AF]  
Main dial  
• The radiated lines in the vector tuning indicator may be  
displayed sporadically.  
• When a PSK signal is received, the water-fall display is  
activated.  
Appears  
• The water-fall display shows the signal condition within  
the passband and a vertical line appears when a PSK  
signal is received.  
t Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit.  
• [TX] indicator lights red.  
y Type from the connected keyboard to enter the  
message that you want to transmit.  
• The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer  
screen and transmitted immediately.  
• The text color will be changed when transmitted.  
• Press one of [F1]–[F8] to transmit the TX memory con-  
tents.  
u Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive.  
✔ For your convenience  
The transmission contents can be typed before being  
transmitted.  
TX buffer screen  
FFT scope  
RX contents screen  
q Perform the steps q to r above.  
w Type from the connected keyboard to enter the  
Water-fall  
Vector tuning indicator  
message that you want to transmit.  
• The message is shown in the TX buffer screen.  
e Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit  
the message.  
• The color of displayed text, in the TX buffer screen, will  
be changed when transmitted.  
• Vector tuning indicator indication example  
Tuned BPSK signal  
Tuned QPSK signal  
• To cancel the transmission, press [F12] twice.  
r Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive.  
BPSK/QPSK idle signal Unmodulated signal  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
D
Convenient functions for receive  
• Preamp (p. 5-9)  
• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-12)  
➥ Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).  
• PBT indicator (above PBT-CLR switch) lights when  
PBT is in use.  
➥ Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the pre-  
amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.  
• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1 or  
preamp 2 is ON.  
• Push and hold PBT-CLR for 1 sec. to clear the set-  
tings.  
• Attenuator (p. 5-9)  
➥ Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-  
• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-11)  
➥ Push [AGC] switch several times to select  
AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.  
➥ Push AGC VR to turn the AGC time constant  
ator in 6 dB steps.  
• Push and hold [ATT] (MF4) for 1 sec. to turn the atten-  
uator function OFF.  
• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-  
ator is ON.  
manual setting ON and OFF.  
• Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant.  
• Noise blanker (p. 5-16)  
• Manual notch filter (p. 5-18)  
➥ Push NOTCH to turn the manual notch function  
ON and OFF.  
➥ Push NB to turn the noise blanker ON and  
OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust the  
threshold level.  
• Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the attenuating fre-  
• Noise blanker indicator (above NB switch) lights  
quency.  
when the noise blanker is ON.  
• Push and hold NB for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker  
set mode.  
• Notch indicator (above NOTCH switch) lights when  
the manual notch is ON.  
• Fine tuning (p. 3-7)  
• Noise reduction (p. 5-17)  
➥ Push NR to turn the noise reduction ON and  
➥ During PSK, make sure that the kHz tuning step  
function is OFF (no “Z” indication), push and hold  
[TS] for 1 sec.  
OFF.  
• Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction  
level.  
• PSK may not be decoded correctly using the 10 Hz  
step tuning.  
• Noise reduction indicator (above NR switch) lights  
when the noise reduction is ON.  
1
• ⁄4 function (p. 3-6)  
1
➥ Push [1/4] to turn the ⁄4 function ON and OFF.  
D
About BPSK and QPSK modes  
BPSK and QPSK modes are available for PSK31.  
• BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Keying) mode is the most  
commonly used mode.  
• QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) mode has  
error correction capability to provide better decoding  
than BPSK mode in marginal condition. However,  
more accurate tuning is required with QPSK mode,  
due to the tight phase margin of QPSK.  
<
MENU1  
>
B/QPSK  
F-2  
DECODE  
F-3  
F-1  
q During PSK mode selection, push [F-3•DECODE]  
to display the PSK decode screen.  
w Push [F-1•<MENU1>] to select PSK decode second  
menu.  
• PSK decode screen— BPSK mode  
e Push [F-2•B/QPSK] to toggle between BPSK and  
QPSK mode alternately.  
• PSK decode screen— QPSK mode  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
D
Functions for the PSK decoder indication  
q Push a band key to select the desired band.  
w Push RTTY/PSK to select PSK.  
AFC/NET  
F-3  
WIDE  
F-7  
• After PSK mode is selected, push and hold RTTY/PSK  
for 1 sec. to toggle between PSK and PSK-R modes.  
• “PSK” or “PSK-R” appears.  
e Push [F-3•DECODE] to display the decode screen.  
• When tuned into a PSK signal, decoded characters are  
displayed in the RX contents screen.  
r Push [F-2•HOLD/CLR] to freeze the current screen.  
• “HOLD ” appears while the function is in use.  
• Push [F-2•HOLD/CLR] again to release the function.  
t Push and hold [F-2•HOLD/CLR] for 1 sec. to clear  
the displayed characters.  
RTTY/PSK  
EXIT/SET  
HOLD/CLR  
F-2  
• “HOLD ” indicator disappears at the same time when the  
hold function is in use.  
y Push [F-3•AFC/NET] to turn the AFC function ON.  
• “  
” appears.  
AFC  
• If a PSK signal is received within the AFC tuning range,  
the decoder automatically tunes into the signal and the  
offset frequency is displayed.  
• The AFC tuning range is set to ±15 Hz as the default.  
Optional ±8 Hz setting is available in PSK decode set  
mode. (p. 4-26)  
• AFC/NET indications  
NOTE: The AFC function may not tune the signal  
properly when a weak PSK signal is received.  
u Push [F-3•AFC/NET] again to turn the NET function  
ON.  
• “  
” appears additionally.  
NET  
i Push and hold [F-3•AFC/NET] for 1 sec. to add the  
offset frequency to the displayed frequency.  
o Push [F-7•WIDE] to toggle the PSK decode screen  
size from normal and wide.  
• S/RF meter type during wide screen indication can be  
selected in display set mode. (pgs. 3-11, 12-10)  
! Push EXIT/SET to close the PSK decode screen.  
“AFC” and “NET” indicators Offset frequency  
D
Setting the decoder threshold level  
Adjust the PSK decoder threshold level if some char-  
acters are displayed when no signal is received.  
q Call up the PSK decode screen as described  
above.  
w Push [F-5•ADJ] to select the threshold level setting  
condition.  
e Rotate the main dial to adjust the PSK decoder  
threshold level.  
• Push and hold [F-6•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default  
setting.  
r Push [F-5•ADJ] to exit from the threshold level set-  
ting condition.  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
D
PSK memory transmission  
Pre-set characters can be sent using the PSK memo-  
ry. Contents of the memory are set using the edit  
menu.  
q During PSK mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]  
to select PSK decode screen.  
w Push [F-4•TX MEM] to select PSK memory screen.  
e Push [F-7•1–4/5–8] to select memory bank then  
push one of the function keys ([F-1•PT1] to  
[F-4•PT4] or [F-1•PT5] to [F-4•PT8]).  
• When no keyboard is connected, the selected memory  
contents will be transmitted immediately.  
EXIT/SET  
1–4/5–8  
F-7  
PT1  
F-1  
PT4  
F-4  
PT5  
F-1  
PT8  
F-4  
• When a keyboard is connected, the memory contents  
will be transmitted immediately when function key is  
pushed, or transmitted after [F12] on the connected key-  
board is pressed, depending on auto transmission/re-  
ception setting (see below).  
or  
–
–
• The transmission date, time, reception date and/or time  
may be displayed in RX contents screen, depending on  
setting.  
D
Automatic transmission/reception setting  
q During PSK mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]  
to select PSK decode screen.  
w Push [F-4•TX MEM] to select PSK memory screen,  
then push [F-6•EDIT] to select PSK memory edit  
screen.  
• PSK memory contents of Channel 1 (PT1) is selected.  
e Push [F-7•PT1..PT8] several times to select the de-  
sired RTTY memory.  
EXIT/SET  
AUTO TX  
F-6  
PT1..PT8  
F-7  
r Push [F-6•AUTO TX] several times to select the de-  
sired condition, as follows.  
• AUTO TX/RX : Automatically transmits the se-  
lected memory and returns to re-  
ceive after the transmission.  
• AUTO TX  
: Automatically transmits the se-  
lected memory. To return to re-  
ceive, press [F12] on the key-  
board.  
• AUTO RX  
: Press [F12] on the keyboard to  
transmit the selected memory. Au-  
tomatically returns to receive after  
the transmission.  
• No indication : Press [F12] on the keyboard to  
transmit the selected memory and  
press [F12] again to return to re-  
ceive.  
t Push EXIT/SET to return to exit from PSK memory  
edit condition.  
NOTE: The transceiver always functions in the  
“AUTO TX/RX” setting when no keyboard is con-  
nected.  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
D
Editing PSK memory  
The contents of the PSK memories can be set using  
the memory edit menu. The memory can store 8 PSK  
messages for often-used PSK information. Total  
capacity of the memory is 70 characters per memory  
channel.  
• Programming contents  
q During PSK mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]  
to select PSK decode screen.  
DEL  
F-3  
SPACE  
F-4  
123 Symbol  
ABC abc  
/
/
w Push [F-4•TX MEM] to select PSK memory screen,  
then push [F-6•EDIT] to select PSK memory edit  
screen.  
• PSK memory contents of the Channel 1 (PT1) is se-  
lected.  
e Push [F-7•PT1..PT8] several times to select the de-  
sired PSK memory channel to be edited.  
r Push [F-5•Ω ≈] to select the edit item between  
memory contents and memory name.  
t Push [ABC] (MF6), [abc] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Sym-  
bol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate  
the main dial to select the character, or push the  
keypad for number input.  
EXIT/SET  
Ω
≈
Ω ≈  
PT1..PT8  
F-7  
F-1  
F-2  
F-5  
• PSK memory edit screen  
• [abc] (MF6) appears when [ABC] (MF6) is pushed when  
“ABC” character group is selected, and [Symbol] (MF7)  
appears when [123] (MF7) is pushed when “123” char-  
acter group is selected.  
• Selectable characters (with the main dial);  
Key selection  
Editable characters  
• Pre-programmed contents  
CH Name  
A to Z (capital letters)  
ABC  
Contents  
PT1 MYCALLx2 ↵DE Icom Icom K↵  
PT2 MYCALLx3 ↵DE Icom Icom Icom K↵  
PT3 QSLUR599 ↵QSL UR 599 599 BK↵  
a to z (small letters)  
0 to 9 (numbers)  
abc  
123  
PT4 DE+UR599 ↵QSL DE Icom Icom UR 599 599  
BK↵  
! # $ % & ¥ ? “ ‘ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; =  
< > ( ) [ ] { } | _ @ ↵  
(“↵” is for the memory contents set-  
ting only.)  
PT5  
73 GL SK ↵73 GL SK↵  
~
Symbol  
PT6 CQ CQ CQ ↵CQ CQ CQ DE Icom Icom Icom  
K↵  
PT7  
RIG&ANT ↵My transceiver is IC–7700 &  
Antenna is a 3–element triband  
yagi.↵  
✔ For your convenience  
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-  
nector on the front panel, the PSK memory contents  
can also be edited from the keyboard.  
PT8  
EQUIP.  
↵My PSK equipment is internal  
modulator & demodulator of the  
IC–7700.↵  
y Push [F-1•Ω] or [F-2•≈] to move the cursor back-  
wards or forwards, respectively.  
• Pushing [F-3•DEL] deletes a character and [F-4•SPACE]  
inserts a space.  
u Repeat steps t and y to input the desired charac-  
ters.  
i Push EXIT/SET to set the contents and exit PSK  
memory edit screen.  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
D
PSK decode set mode  
This set mode is used to set the decode USOS func-  
tion, time stamp setting, etc.  
• Setting contents  
q During PSK mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]  
to select PSK decode screen.  
Ω ≈  
WIDE  
F-7  
F-3  
w Push [F-1•<MENU1>] to select PSK decode second  
menu, then push [F-6•SET] to select PSK decode  
set mode.  
• Push [F-7•WIDE] to toggle the screen size from normal  
and wide.  
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired set  
item.  
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default  
condition or value.  
EXIT/SET  
∫
√
DEF  
F-4  
Main dial  
F-1  
F-2  
• Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select the set contents for some  
items.  
t Push EXIT/SET to exit from set mode.  
PSK FFT Scope Averaging  
OFF  
Select the FFT scope waveform averaging function  
from 2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF)  
Recommendation!  
If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning, using  
the default or smaller number setting is recom-  
mended.  
PSK FFT Scope Waveform Color  
51  
153  
255  
Set the color for the FFT scope waveform.  
• The color is set in RGB format.  
• Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),  
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.  
and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.  
PSK AFC Range  
±15Hz  
Select the AFC (Automatic Frequency Control) func-  
tion operating range from ±15 Hz (default) and ±8 Hz.  
NOTE: The AFC function may not tune the signal  
properly when a weak PSK signal is received.  
PSK Time Stamp  
ON  
Turn the time stamp (date, transmission or reception  
time) display ON and OFF.  
• ON : Displays the time stamp.  
• OFF : No time stamp display.  
PSK Time Stamp (Time)  
Local  
Selects the clock display for time stamp usage.  
• Local : Selects the time that set in “Time (Now).”  
• UTC* : Selects the time that set in “CLOCK2.”  
*The name of choice may differ according to  
“CLOCK2 Name” setting (p. 11-2). “UTC” is the  
default name of CLOCK2.  
NOTE: The time won’t be displayed when “OFF” is  
selected in “PSK Time Stamp” as above.  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
D
PSK decode set mode (continued)  
PSK Time Stamp (Frequency)  
OFF  
Selects the operating frequency display for time  
stamp usage.  
• ON : Displays the operating frequency.  
• OFF : No operating frequency display.  
NOTE: The frequency won’t be displayed when  
“OFF” is selected in “PSK Time Stamp” as  
below left.  
PSK Font Color (Receive)  
128  
255  
128  
Set the text color for received characters.  
• The color is set in RGB format.  
• Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),  
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.  
and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.  
PSK Font Color (Transmit)  
255  
106  
106  
Set the text color for transmitted characters.  
• The color is set in RGB format.  
• Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),  
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.  
and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.  
PSK Font Color (Time Stamp)  
0
155  
189  
Set the text color for time stamp indication.  
• The color is set in RGB format.  
• Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),  
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.  
and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.  
PSK Font Color (TX Buffer)  
255  
255  
255  
Set the text color in the TX buffer screen.  
• The color is set in RGB format.  
• Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),  
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale.  
and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
D
Data saving  
The contents of the PSK memory and received signal  
can be saved into the USB-Memory.  
The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom.  
q During PSK decode screen indication, push  
[F-1•<MENU1>] to select PSK decode second  
menu.  
OPTION  
F-5  
SAVE  
F-6  
WIDE  
F-7  
w Push [F-5•SAVE] to select decode file save screen.  
e Change the following conditions if desired.  
• File name:  
z Push [F-4•EDIT] to select file name edit con-  
dition.  
• Push [F-1• DIR/FILE] several times to select the  
file name, if necessary.  
EXIT/SET  
DIR/FILE  
F-1  
EDIT  
F-4  
Main dial  
x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol]  
(MF7) to select the character group, then ro-  
tate the main dial to select the character.  
• [ABC] (MF6) : A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7): 0  
to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^ + –  
= ( ) [ ] { } _ ~ @ can be selected.  
• Decode file save screen  
• Push [F-1•Ω] to move the cursor left, push [F-2•≈]  
to move the cursor right, [F-3•DEL] delete a char-  
acter and push [F-4•SPACE] to insert a space.  
c Push EXIT/SET to set the file name.  
• Decode file save screen— file name edit  
• File format  
z Push [F-5•OPTION] to enter save option  
screen.  
x Rotate the main dial to select the saving for-  
mat from Text and HTML.  
• “Text” is the default setting.  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the  
default setting.  
c Push EXIT/SET to return to the previous indi-  
cation.  
• Save option screen  
• Saving location  
z Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view  
screen.  
x Select the desired directory or folder in the  
USB-Memory.  
• Push [F-4•Ω ≈] to select the upper directory.  
• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select folder in the  
same directory.  
• Push and hold [F-4•Ω ≈] for 1 sec. to select a  
folder in the directory.  
• Push [F-5•REN/DEL] to rename the folder.  
• Push and hold [F-5•REN/DEL] for 1 sec. to delete  
the folder.  
• Push and hold [F-6•MAKE] for 1 sec. to make a  
new folder. (Edit the name with the same manner  
as the “• File name” above.)  
c Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] twice to select the file  
name.  
r Push [F-6•SAVE].  
• After saving is completed, return to PSK decode second  
menu automatically.  
✔ For your convenience!  
Two data formats, Text and HTML, are available for  
PC data storage.  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
■ Operating AM  
q Push a band key to select the desired band.  
w Push AM/FM to select AM.  
[MIC]  
[TX] indicator [RX] indicator Band keys  
• “AM” indicator appears.  
• After AM mode is selected, push AM/FM to toggle be-  
tween AM and FM modes.  
e Rotate the main dial to tune to the desired fre-  
quency.  
• The S-meter indicates received signal strength when  
signal is received.  
r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening  
level.  
[AF]  
AM/FM  
Main dial  
t Push TRANSMIT or [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.  
• The TX indicator lights red.  
Appears  
y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice  
level.  
• Adjust the microphone gain with [MIC] at this step, if  
necessary.  
u Push TRANSMIT or release [PTT] (microphone) to  
return to receive.  
D
Convenient functions for receive  
• Preamp (p. 5-9)  
• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-12)  
➥ Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).  
• PBT indicator (above PBT-CLR switch) lights when  
PBT is in use.  
➥ Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the pre-  
amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.  
• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1 or  
preamp 2 is ON.  
• Push and hold PBT-CLR for 1 sec. to clear the set-  
tings.  
• Attenuator (p. 5-9)  
➥ Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-  
• Notch filter (p. 5-18)  
➥ Push NOTCH to turn the manual notch function  
ator in 6 dB steps.  
• Push and hold [ATT] (MF3) for 1 sec. to turn the atten-  
uator function OFF.  
• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-  
ator is ON.  
ON and OFF.  
• Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the attenuating fre-  
quency.  
• Notch indicator (above NOTCH switch) lights when  
either the auto or manual notch is ON.  
• Noise blanker (p. 5-16)  
• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-11)  
➥ Push [AGC] switch several times to select  
AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.  
➥ Push NB to turn the noise blanker ON and  
OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust the  
threshold level.  
➥ Push AGC VR to turn the AGC time constant  
• Noise blanker indicator (above NB switch) lights  
when the noise blanker is ON.  
manual setting ON and OFF.  
• Push and hold NB for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker  
set mode.  
• Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant.  
• Auto tuning function (p. 5-19)  
➥ Push [AUTOTUNE] to turn the auto tuning func-  
tion ON and OFF.  
• Noise reduction (p. 5-17)  
➥ Push NR to turn the noise reduction ON and  
OFF.  
• The transceiver automatically tunes the desired sig-  
nal within ±5 kHz range.  
• Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction  
level.  
• Noise reduction indicator (above NR switch) lights  
when the noise reduction is ON.  
IMPORTANT!  
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal  
with interference, the automatic tuning function may  
not tune, or may tune to an undesired signal.  
• Audio tone control (p. 12-4)  
➥ Push [F-7•SET] then [F-1•LEVEL] to enter level  
set mode. Select an item with [F-1•Y]/[F-2•Z]  
then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone.  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
D
Convenient functions for transmit  
• VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 6-2)  
➥ Push VOX to turn the VOX function ON and  
OFF.  
• Audio tone control (p. 12-5)  
➥ Push [F-7•SET] then [F-1•LEVEL] to enter level  
set mode. Select an item with [F-1•Y]/[F-2•Z]  
then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone.  
• “  
” appears when the VOX function is ON.  
VOX  
• Transmit quality monitor (p. 6-4)  
➥ Push MONITOR to turn the monitor function ON  
and OFF.  
• Rotate [MONI GAIN] to adjust the monitor gain.  
• Monitor indicator (above MONITOR switch) lights  
when the monitor function is ON.  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
■ Operating FM  
q Push a band key to select the desired band.  
w Push AM/FM to select FM.  
[MIC]  
[TX] indicator [RX] indicator Band keys  
• “FM” indicator appears.  
• After FM mode is selected, push AM/FM to toggle be-  
tween FM and AM modes.  
e Rotate the main dial to tune to the desired fre-  
quency.  
• The S-meter indicates received signal strength when  
signal is received.  
• 10 kHz tuning step is preset for the FM mode.  
• Push FILTER several times to select the desired filter  
width.  
AM/FM  
FILTER  
[AF]  
Main dial  
r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening  
level.  
t Push TRANSMIT or [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.  
• The TX indicator lights red.  
Appears  
y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice  
level.  
• Adjust the microphone gain with [MIC] at this step, if  
necessary.  
• FM narrow transmission is available when “FIL2” or  
“FIL3” is selected.  
u Push TRANSMIT or release [PTT] (microphone) to  
return to receive.  
D
Convenient functions for receive  
• Preamp (p. 5-9)  
• Attenuator (p. 5-9)  
➥ Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the pre-  
amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.  
• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1 or  
preamp 2 is ON.  
➥ Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-  
ator in 6 dB steps.  
• Push and hold [ATT] (MF4) for 1 sec. to turn the atten-  
uator function OFF.  
• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-  
ator is ON.  
• Auto notch filter (p. 5-18)  
➥ Push NOTCH to turn the auto notch function  
• Audio tone control (p. 12-4)  
ON and OFF.  
➥ Push [F-7•SET] then [F-1•LEVEL] to enter level  
set mode. Select an item with [F-1•Y]/[F-2•Z]  
then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone.  
• Notch indicator (above NOTCH switch) lights when  
the auto notch is ON.  
D
Convenient functions for transmit  
• VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 6-2)  
➥ Push VOX to turn the VOX function ON and  
OFF.  
• Audio tone control (p. 12-5)  
➥ Push [F-7•SET] then [F-1•LEVEL] to enter level  
set mode. Select an item with [F-1•Y]/[F-2•Z]  
then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone.  
• “  
” appears when the VOX function is ON.  
VOX  
• Transmit quality monitor (p. 6-4)  
➥ Push MONITOR to turn the monitor function ON  
and OFF.  
• Rotate [MONI GAIN] to adjust the monitor gain.  
• Monitor indicator (above MONITOR switch) lights  
when the monitor function is ON.  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
■ Repeater operation  
A repeater amplifies received signals and retransmits  
them at a different frequency. When using a repeater,  
the transmit frequency is shifted from the receive fre-  
quency by an offset frequency. A repeater can be ac-  
cessed using split frequency operation with the shift  
frequency set to the repeater’s receive frequency.  
For accessing a repeater which requires a repeater  
tone, set the repeater tone frequency in tone fre-  
quency set mode as described below.  
q Set the offset frequencies (HF, 50 MHz) and turn  
ON the quick split function in Others set mode in ad-  
vance. (pgs. 12-12, 12-13)  
[SPLIT] indicator Band keys  
V/M  
w Push V/M to select VFO mode.  
e Push the desired band key.  
r Push AM/FM several times to select FM mode.  
t Set the receive frequency (repeater output fre-  
quency).  
y Push and hold SPLIT for 1 sec. to start repeater  
AM/FM  
operation.  
SPLIT  
[XFC] Main dial  
• Repeater tone is turned ON automatically.  
• [SPLIT] indicator lights and “  
LCD.  
” appears on the  
SPLIT  
• Shifted transmit frequency and “TX” appear in the sub  
band.  
• The transmit frequency can be monitored while pushing  
[XFC].  
u Push and hold [PTT] to transmit; release [PTT] to  
receive.  
i To return to simplex, push SPLIT momentarily.  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
D
Repeater tone frequency setting  
Some repeaters require subaudible tones to be ac-  
cessed. Subaudible tones are superimposed on your  
normal signal and must be set in advance. The trans-  
ceiver has 50 tones from 67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz.  
q Select FM mode.  
DEF  
w Push and hold [TONE] for 1 sec. to tone frequency  
set mode.  
F-4  
TONE  
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select REPEATER  
TONE item.  
r Rotate the main dial to select the desired repeater  
tone frequency.  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default  
setting.  
t Push EXIT/SET to return to the previous indication.  
AM/FM  
∫
√
Main dial  
F-1  
F-2  
• Available tone frequencies  
(unit: Hz)  
67.0 085.4 107.2 136.5 165.5 186.2 210.7 254.1  
69.3 088.5 110.9 141.3 167.9 189.9 218.1  
71.9 091.5 114.8 146.2 171.3 192.8 225.7  
74.4 094.8 118.8 151.4 173.8 196.6 229.1  
77.0 097.4 123.0 156.7 177.3 199.5 233.6  
79.7 100.0 127.3 159.8 179.9 203.5 241.8  
82.5 103.5 131.8 162.2 183.5 206.5 250.3  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
■ Tone squelch operation  
The tone squelch opens only when receiving a signal  
containing a matching subaudible tone. You can  
silently wait for calls from group members using the  
same tone.  
q Set the desired frequency band and select FM  
mode.  
DEF  
F-4  
TONE  
w Push [TONE] to turn the tone squelch function ON.  
• “ TSQL ” appears  
e Push and hold [TONE] for 1 sec. to tone frequency  
set mode.  
r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select T-SQL TONE  
item.  
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired tone  
squelch frequency.  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default  
setting.  
AM/FM  
∫
√
Main dial  
F-1  
F-2  
y Push EXIT/SET to return to the previous indication.  
u When the received signal includes a matching tone,  
squelch opens and the signal can be heard.  
• When the received signal’s tone does not match, tone  
squelch does not open. However, the S-indicator shows  
signal strength.  
• To open the squelch manually, push [XFC].  
i Operate the transceiver in the normal way.  
o To cancel the tone squelch, push [TONE] to clear  
“TSQL.”  
• Available tone frequencies  
(unit: Hz)  
67.0 085.4 107.2 136.5 165.5 186.2 210.7 254.1  
69.3 088.5 110.9 141.3 167.9 189.9 218.1  
71.9 091.5 114.8 146.2 171.3 192.8 225.7  
74.4 094.8 118.8 151.4 173.8 196.6 229.1  
77.0 097.4 123.0 156.7 177.3 199.5 233.6  
79.7 100.0 127.3 159.8 179.9 203.5 241.8  
82.5 103.5 131.8 162.2 183.5 206.5 250.3  
4-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT  
4
■ Data mode (AFSK) operation  
When operating AMTOR or PACKET with your TNC  
and/or PC software, consult the manual that comes  
with the TNC and/or the software.  
q Connect a PC and TNC to the transceiver. (p. 2-9)  
w Push a band key to select the desired band.  
e Push SSB or AM/FM to select the desired oper-  
ating mode.  
Band keys  
r Push DATA to turn data mode ON.  
• One of “-D1,” “-D2” or “-D3” is additionally appears.  
• During data mode selection, push and hold DATA for  
1 sec. to select data mode 1 (D1), 2 (D2) and 3 (D3) in  
sequence.  
t Rotate the main dial to tune to the desired signal  
and decode it correctly.  
[AF]  
SSB  
AM/FM  
DATA  
Main dial  
• Also use the tuning indicator of the TNC or software.  
• During SSB data mode, 1⁄4 tuning function can be used  
for critical tuning.  
Appears  
y Operate the PC (software) or TNC to transmit.  
• When operating in SSB data mode, adjust the TNC out-  
put level so that the ALC meter reading doesn’t go out-  
side the ALC zone.  
NOTE: When SSB data mode is selected, the audio  
input from the [ACC1] (pin 6) is used for transmis-  
sion instead of [MIC]’s.  
The fixed condition is used for SSB data transmis-  
sion as follows:  
• [COMP]  
• Tx bandwidth  
: OFF  
: MID  
• Tx Tone (Bass) : 0  
• Tx Tone (Trebles): 0  
• Tone-pair example  
2325 Hz  
✔ For your information  
Carrier frequency is displayed when SSB data mode  
is selected.  
200 Hz 2125 Hz  
See the diagram left for the tone-pair example.  
Carrier frequency  
(displayed frequency)  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
Section 5  
■ Spectrum scope screen ……………………………………………… 5-2  
D Center mode ………………………………………………………… 5-2  
D Fixed mode …………………………………………………………… 5-3  
D Mini scope screen indication ……………………………………… 5-4  
D Scope set mode ……………………………………………………… 5-4  
■ Preamplifier ……………………………………………………………… 5-9  
■ Attenuator ……………………………………………………………… 5-9  
■ RIT function …………………………………………………………… 5-10  
D RIT monitor function …………………………………………………5-10  
■ AGC function …………………………………………………………… 5-11  
D Selecting the preset value …………………………………………5-11  
D Adjusting the AGC time constant …………………………………5-11  
D Setting the AGC time constant preset value ………………………5-11  
■ Twin PBT operation …………………………………………………… 5-12  
■ IF filter selection ……………………………………………………… 5-13  
D IF filter selection …………………………………………………… 5-13  
D Filter passband width setting (except FM mode) ……………… 5-13  
D Roofing filter selection ……………………………………………… 5-14  
D DSP filter shape …………………………………………………… 5-14  
D Filter shape set mode ……………………………………………… 5-14  
■ Noise blanker ………………………………………………………… 5-16  
D NB set mode ………………………………………………………… 5-16  
■ Noise reduction ………………………………………………………… 5-17  
■ Dial lock function ……………………………………………………… 5-17  
■ Notch function ………………………………………………………… 5-18  
■ Digital selector ………………………………………………………… 5-18  
■ Autotune function ……………………………………………………… 5-19  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
■ Spectrum scope screen  
This DSP-based spectrum scope allows you to display  
the conditions on the selected band, as well as relative  
strengths of signals. The IC-7700 has two modes for  
the spectrum indication— one is center mode, and an-  
ther one is fixed mode.  
In addition, the IC-7700 has a mini scope screen to  
save screen space.  
D
Center mode  
Displays signals around the set frequency within the  
selected span. The set frequency is always displayed  
at the center of the screen.  
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
MARKER HOLD  
F-3  
F-4  
CENT/FIX  
F-5  
w Push [F-1•SCOPE] to select the scope screen.  
e Push [F-5•CENT/FIX] to select the center mode.  
• “  
” is displayed when center mode is selected.  
CENTER  
r Push [F-1•SPAN] several times to select the scope  
span.  
• ±2.5, ±5.0, ±10, ±25, ±50, ±100 and ±250 kHz are avail-  
able.  
• Push and hold [F-1•SPAN] for 1 sec. to return to ±2.5  
kHz span.  
• Sweeping speed is selectable for each span indepen-  
dently in scope set mode. (pgs. 5-5, 5-6)  
t Push [F-2•ATT] several times to activate an attenu-  
ator or turn the attenuator OFF.  
EXIT/SET  
ATT  
F-2  
SPAN  
F-1  
• 10, 20 and 30 dB attenuators are available.  
• Push and hold [F-2•ATT] for 1 sec. to turn OFF the at-  
tenuator.  
y Push [F-3•MARKER] to turn the marker for transmit  
frequency ON or OFF.  
• “ ” displays the marker at the transmit frequency.  
T
• “<<” or “>>” appears when the marker is out of range.  
• The spectrum scope shows the transmit signal wave-  
form while transmitting. This can be deactivated in  
scope set mode. (p. 5-5)  
• The spectrum scope shows the peak level holding func-  
tion. Peak levels are displayed in the background of the  
current spectrum in a different color until the receive fre-  
quency changes. This can be deactivated and the wave-  
form color can be set in scope set mode. (p. 5-5)  
u Push [F-4•HOLD] to freeze the current spectrum  
waveform.  
• Observed indication example  
• “ HOLD ” appears while the function is in use.  
• The peak hold function can be deactivated in scope set  
mode.  
i Push EXIT/SET to exit the scope screen.  
NOTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost wave-  
form may appear. Push [F-2•ATT] several times to  
activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this case.  
Spurious signal waveforms may be displayed. They  
are generated in the internal scope circuit and do  
not indicate a transceiver malfunction.  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
5
D
Fixed mode  
Displays signals within the specified frequency range.  
The selected frequency band conditions can be ob-  
served at a glance when using this mode.  
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
MARKER HOLD  
F-3  
F-4  
CENT/FIX  
F-5  
w Push [F-1•SCOPE] to select the scope screen.  
e Push [F-5•CENT/FIX] to select the fixed mode.  
• “  
” is displayed when fixed mode is selected.  
FIX  
r Push [F-2•ATT] several times to activate an attenu-  
ator or turn the attenuator OFF.  
• 10, 20 and 30 dB attenuators are available.  
• Push and hold [F-2•ATT] for 1 sec. to turn OFF the at-  
tenuator.  
t Push [F-3•MARKER] several times to select the  
marker for transmit frequency or turn the marker  
OFF.  
EXIT/SET  
ATT  
F-2  
• “ ” displays the marker at the receive frequency. (al-  
R
ways displayed)  
• “ ” displays the marker at the transmit frequency.  
T
• “<<” or “>>” appears when the marker is out of range.  
• The spectrum scope shows the transmit signal wave-  
form while transmitting. This can be deactivated in  
scope set mode. (p. 5-5)  
• The spectrum scope shows the peak level holding func-  
tion. Peak levels are displayed in the background of the  
current spectrum in a different color until the receive fre-  
quency changes. This can be deactivated and the wave-  
form color can be set in scope set mode. (p. 5-5)  
y Push [F-4•HOLD] to freeze the current spectrum  
waveform.  
• “ HOLD ” appears while the function is in use.  
• The peak hold function can be deactivated in scope set  
mode.  
u Push EXIT/SET to exit the scope screen.  
NOTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost wave-  
form may appear. Push [F-2•ATT] several times to  
activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this case.  
The scope bandwidth can be specified for each op-  
erating frequency band independently in scope set  
mode. (pgs. 5-6 to 5-8)  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
D
Mini scope screen indication  
The mini scope screen can be displayed with another  
screen display, such as set mode menu, decode  
screen, memory list screen, etc. simultaneously.  
q Set the scope mode (center or fixed), marker, at-  
tenuator, span, etc. in advance. (pgs. 5-2, 5-3)  
w Push M.SCOPE to toggle the mini scope indication  
ON and OFF.  
• The S/RF meter type during mini scope indication can  
be selected in display set mode (Meter Type (Wide  
Screen) item). (p. 12-10)  
M.SCOPE  
D
Scope set mode  
This set mode is used to set the waveform color,  
sweeping speed, scope range for fixed mode, etc.  
q During spectrum scope display ON, push  
[F-7•SET] to select scope set mode screen.  
• Push [F-7•WIDE] to toggle the screen size between nor-  
mal and wide.  
Ω ≈  
WIDE  
F-7  
F-3  
w Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired set  
item.  
e Set the desired condition using the main dial.  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default  
condition or value.  
• Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select the set contents for some  
items.  
r Push EXIT/SET to exit from set mode.  
EXIT/SET  
∫
√
DEF  
F-4  
Main dial  
F-1  
F-2  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
5
D
Scope set mode (continued)  
Scope during Tx (CENTER Type)  
ON  
Turn the transmitting signal waveform indication ON  
and OFF.  
NOTE: The transmitting signal waveform indica-  
tion is available for the center mode only.  
Max Hold  
ON  
Turn the peak level holding function ON and OFF.  
CENTER Type Display  
Filter Center  
Select the center frequency of the spectrum scope  
indication (center mode only).  
• Filter center : Shows the selected filter’s center  
frequency at the center.  
• Carrier Point Center  
: Shows the selected operating  
mode carrier point frequency at  
the center.  
• Carrier Point Center (Abs. Freq.)  
: In addition to the carrier point  
center setting above, the actual  
frequency is displayed for the  
bottom of the scope.  
Waveform Color (Current)  
0
204  
102  
Set the waveform color for the currently received sig-  
nals.  
• The color is set in RGB format.  
• Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B  
(Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range.  
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB  
scale.  
Waveform Color (Max Hold)  
0
102  
153  
Set the waveform color for the receiving signals max-  
imum level.  
• The color is set in RGB format.  
• Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B  
(Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range.  
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB  
scale.  
Sweep Speed (± 2.5k)  
MID  
Select the sweep speed for the ±2.5 kHz span selec-  
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.  
NOTE: The waveform may be displayed incorrect-  
ly with “FAST” setting.  
(± 5k)  
MID  
Select the sweep speed for the ±5 kHz span selec-  
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.  
NOTE: The waveform may be displayed incorrect-  
ly with “FAST” setting.  
(± 10k)  
FAST  
Select the sweep speed for the ±10 kHz span selec-  
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
D
Scope set mode (continued)  
(± 25k)  
FAST  
Select the sweep speed for the ±25 kHz span selec-  
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.  
(± 50k)  
FAST  
Select the sweep speed for the ±50 kHz span selec-  
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.  
(± 100k)  
FAST  
Select the sweep speed for the ±100 kHz span selec-  
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.  
(± 250k)  
FAST  
Select the sweep speed for the ±250 kHz span selec-  
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.  
Fixed Edges ( 0.03 – 1.60)  
0.750 –  
1.250 MHz  
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode for  
bands below 1.6 MHz.  
• Set the frequencies within 0.030 to 1.600 MHz  
range in 1 kHz steps.  
Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so  
either edge frequency will be set to the difference  
between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to  
500 kHz automatically while setting another edge  
frequency.  
( 1.60 – 2.00)  
1.800 –  
2.000 MHz  
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope  
when the 1.6 to 2 MHz band is selected.  
• Set the frequencies within 1.600 to 2.000 MHz  
range in 1 kHz steps.  
( 2.00 – 6.00)  
3.500 –  
4.000 MHz  
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope  
when the 2 to 6 MHz band is selected.  
• Set the frequencies within 2.000 to 6.000 MHz  
range in 1 kHz steps.  
Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so  
either edge frequency will be set to the difference  
between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to  
500 kHz automatically while setting another edge  
frequency.  
( 6.00 – 8.00)  
7.000 –  
7.300 MHz  
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope  
when the 6 to 8 MHz band is selected.  
• Set the frequencies within 6.000 to 8.000 MHz  
range in 1 kHz steps.  
Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so  
either edge frequency will be set to the difference  
between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to  
500 kHz automatically while setting another edge  
frequency.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
5
D
Scope set mode (continued)  
( 8.00 – 11.00)  
10.100 – 10.150 MHz  
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope  
when the 8 to 11 MHz band is selected.  
• Set the frequencies within 8.000 to 11.000 MHz  
range in 1 kHz steps.  
Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so  
either edge frequency will be set to the difference  
between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to  
500 kHz automatically while setting another edge  
frequency.  
(11.00 – 15.00)  
14.000 – 14.350 MHz  
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope  
when the 11 to 15 MHz band is selected.  
• Set the frequencies within 11.000 to 15.000 MHz  
range in 1 kHz steps.  
Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so  
either edge frequency will be set to the difference  
between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to  
500 kHz automatically while setting another edge  
frequency.  
(15.00 – 20.00)  
18.068 – 18.168 MHz  
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope  
when the 15 to 20 MHz band is selected.  
• Set the frequencies within 15.000 to 20.000 MHz  
range in 1 kHz steps.  
Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so  
either edge frequency will be set to the differ-  
ence between higher and lower frequencies from  
5 to 500 kHz automatically while setting another  
edge frequency.  
(20.00 – 22.00)  
21.000 – 21.450 MHz  
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope  
when the 20 to 22 MHz band is selected.  
• Set the frequencies within 20.000 to 22.000 MHz  
range in 1 kHz steps.  
Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so  
either edge frequency will be set to the difference  
between higher and lower frequencies become 5  
to 500 kHz automatically while setting another  
edge frequency.  
(22.00 – 26.00)  
24.890 – 24.990 MHz  
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope  
when the 22 to 26 MHz band is selected.  
• Set the frequencies within 22.000 to 26.000 MHz  
range in 1 kHz steps.  
Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so  
either edge frequency will be set to the difference  
between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to  
500 kHz automatically while setting another edge  
frequency.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
D
Scope set mode (continued)  
(26.00 – 30.00)  
28.000 – 28.500 MHz  
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope  
when the 26 to 30 MHz band is selected.  
• Set the frequencies within 26.000 to 30.000 MHz  
range in 1 kHz steps.  
Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so  
either edge frequency will be set to the difference  
between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to  
500 kHz automatically while setting another edge  
frequency.  
(30.00 – 45.00)  
30.000 – 30.500 MHz  
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope  
when the 30 to 45 MHz band is selected.  
• Set the frequencies within 30.000 to 45.000 MHz  
range in 1 kHz steps.  
Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so  
either edge frequency will be set to the difference  
between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to  
500 kHz automatically while setting another edge  
frequency.  
(45.00 – 60.00)  
50.000 – 50.500 MHz  
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope  
when the 45 to 60 MHz band is selected.  
• Set the frequencies within 45.000 to 60.000 MHz  
range in 1 kHz steps.  
Up to 500 kHz band width can be specified, so  
either edge frequency will be set to the difference  
between higher and lower frequencies from 5 to  
500 kHz automatically while setting another edge  
frequency.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
5
■ Preamplifier  
The preamp amplifies received signals in the receiver  
front end, to improve the S/N ratio and sensitivity. Set  
this to preamp 1 or preamp 2 when receiving weak sig-  
nals.  
➥ Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the preamp  
P.AMP  
OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.  
For all HF bands  
P.AMP  
1
High-gain preamp for 24 MHz band and  
P.AMP  
2
above  
✔ About the “P.AMP2”  
The “P.AMP 2” is a high gain receive amplifier. When  
the “P.AMP 2” is used in the presence of strong elec-  
tromagnetic fields, distortion sometimes results. In  
such cases, use the transceiver with the “P.AMP 1” or  
“P.AMP OFF” setting.  
The “P.AMP 2” is most effective when:  
• Used on bands above 24 MHz and when signals are  
weak.  
• Receive sensitivity is insufficient when using low-gain  
antennas, or while using a narrow band antenna  
(such as small loop, a Beverage antenna or a short  
Yagi antenna).  
■ Attenuator  
The attenuator prevents a desired signal from distor-  
tion when very strong signals are near the desired fre-  
quency or when very strong electromagnetic fields,  
such as from broadcasting stations near your location.  
➥ Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenuator  
6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB or attenuator OFF.  
ATT  
➥ Push and hold [ATT] (MF4) for 1 sec. to turn the at-  
tenuator function OFF.  
6 dB  
ATT  
6dB  
attenuation  
12 dB  
ATT  
12dB  
attenuation  
18 dB  
ATT  
18dB  
attenuation  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
■ RIT function  
The RIT (Receive Increment Tuning) function com-  
pensates for off-frequency operation of the received  
station.  
The function shifts the receive frequency up to  
±9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps without moving the transmit  
frequency.  
qPush RIT to turn the RIT function ON and OFF.  
[RIT/∂TX]  
• “  
” and the shifting frequency appear when the func-  
RIT  
tion is ON.  
wRotate the [RIT/∂TX] control.  
• Push and hold CLEAR for 1 sec. to reset the RIT fre-  
quency.  
• Push CLEAR momentarily to reset the RIT frequency  
when the quick RIT/∂TX clear function is ON. (p. 12-15)  
• Push and hold RIT for 1 sec. to add the shift fre-  
quency to the operating frequency.  
RIT  
CLEAR  
D
RIT monitor function  
When the RIT function is ON, pushing and holding  
[XFC] allows you to monitor the operating frequency  
directly (RIT is temporarily cancelled).  
✔ For your convenience— Calculate function  
The shift frequency of the RIT function can be  
added/subtracted to the displayed frequency.  
➥ While displaying the RIT shift frequency, push and  
XFC  
hold RIT for 1 sec.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
5
■ AGC function  
The AGC (auto gain control) controls receiver gain to  
produce a constant audio output level even when the  
received signal strength varies greatly.  
The transceiver has 3 preset AGC characteristics (time  
constant: fast, mid, slow) for non-FM mode.  
The FM mode AGC time constant is fixed as ‘FAST’  
(0.1 sec.) and AGC time constant cannot be  
changed.  
[AGC] control AGC VR  
AGC  
D
Selecting the preset value  
qSelect any non-FM mode.  
wPush [AGC] (MF5) several times to select AGC fast,  
AGC medium (MID) or AGC slow.  
• Push and hold AGC VR for 1 sec. to turn the AGC  
function OFF.  
D
D
Adjusting the AGC time constant  
qSelect any non-FM mode.  
wPush AGC VR , then rotate [AGC] control to adjust  
the AGC time constant.  
• [AGC VR] indicator above the switch lights green.  
Setting the AGC time constant preset value  
qSelect any non-FM mode.  
wPush and hold [AGC] (MF5) for 1 sec. to enter AGC  
set mode.  
ePush [AGC] (MF5) several times to select FAST time  
constant.  
rRotate the main dial to set the desired time constant  
for ‘AGC FAST.’  
• Selectable AGC time constant  
(unit: sec.)  
• AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.  
(depends on mode) or turned OFF.  
Mode  
Default  
Selectable AGC time constant  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default  
value.  
tPush [AGC] (MF5) to select medium time constant.  
yRotate the main dial to set the desired time constant  
for ‘AGC MID.’  
0.3 (FAST)  
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,  
2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0  
SSB 2.0 (MID)  
6.0 (SLOW)  
0.1 (FAST)  
CW 0.5 (MID)  
1.2 (SLOW)  
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,  
2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0  
• AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.  
(depends on mode) or turned OFF.  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default  
value.  
0.1 (FAST)  
RTTY  
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,  
2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0  
0.5 (MID)  
PSK  
uPush [AGC] (MF5) to select slow time constant.  
iRotate the main dial to set the desired time constant  
for ‘AGC SLOW.’  
1.2 (SLOW)  
3.0 (FAST)  
AM 5.0 (MID)  
7.0 (SLOW)  
0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0,  
4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0  
• AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.  
(depends on mode) or turned OFF.  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default  
value.  
FM 0.1 (FAST) Fixed  
oSelect another non-FM mode. Repeat steps e to i  
if desired.  
!Push EXIT/SET to exit the AGC set mode screen.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
■ Twin PBT operation  
PBT (Passband Tuning) electronically narrows the IF  
passband width by shifting the IF frequency slightly  
outside of the IF filter passband to reject interference.  
The IC-7700 uses DSP for the PBT function. Moving  
both [TWIN-PBT] controls to the same position shifts  
the IF for both high and low frequencies.  
➥ The LCD shows the passband width and shift fre-  
quency graphically.  
[TWIN-PBT]  
• PBT indicator above PBT-CLR switch lights when PBT  
is in use.  
➥ Push and hold FILTER for 1 sec. to enter the filter  
set screen. Current passband width and shift fre-  
quency is displayed in the filter set screen.  
➥ To set the [TWIN-PBT] controls to the center posi-  
tions, push and hold PBT-CLR for 1 sec.  
PBT-CLR  
The variable range depends on the passband width  
and mode. The edge of the variable range is half of the  
passband width, and PBT is adjustable in 25  
(SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK modes) or 100 Hz (AM mode)  
steps.  
Shows filter width, shifting value and condition  
• [TWIN-PBT] should normally be set to the center posi-  
tions (PBT setting is cleared) when there is no interfer-  
ence.  
• When PBT is used, the audio tone may be changed.  
• Not available for FM mode.  
• While rotating [TWIN-PBT], noise may occur. This comes  
from the DSP unit and does not indicate an equipment  
malfunction.  
• Filter set screen  
• PBT operation example  
Both controls at  
center position  
Cutting a lower  
passband  
Cutting both higher and  
lower passbands  
PBT1  
PBT1  
PBT1  
PBT2  
PBT2  
PBT2  
Passband  
Passband  
IF center frequency  
Interference Desired signal  
Interference Desired signal Interference  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
5
■ IF filter selection  
The transceiver has 3 passband width IF filters for  
each mode.  
FILTER  
For SSB, CW and PSK modes, the passband width  
can be set within 50 to 3600 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps.  
A total of 41 passband widths are available.  
For RTTY mode, the passband width can be set within  
50 to 2700 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps. A total of 32 pass-  
band widths are available.  
For AM mode, the passband width can be set within  
200 Hz to 10 kHz in 200 Hz steps. A total of 50 pass-  
band widths are available.  
For FM mode, the passband width is fixed and 3 pass-  
band widths are available.  
The filter selection is automatically memorized in  
each mode.  
The PBT shift frequencies are automatically memo-  
rized in each filter.  
D
D
IF filter selection  
qSelect the desired mode.  
wPush FILTER several times to select the IF filter  
1, 2 or 3.  
• The selected passband width and filter number is dis-  
played in the LCD.  
Filter passband width setting (except FM mode)  
qPush and hold FILTER for 1 sec. to enter filter set  
screen.  
wSelect any mode except FM.  
• Passband widths for FM modes are fixed and cannot be set.  
ePush FILTER several times to select the desired  
IF filter.  
rWhile pushing [F-1•BW], rotate the main dial to set  
the desired passband width.  
• In SSB, CW and PSK modes, the passband width can  
be set within the following range.  
50 to 500 Hz  
50 Hz steps  
600 to 3600 Hz 100 Hz steps  
• In RTTY mode, the passband width can be set within the  
following range.  
50 to 500 Hz  
50 Hz steps  
600 to 2700 Hz 100 Hz steps  
• In AM mode, the passband width can be set within the  
following range.  
200 Hz to 10 kHz 200 Hz steps  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default  
value.  
tRepeat steps w to r if desired for other modes.  
yPush EXIT/SET to exit filter set screen.  
The PBT shift frequencies are cleared when the  
passband width is changed.  
This filter set screen graphically displays the PBT  
shift frequencies and CW pitch operations.  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
D
Roofing filter selection  
The IC-7700 has 3, 6 and 15 kHz roofing filters at the  
1st IF frequency. The roofing filter provides interfer-  
ence reduction from nearby strong signals.  
qPush and hold FILTER for 1 sec. to enter filter set  
screen.  
wSelect any mode except FM.  
ePush [F-6•ROOFING] to select the desired filter  
width from 15 kHz (default), 6 kHz and 3 kHz.  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default  
value.  
rPush EXIT/SET to exit filter set screen.  
D
DSP filter shape  
The type of DSP filter shape for each SSB, SSB data  
and CW can be selected independently from soft and  
sharp.  
qPush and hold FILTER for 1 sec. to enter filter set  
screen.  
wSelect SSB, SSB data or CW mode.  
ePush [F-7•SHAPE] to select the desired filter shape  
from soft and sharp.  
rPush EXIT/SET to exit filter set screen.  
The filter shape can be set for each band (HF and  
50 MHz bands), mode, as well as the passband width  
setting (CW only) independently from your default set-  
ting in filter shape set mode.  
D
Filter shape set mode  
The type of DSP filter shape for SSB, SSB data and  
CW can be selected independently from soft and  
sharp.  
qPush and hold FILTER for 1 sec. to enter filter set  
screen.  
wPush and hold [F-7•SHAPE] for 1 sec. to enter filter  
shape set mode.  
ePush [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item.  
rRotate the main dial to select the filter shape from  
soft and sharp.  
tPush EXIT/SET to exit filter shape set mode.  
HF SSB  
(600Hz – )  
SHARP  
Select the filter shape for SSB mode in HF bands.  
The set filter shape is automatically used only  
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.  
SSB–D (600Hz – )  
SHARP  
Select the filter shape for SSB data mode in HF  
bands.  
The set filter shape is automatically used only  
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
5
D
Filter shape set mode (continued)  
CW  
( – 500Hz)  
SHARP  
Select the filter shape for CW mode in HF bands.  
The set filter shape is automatically used only  
when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower.  
CW  
(600Hz – )  
SHARP  
Select the filter shape for CW mode in HF bands.  
The set filter shape is automatically used only  
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.  
50M SSB  
(600Hz – )  
SOFT  
Select the filter shape for SSB mode in 50 MHz band.  
The set filter shape is automatically used only  
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.  
SSB–D (600Hz – )  
SHARP  
Select the filter shape for SSB data mode in 50 MHz  
band.  
The set filter shape is automatically used only  
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.  
CW  
( – 500Hz)  
SHARP  
Select the filter shape for CW mode in 50 MHz band.  
The set filter shape is automatically used only  
when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower.  
CW  
(600Hz – )  
SHARP  
Select the filter shape for CW mode in 50 MHz band.  
The set filter shape is automatically used only  
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
■ Noise blanker  
The noise blanker eliminates pulse-type noise such as  
the noise from car ignitions. The noise blanker is not  
available for FM mode.  
qPush NB to turn the noise blanker function ON  
and OFF.  
• [NB] indicator above this switch lights green.  
wRotate [NB] control to adjust the noise blanker  
threshold level.  
When using the noise blanker, received signals may  
be distorted if they are excessively strong or the  
noise type is other than impulse. Turn the noise  
blanker OFF, or rotate [NB] control to a shallow po-  
sition in this case.  
[NB] control  
NB  
D
NB set mode  
To deal with various type of noises, attenuation level  
and noise blank time can be set in NB set mode.  
qPush and hold NB for 1 sec. to enter NB set  
mode.  
wPush [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item.  
eRotate the main dial to set the desired level or value.  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default  
value.  
rPush EXIT/SET to exit NB set mode.  
NB Depth  
NB Width  
8
Set the noise attenuation level from 1 to 10.  
50  
Set the blank time from 1 to 100.  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
5
■ Noise reduction  
The noise reduction function reduces random noise  
components and enhances desired signals which are  
buried in noise. The DSP performs the random noise  
reduction function.  
qPush NR to turn the noise reduction ON.  
• [NR] indicator above this switch lights green.  
wRotate the [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction  
level.  
ePush NR to turn the noise reduction OFF.  
• [NR] indicator lights off.  
Large rotations of the [NR] control results in audio  
signal masking or distortion. Set the [NR] control for  
maximum readability.  
NR  
[NR] control  
■ Dial lock function  
The dial lock function prevents frequency changes by  
accidental movement of the tuning dial. The lock func-  
tion electronically locks the dial.  
➥ Push [LOCK] to toggle the dial lock function ON and  
OFF.  
• The [LOCK] indicator lights when the dial lock function  
is in use.  
LOCK  
[LOCK] indicator  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
■ Notch function  
This transceiver has auto and manual notch functions.  
The auto notch function uses DSP to automatically at-  
tenuate more than 3 beat tones, tuning signals, etc.,  
even if they are moving. The manual notch can be set  
to attenuate a frequency via the [NOTCH] control.The  
auto notch can be used in SSB, AM and FM mode.  
The manual notch can be used in SSB, CW, RTTY,  
PSK and AM modes.  
[NOTCH] control  
NOTCH  
➥ Push  
to toggle the notch function between  
NOTCH  
auto, manual and OFF in SSB and AM modes.  
NOTCH  
• Auto notch indication  
➥ Push  
to turn the manual notch function  
ON and OFF in CW, RTTY, PSK modes.  
NOTCH  
➥ Push  
to turn the auto notch function ON  
and OFF in FM mode.  
• [NOTCH] indicator above this switch lights green.  
• Push and hold NOTCH for 1 sec. to select the notch fil-  
ter width for manual notch from wide, middle and nar-  
row.  
• Set to attenuate a frequency for manual notch via the  
[NOTCH] control.  
• Manual notch indication  
• “  
• “  
” appears when auto notch is in use.  
” appears when manual notch is in use.  
AN  
MN  
While tuning the manual notch, noise may be heard.  
This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate  
an equipment malfunction.  
■ Digital selector  
The digital selector manually adjusts the center fre-  
quency of the automatic pre-selector.  
[DIGI-SEL] control  
The automatic pre-selector adds selectivity ahead of  
the 1st mixer. This reduces intermodulation distortion  
from the nearby strong signals.  
The automatic pre-selector tracks the frequency tun-  
ing, changing it’s resonant frequency in discrete steps.  
DIGI-SEL  
qPush  
to turn the digital selector ON and  
DIGI-SEL  
OFF.  
• [DIGI-SEL] indicator above this switch lights green.  
wRotate [DIGI-SEL] control to adjust the center fre-  
quency.  
NOTE:  
• When rotating the main dial while the digital selec-  
tor is activated, mechanical noise may be heard  
due to the switching noise from internal relays.  
• The preamp (P.AMP1 or P.AMP2) cannot be used  
while the digital selector is activated.  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE  
5
■ Autotune function  
The Automatic tuning function tunes the displayed fre-  
quency (max. CW: 500 Hz, AM: ±5 kHz) automatically  
when an off frequency signal is received. This function  
is active while in CW or AM mode is selected.  
➥ Push [AUTOTUNE] to toggle the autotune function  
ON or OFF.  
“
”
•
AUTOTUNE blinks when autotune function is activate.  
• After 30 sec. has passed, the autotune function stops  
tuning automatically even it’s still off-frequency.  
AUTO  
TUNE  
AUTOTUNE  
Appears  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT  
Section 6  
■ VOX function …………………………………………………………… 6-2  
D Using the VOX function …………………………………………… 6-2  
D Adjusting the VOX function ………………………………………… 6-2  
D VOX set mode ……………………………………………………… 6-2  
■ Break-in function ………………………………………………………… 6-3  
D Semi break-in operation …………………………………………… 6-3  
D Full break-in operation ……………………………………………… 6-3  
■ ∂TX function …………………………………………………………… 6-4  
D ∂TX monitor function ………………………………………………… 6-4  
■ Monitor function ………………………………………………………… 6-4  
■ Transmit filter width setting (SSB only) ……………………………… 6-5  
■ Speech compressor (SSB only) ……………………………………… 6-5  
■ Split frequency operation ……………………………………………… 6-6  
■ Quick split function ……………………………………………………… 6-7  
D Split lock function …………………………………………………… 6-7  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT  
■ VOX function  
The VOX (Voice-Operated Transmission) function  
switches between transmit and receive with your voice.  
This function provides “hands-free” operation.  
D
Using the VOX function  
qSelect a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM).  
VOX  
wPush VOX to turn the VOX function ON or OFF.  
• “  
” appears while the VOX is in use.  
VOX  
• [VOX] indicator above this switch lights green.  
SSB  
AM/FM  
D
Adjusting the VOX function  
qSelect a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM).  
VOX  
SSB  
AM/FM  
wPush VOX to turn VOX function ON.  
eWhile speaking into the microphone with your nor-  
mal voice level, rotate [VOX GAIN] to the point  
where the transceiver is continuously transmitting.  
rDuring receive, rotate [ANTI VOX] to the point  
where the transceiver does not switch to transmit  
due to received audio from the speaker.  
tAdjust the VOX delay and the VOX voice delay in  
VOX set mode, if necessary.  
[VOX GAIN] [ANTI VOX]  
D
VOX set mode  
qPush and hold VOX for 1 sec. to enter VOX set  
mode.  
wSelect the desired item using [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z].  
eRotate the main dial to the desired set value or con-  
dition.  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default  
value.  
rPush EXIT/SET to exit VOX set mode.  
VOX Delay  
0.2s  
Set the VOX delay for a convenient interval before re-  
turning to receive within 0 to 2.0 sec. range.  
VOX Voice Delay  
Short  
Set the VOX voice delay to prevent unintended trans-  
mission of your voice when switching to transmit.  
Short, Mid., Long and OFF settings are available.  
When using the VOX voice delay, turn the TX mon-  
itor function OFF to prevent transmitted audio from  
be echoed.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT  
6
■ Break-in function  
The break-in function is used in CW mode to automat-  
ically toggle the transceiver between transmit and re-  
ceive when keying. The IC-7700 is capable of full  
break-in or semi break-in.  
D
Semi break-in operation  
During semi break-in operation, the transceiver selects  
transmit when keying, then automatically returns to re-  
ceive after a pre-set time after you stop sending.  
qPush CW to select CW or CW-R mode.  
wPush BK-IN once or twice to turn the semi break-in  
function ON.  
BK-IN  
[DELAY] (outer control)  
• “  
” appears.  
BKIN  
eRotate [DELAY] to set the break-in delay time (the  
delay from transmit to receive).  
When using a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to adjust  
the keying speed.  
CW  
[KEY SPEED] (inner control)  
D
Full break-in operation  
During full break-in operation, the transceiver auto-  
matically enters transmit while keying and returns to  
receive immediately after keying is finished.  
qPush CW to select CW or CW-R mode.  
wPush BK-IN once or twice to turn the full break-in  
function ON.  
• “  
” appears.  
F-BKIN  
When using a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to adjust  
the keying speed.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT  
∂
■ TX function  
The ∂TX function shifts the transmit frequency up to  
±9.999 kHz in 1 Hz steps (10 Hz steps when cancelling  
the 1 Hz step readout) without moving the receive fre-  
quency.  
qPush ∂TX .  
[RIT/∂TX]  
• “  
” appears.  
∂TX  
wRotate [RIT/∂TX].  
eTo reset the ∂TX frequency, push and hold  
CLEAR  
for 1 sec.  
• Push  
momentarily to reset the ∂TX frequency  
CLEAR  
when the quick RIT/∂TX clear function is ON. (p. 12-15)  
rTo cancel the ∂TX function, push ∂TX again.  
• “  
” disappears.  
∂TX  
∂TX  
CLEAR  
D ∂  
TX monitor function  
When the ∂TX function is ON, pushing and holding  
[XFC] allows you to monitor the operating frequency  
directly (∂TX is temporarily cancelled).  
✔ For your convenience— Calculate function  
The shift frequency of the ∂TX function can be  
added/subtracted to the displayed frequency.  
XFC  
➥ While displaying the ∂TX shift frequency, push and  
hold ∂TX for 1 sec.  
■ Monitor function  
The monitor function allows you to monitor your trans-  
mit IF signals in any mode. Use this to check voice  
characteristics while adjusting SSB transmit parame-  
ter (p. 12-5). The CW sidetone functions regardless of  
the MONITOR switch setting.  
qPush MONITOR to switch the monitor function ON  
and OFF.  
MONITOR  
• [MONITOR] indicator above this switch lights green.  
wRotate [MONI GAIN] for the clearest audio output  
while pushing [PTT] and speaking into the micro-  
phone.  
NOTE: When using the VOX voice delay, turn the  
monitor function OFF; or transmitted audio will be  
echoed.  
[MONI GAIN]  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT  
6
■ Transmit filter width setting (SSB only)  
The transmit filter width for SSB mode can be selected  
from wide, middle and narrow.  
➥ During USB or LSB mode selection, push and hold  
[COMP] (MF6) for 1 sec. several times to select the  
desired transmit filter width from wide, middle and  
narrow.  
COMP  
• The filter can be independently set on the speech com-  
pressor function is ON and OFF.  
• The following filters are specified as the default. Each of  
the filter width can be re-set in level set mode.  
(p. 12-6)  
WIDE : 100 Hz to 2.9 kHz  
MID  
NAR  
: 300 Hz to 2.7 kHz  
: 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz  
■ Speech compressor (SSB only)  
The speech compressor increases average RF output  
power, improving signal strength and readability in  
SSB mode only.  
qSelect USB or LSB mode and adjust [MIC] to a suit-  
able level.  
[MIC]  
METER  
COMP  
• Push [METER] (MF2) several times to select the ALC  
meter for microphone gain adjustment.  
wPush [COMP] (MF6) to turn the speech compressor  
ON.  
ePush [METER] (MF2) once to select the COMP  
meter.  
rWhile speaking into the microphone, rotate [COMP]  
control, so that the COMP meter reads within the  
COMP zone (10 to 20 dB range) for your normal  
voice level.  
[DRIVE] [COMP] control  
When the COMP meter peaks exceed the COMP  
zone, your transmitted voice may be distorted.  
COMP zone  
tPush [METER] (MF2) 5 times to select the ALC  
meter.  
yWhile speaking into the microphone, rotate [DRIVE],  
so that the ALC meter reads within the 30 to 50%  
range of the ALC zone with your normal voice level.  
9
+
20  
5
+
40  
1
+
60dB  
A
5
10  
S
0
50  
2
100  
150  
15  
200  
10  
ID  
0
250 W  
3
Po  
SWR  
COMP  
1.5  
20  
10  
1
∞
0
dB  
44  
ALC  
VD  
52V  
✔ For your convenience  
Push and hold [METER] (MF2) for 1 sec. to display the  
multi-function meter that can check the ALC and  
COMP level at a glance.  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT  
■ Split frequency operation  
Split frequency operation allows you to transmit and  
receive in the same mode on two different frequencies.  
Split frequency operation is performed using 2 fre-  
quencies on the main and sub readouts.  
The following is an example of setting 21.290 MHz for  
receiving and 21.310 MHz for transmitting.  
qSet 21.290 MHz (USB) in VFO mode.  
wPush SPLIT momentarily, then push and hold  
A=B for 1 sec.  
[SPLIT] indicator  
A/B  
A=B  
• The quick split function is much more convenient for se-  
lecting the transmit frequency. See the next section for  
details.  
• The equalized transmit frequency and “  
on the LCD.  
” appear  
SPLIT  
• [SPLIT] indicator lights.  
• “TX” appears to show the transmit frequency readout.  
eSet the transmit frequency to 21.310 MHz in the fol-  
lowing way.  
SPLIT  
Main dial  
XFC  
➥ Rotate the main dial while pushing [XFC].  
• The transmit frequency can be monitored while push-  
ing [XFC].  
• When the split function ON  
rNow you can receive on 21.290 MHz and transmit  
on 21.310 MHz.  
To change the transmit and receive frequencies, push  
A/B to exchange the main and sub readouts.  
• When [XFC] is pushed  
✔ CONVENIENT  
• Direct shift frequency input  
The shift frequency can be entered directly.  
F-INP  
qPush  
.
ENT  
wEnter the desired shift frequency with the digit keys.  
• 1 kHz to 1 MHz can be set.  
• When you require a negative shift direction, push  
GENE  
in advance.  
•
ePush SPLIT .  
• The split frequency operation is ready  
• The shift frequency is input in the sub readout and the  
split function is turned ON.  
[Example]  
To transmit on 1 kHz higher frequency:  
F-INP  
1.8  
- Push  
,
then SPLIT .  
ENT  
1
To transmit on 3 kHz lower frequency:  
F-INP  
GENE  
7
- Push  
,
,
then SPLIT .  
ENT  
3
•
• Split lock function  
Accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotating the main  
dial changes the receive frequency. To prevent this,  
use both the split lock and dial lock functions to change  
the transmit frequency only. The split lock function can-  
cels the dial lock function while pushing [XFC] during  
split frequency operation.  
The dial lock’s effect during split frequency operation  
can be selected in the set mode for both receive and  
transmit frequencies; or only the receive frequency.  
(p. 12-13)  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT  
6
■ Quick split function  
When you find a DX station, an important considera-  
tion is how to set the split frequency.  
When you push and hold the SPLIT switch for 1 sec.,  
split frequency operation is turned ON and the trans-  
mit frequency is equalized to the received frequency.  
This shortens the time needed to begin split frequency  
operation.  
The quick split function is ON by default. For your con-  
venience, it can be turned OFF in Others set mode.  
(p. 12-12) In this case, the SPLIT switch does not  
equalize the transmit frequency to the receive fre-  
quency.  
qSuppose you are operating at 21.290 MHz (USB) in  
VFO mode.  
[SPLIT] indicator  
wPush and hold SPLIT for 1 sec.  
• Split frequency operation is turned ON.  
• The transmit frequency (unselected VFO’s readout) is  
equalized to the receive frequency (selected VFO’s read-  
out).  
• “  
” indicator appears.  
F-INP  
eEnter the desired offset frequency from the keypad  
then push SPLIT , or set the transmit frequency  
SPLIT  
Main dial  
with the main dial while pushing [XFC].  
XFC  
F-INP  
• “  
” indicator appears when  
is pushed.  
ENT  
F-INP  
• Offset frequency setting with the keypad— example  
To transmit on 1 kHz higher frequency:  
F-INP  
1.8  
- Push  
,
then SPLIT .  
ENT  
1
To transmit on 3 kHz lower frequency:  
F-INP  
GENE  
7
- Push  
,
,
then SPLIT .  
ENT  
3
•
D
Split lock function  
The split lock function is convenient for changing only  
the transmit frequency. When the split lock function is  
not used, accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotating  
the main dial, changes the receive frequency. The split  
lock function is ON by default, but can be turned OFF  
in set mode. (p. 12-13)  
qWhile split frequency operation is ON, push [LOCK]  
to activate the split lock function.  
[LOCK] indicator  
wWhile pushing [XFC], rotate the main dial to change  
the transmit frequency.  
• If you accidentally release [XFC] while rotating the main  
dial, the receive frequency does NOT change.  
LOCK  
Main dial  
XFC  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS  
Section 7  
■ About digital voice recorder …………………………………………… 7-2  
■ Recording a received audio …………………………………………… 7-3  
D Basic recording ……………………………………………………… 7-3  
D One-touch recording ………………………………………………… 7-3  
■ Playing the recorded audio …………………………………………… 7-4  
D Basic playing ………………………………………………………… 7-4  
D One-touch playing …………………………………………………… 7-4  
■ Protect the recorded contents ………………………………………… 7-5  
■ Erasing the recorded contents ………………………………………… 7-5  
■ Recording a message for transmit …………………………………… 7-6  
D Recording …………………………………………………………… 7-6  
D Confirming a message for transmit ………………………………… 7-6  
■ Programming a memory name ……………………………………… 7-7  
■ Sending a recorded message ………………………………………… 7-8  
D Transmit level setting ……………………………………………… 7-8  
■ Voice set mode ………………………………………………………… 7-9  
■ Saving a voice message into the USB-Memory …………………… 7-10  
D Saving the received audio memory ……………………………… 7-10  
D Saving the TX memory …………………………………………… 7-10  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS  
■ About digital voice recorder  
The IC-7700 has digital voice memories, up to 4 mes-  
sages for transmit, and up to 20 messages for receive.  
A maximum message length of 30 sec. can be  
recorded into receive memory (total message length  
for all channels of up to 209 sec.) and a total message  
length of up to 99 sec. can be recorded in transmit  
memory.  
The transmit memory is very convenient for repeated  
CQ and exchange transmissions in contests, as well  
as when making consecutive calls to DXpeditions.  
qSelect any mode.  
wPush [F-2•VOICE] to display voice recorder screen.  
ePush EXIT/SET to display voice recorder menu.  
rPush [F-1•PLAY] or [F-2•MIC REC] to select the de-  
sired memory channel screen, then record audio or  
playback the contents as described below.  
tPush EXIT/SET twice to exit voice recorder screen.  
F-1  
F-2  
REC  
PLAY  
EXIT/SET  
• Example— When [REC] is pushed and held for 1sec.  
REC  
REC  
REC  
REC  
Push and hold  
for 1 sec. Push  
momentarily Push and hold  
for 1 sec.  
Push  
momentarily  
(starts recording)  
(stops recording)  
(starts recording)  
(stops recording)  
20 sec.  
30 sec.  
momentarily after passing 30  
REC  
REC  
Push  
momentarily within 30 sec. after  
These contents Push  
pushing and holding  
the all contents.  
REC  
for 1 sec., records  
won’t be recorded. sec. from pushing and holding for  
REC  
1 sec., records the 30 sec. before can-  
celing the record.  
• Example— When [REC] is pushed momentarily  
REC  
REC  
Push  
momentarily Push  
momentarily  
(starts recording)  
(starts recording)  
NOTE: The contents will be recorded into an independent memory  
channels automatically.  
REC  
When  
is pushed momentarily again within 15 sec.*  
15 sec. 3 sec.  
(default)  
momentarily re-  
REC  
from the last  
operation, all the contents between  
REC  
operations will be recorded.  
REC  
Push  
cords the contents of the  
previous 15 sec.*  
*The recording time period can be changed with “Normal Rec Time” in voice set mode (p. 7-9).  
• Playing back the all contents in a channel  
• Playing back the end of 5 sec.* in a channel  
PLAY  
Push  
momentarily.  
F-2  
PLAY  
Push  
momentarily.  
PLAY  
Or, push and hold  
for 1 sec.  
30 sec. (max.)  
Not playing back  
Play back (5 sec.; default)  
*The playing back time period can be changed with  
“Short Play Time” in voice set mode (p. 7-9).  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS  
7
■ Recording a received audio  
Up to 20 receive voice memories are available in the  
IC-7700. A total audio length of up to 209 sec. can be  
recorded in receive messages. However, the maximum  
recordable length into a single message is 30 sec.  
This voice recorder records not only the received  
audio, but also the information such as set operating  
frequency, mode, and the recording time for your fu-  
ture reference.  
D
Basic recording  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
wSelect the desired mode.  
ePush [F-2•VOICE] to call up the voice recorder  
screen.  
• Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is dis-  
played. If the TX memory channel (T1–T4) appears,  
push [F-7•T/R] to select RX memory channel.  
rPush and hold REC for 1 sec. to start recording.  
• The operating frequency, mode and current time are pro-  
grammed as the memory names automatically.  
tPush REC momentarily to stop recording.  
VOICE  
F-2  
REC  
EXIT/SET  
T/R  
F-7  
IMPORTANT!  
Push REC to stop recording before, or when  
30 sec. has passed from the start of recording.  
The voice recorder memory records the 30 sec.  
(max.) of audio before REC is pushed.  
For example, when recording 40 sec. of audio,  
the first 10 sec. audio will be over-written with the  
last 10 sec., so that the total of audio recorded is  
only 30 sec.  
When you record the 21st audio message, or  
when the total audio length exceeds 209 sec., the  
oldest recorded audio is automatically erased to  
make room for the new audio.  
yPush EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder  
screen.  
NOTE: When transmit (or [PTT] is pushed) while  
recording, no audio will be recorded.  
D
One-touch recording  
To record the received signal immediately, one-touch  
voice recording is available.  
➥ Push REC momentarily to record the previous  
15 sec. audio.  
• The recordable time period can be set in voice set mode.  
(p. 7-9)  
REC  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS  
■ Playing the recorded audio  
D
Basic playing  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
wPush [F-2•VOICE] to call up the voice recorder  
screen.  
• Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is dis-  
played. If the TX memory message (T1–T4) appears,  
push [F-7•T/R] to select RX memory message.  
ePush [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired voice  
memory to playback.  
∫
√
PLAY  
F-3  
F-1  
F-2  
rPush [F-3•PLAY] to start playback.  
• “  
” indicators appear and the timer counts down.  
≈PLAY  
Appears  
tPush [F-3•PLAY] again to stop playback if desired.  
• Playback is terminated automatically when all of the  
recorded contents in the message are played, or after  
30 sec.  
yPush EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder  
screen.  
Appears  
Counts down  
D
One-touch playing  
The previously recorded audio in message 1 can be  
played back without selecting voice recorder screen.  
➥ Push PLAY momentarily to play back the last 5 sec.  
of the previously recorded audio.  
• “  
” indicator appears.  
≈PLAY  
• Playback is terminated automatically when all of the  
recorded contents in the message are played, or after  
5 sec.  
• The playback time period can be set in voice set mode.  
(p. 7-9)  
PLAY  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS  
7
■ Protect the recorded contents  
The protect function is available to protect the recorded  
contents from accidental erasure, such as over-writing,  
etc.  
qCall up the voice recorder screen, RX memory.  
wPush [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired voice  
message.  
ePush [F-4•PROTECT] to turn the protect function  
ON and OFF.  
• “ ” indicator appears when the contents is protected.  
rPush EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder  
screen.  
∫
√
PROTECT  
F-4  
F-1  
F-2  
■ Erasing the recorded contents  
The recorded contents can be erased independently  
by message.  
qCall up the voice recorder screen, RX memory.  
wPush [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired voice  
message to be erased.  
ePush and hold [F-5•CLR] for 1 sec. to erase the con-  
tents.  
• Push [F-4•PROTECT] to release the protection in ad-  
vance if necessary.  
rPush EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder  
screen.  
∫
√
CLR  
F-5  
F-1  
F-2  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS  
■ Recording a message for transmit  
To transmit a message using the voice recorder, record  
the desired message in advance as described below.  
The IC-7700 has digital voice memories for transmis-  
sion, up to 4 messages and a total message length of  
up to 99 sec. can be recorded.  
D
Recording  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
wPush [F-2•VOICE] to call up the voice recorder  
screen.  
ePush EXIT/SET to select voice recorder menu.  
rPush [F-2•MIC REC] to select the voice mic. record  
screen.  
tPush [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired mes-  
∫
√
REC  
F-4  
sage.  
F-1  
F-2  
yPush and hold [F-4•REC] for 1 sec. to start record-  
ing.  
• “  
” indicator appears.  
●REC  
• Speak into the microphone without pushing [PTT].  
• Previously recorded contents are cleared.  
• Audio output from the internal speaker is automatically  
muted.  
uWhile speaking into the microphone with your nor-  
mal voice level, adjust the [MIC] control so that the  
[MIC-REC LEVEL] indicator reads within 100%.  
iPush [F-4•REC] momentarily to stop recording.  
• The recording is terminated automatically when the re-  
maining time becomes 0 sec.  
Appears  
Adjust [MIC] control so that this  
indicator reads within 100%.  
oPush EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder  
screen.  
D
Confirming a message for transmit  
qPerform the steps q to r as “D Recording” above.  
wPush [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired mes-  
sage.  
ePush [F-3•PLAY] to playback the recorded contents.  
• “  
” indicator appears.  
≈PLAY  
rPush [F-3•PLAY] again to stop playback.  
• Playback is terminated automatically when all of the  
recorded contents in the message are played.  
tPush EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder  
screen.  
∫
√
PLAY  
F-3  
F-1  
F-2  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS  
7
■ Programming a memory name  
Memory messages can be tagged with alphanumeric  
names of up to 20 characters each.  
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols  
~
(! # $ % & ¥ ? “ ‘ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ @)  
and spaces can be used. (See the table below.)  
qRecord a message as described in page 7-6.  
wDuring the voice mic. record screen indication, push  
[F-5•NAME] to enter memory name edit condition.  
• A cursor appears and blinks.  
DEL  
Keypad  
123 Symbol  
ABC abc  
F-3  
/
/
ePush [F-7•T1..T4] several times to select the desired  
voice message.  
rInput the desired character by rotating the main dial  
or by pushing the band key for number input.  
• Push [ABC] (MF6) or [abc] (MF6) to toggle capital and  
small letters.  
• Push [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to toggle numerals  
and symbols.  
Ω
≈
SPACE  
F-4  
T1..T4  
F-7  
F-1  
F-2  
• Push [F-1•Ω] or [F-2•≈] for cursor movement.  
• Push [F-3•DEL] to delete the selected character.  
• Push [F-4•SPACE] to input a space.  
• Pushing the transceiver’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter  
numerals.  
tPush EXIT/SET to input and set the name.  
• The cursor disappears.  
yRepeat steps e to t to program another voice  
message’s name, if desired.  
uPush EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder  
screen.  
• Voice memory name editing example  
• Usable characters  
Key selection  
Editable characters  
A to Z (capital letters)  
ABC  
a to z (small letters)  
0 to 9 (numbers)  
abc  
123  
! # $ % & ¥ ? “ ‘ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; =  
Symbol  
~
< > ( ) [ ] { } | _  
@
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS  
■ Sending a recorded message  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
wSelect a phone mode by pushing SSB or AM/FM .  
ePush [F-2•VOICE] to call up the voice recorder  
screen.  
• If the receive voice message appears, push [F-7•T/R] to  
select TX message (T1–T4).  
rPush the desired message switch, [F-1•T1] to  
[F-4•T4], momentarily to transmit the contents.  
• The transceiver transmits automatically.  
EXIT/SET  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
T/R  
F-7  
F-1  
F-2  
F-3  
F-4  
• “  
” indicator appears and the memory timer  
SEND  
counts down.  
• You hear the transmitted message from the speaker as  
the default. This can be turned OFF in voice set mode.  
(p. 7-9)  
tPush the selected message switch, [F-1•T1] to  
[F-4•T4], again to stop, if desired.  
• The transceiver returns to receive automatically when all  
of the recorded contents in the message are transmit-  
ted.  
yPush EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice memory  
screen.  
✔ For your information  
Counts down  
Appears  
When an external keypad is connected to [EXT KEY-  
PAD], the recorded message, T1–T4, can be transmit-  
ted without opening the voice recorder screen.  
See page 2-7 for details.  
D
Transmit level setting  
qCall up the voice recorder screen as described as  
above.  
wPush [F-6•TX LEV.] to select the voice memory  
transmit level set condition.  
DEF  
F-7  
ePush the desired message switch, [F-1•T1] to  
[F-4•T4], momentarily to transmit the contents.  
• The transceiver transmits automatically.  
• “  
” indicator appears and the memory timer  
SEND  
counts down.  
rRotate the main dial to adjust the transmit voice  
level.  
EXIT/SET  
TX LEV.  
F-6  
Main dial  
• Push and hold [F-7•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default  
condition.  
tPush EXIT/SET to return to the voice recorder  
screen.  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS  
7
■ Voice set mode  
Sets the automatic monitor function, short play and  
normal recording times for voice recorder.  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
wPush [F-2•VOICE] to call up the voice recorder  
screen.  
ePush EXIT/SET to select voice recorder menu.  
rPush [F-7•SET] to select voice set mode screen.  
tPush [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item.  
yRotate the main dial to set the desired condition or  
value.  
EXIT/SET  
∫
√
DEF  
F-4  
Main dial  
F-1  
F-2  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default  
condition or value.  
uPush EXIT/SET to exit the voice set mode screen.  
Auto Monitor  
ON  
Turn the automatic monitor function for recorded  
audio contents transmission.  
• ON : Monitors transmitting audio automatically  
when sending a recorded audio.  
• OFF : Monitors transmitting audio only when the  
monitor function is in use.  
Short Play Time  
5s  
Set the desired time period for the one-touch playing  
(when PLAY is pushed momentarily).  
• 3 to 10 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be set.  
(default: 5 sec.)  
Normal Rec Time  
15s  
Set the desired time period for the for one-touch  
recording (when REC is pushed momentarily).  
• 5 to 15 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be set.  
(default: 15 sec.)  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS  
■ Saving a voice message into the USB-Memory  
D
Saving the received audio memory  
The recorded RX memory contents can be saved into  
the USB-Memory.  
The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom.  
q During voice recorder RX memory screen display,  
push [F-6•SAVE] to select voice file save screen.  
• Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is dis-  
played. If the TX message (T1–T4) appears, push  
[F-7•T/R] to select RX message.  
SAVE  
F-6  
WIDE  
F-7  
wChange the following conditions if desired.  
• File name:  
z Push [F-4•EDIT] to select file name edit con-  
dition.  
• Push [F-1• DIR/FILE] several times to select the  
file name, if necessary.  
EXIT/SET  
EDIT  
F-4  
DIR/FILE  
F-1  
Main dial  
x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol]  
(MF7) to select the character group, then ro-  
tate the main dial to select the character.  
• [ABC] (MF6) : A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7): 0  
to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^ + –  
• Voice recorder RX memory screen  
• Voice file save screen— file name edit  
• While saving  
~
= ( ) [ ] { } _ @ can be selected.  
• Push [F-1•Ω] to move the cursor left, push [F-2•≈]  
to move the cursor right, push [F-3•DEL] to delete  
a character and push [F-4•SPACE] to insert a  
space.  
c Push EXIT/SET to set the file name.  
• Saving location  
z Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view  
screen.  
x Select the desired directory or folder in the  
USB-Memory.  
• Push [F-4•Ω ≈] to select the upper directory.  
• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select folder in the  
same directory.  
• Push and hold [F-4•Ω ≈] for 1 sec. to select a  
folder in the directory.  
• Push [F-5•REN/DEL] to rename the folder.  
• Push and hold [F-5•REN/DEL] for 1 sec. to delete  
the folder.  
• Push and hold [F-6•MAKE] for 1 sec. to making a  
new folder. (Edit the name with the same manner  
as the “• File name” above.)  
c Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] twice to select the file  
name.  
e Push [F-6•SAVE].  
• After the saving is completed, return to voice recorder  
RX memory screen automatically.  
D
Saving the TX memory  
The TX memory contents can also be saved into the  
USB-Memory. However, the contents are saved with  
the message list, set mode conditions, etc. at the same  
time. See page 12-22 for details.  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMORY OPERATION  
Section 8  
■ Memory channels ……………………………………………………… 8-2  
■ Memory channel selection …………………………………………… 8-2  
D Using the  
/
keys ………………………………………… 8-2  
∫
√
D Using the keypad …………………………………………………… 8-2  
■ Memory channel programming ……………………………………… 8-3  
D Programming in VFO mode ………………………………………… 8-3  
D Programming in memory mode …………………………………… 8-3  
■ Frequency transferring ………………………………………………… 8-4  
D Transferring in VFO mode ………………………………………… 8-4  
D Transferring in memory mode ……………………………………… 8-4  
■ Memory list screen ……………………………………………………… 8-5  
D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen …… 8-5  
D Confirming programmed memory channels ……………………… 8-5  
■ Memory names ………………………………………………………… 8-6  
D Editing (programming) memory names …………………………… 8-6  
■ Memory clearing ………………………………………………………… 8-6  
■ Memo pads ……………………………………………………………… 8-7  
D Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads …… 8-7  
D Calling up a frequency from a memo pad ………………………… 8-7  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
MEMORY OPERATION  
■ Memory channels  
The transceiver has 101 memory channels. Memory  
mode is very useful for quickly changing to often-used  
frequencies.  
All 101 memory channels are tunable which means the  
programmed frequency can be tuned temporarily with  
the main dial, etc. in memory mode.  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
TRANSFER  
TO VFO  
OVER-  
CHANNEL  
CAPABILITY  
CLEAR  
Yes  
CHANNEL  
WRITING  
NUMBER  
Regular memory  
1–99  
One frequency and one mode  
in each memory channel.  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
channels  
Scan edge  
One frequency and one mode in  
each memory channel as scan  
edges for programmed scan.  
memory  
P1, P2  
No  
channels  
■ Memory channel selection  
D
Using the ∫ /  
keys  
√
qPush V/M to select memory mode.  
wPush several times to select the de-  
sired memory channel.  
/
∫
√
• Push and hold  
/
for continuous selection.  
∫
√
• [UP] and [DN] on the microphone can also be used.  
eTo return to VFO mode, push V/M again.  
Y
Z
V/M  
D
Using the keypad  
qPush V/M to select memory mode.  
F-IMP  
Keypad  
ENT  
F-INP  
wPush  
.
ENT  
ePush the desired memory channel number using the  
keypad.  
• Enter 100 or 101 to select scan edge channel P1 or P2,  
respectively.  
rPush  
channel.  
or  
to select the desired memory  
∫
√
[EXAMPLE]  
Y
Z
V/M  
To select the memory channel 3;  
F-INP  
7
- Push  
,
, then push  
or  
.
∫
ENT  
√
3
To select the memory channel 12;  
F-INP  
1.8  
3.5  
- Push  
,
,
, then push  
or  
∫
ENT  
1
2
.
√
To select the scan edge channel P1;  
F-INP  
1.8  
50  
50  
- Push  
,
.
,
,
, then push  
, then push  
ENT  
1
0
0
1
or  
∫
√
To select the scan edge channel P2;  
F-INP  
1.8  
50  
1.8  
- Push  
,
,
,
ENT  
1
0
or  
.
∫
√
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMORY OPERATION  
8
■ Memory channel programming  
Memory channel programming can be preformed ei-  
ther in VFO mode or in memory mode.  
D
Programming in VFO mode  
qSet the desired frequency, operating mode and fil-  
ter width in VFO mode.  
wPush  
/
several times to select the de-  
∫
√
sired memory channel.  
• Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the de-  
sired channel.  
• Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-  
nel readout (below the frequency readout).  
• “--.---.--” appears if the selected memory channel is a  
blank channel (and does not have contents).  
ePush and hold MW for 1 sec. to program the  
displayed frequency, operating mode, etc., into the  
memory channel.  
Y
Z
MW  
[EXAMPLE]:  
Programming 7.088 MHz/LSB into memory channel 12.  
SSB  
or  
Beep  
Beep  
MW  
Push for 1 sec.  
Beep  
D
Programming in memory mode  
[EXAMPLE]:  
qSelect the desired memory channel with  
in memory mode.  
/
∫
Programming 21.280 MHz/USB into memory channel 18.  
√
• Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-  
nel readout (below the frequency readout).  
• “--.---.--” appears if the selected memory channel is a  
blank channel (and does not have contents).  
wSet the desired frequency and operating mode in  
memory mode.  
21  
SSB  
or  
then  
7
• To program a blank channel, use direct frequency entry  
with the keypad or memo pads, etc.  
Beep  
Beep  
Beep  
ePush and hold MW for 1 sec. to program the  
displayed frequency and operating mode into the  
memory channel.  
MW  
Push for 1 sec.  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
MEMORY OPERATION  
■ Frequency transferring  
The frequency and operating mode in a memory chan-  
nel can be transferred to the VFO. Frequency transfer-  
ring can be performed in either VFO mode or memory  
mode.  
D
Transferring in VFO mode  
This is useful for transferring programmed contents to  
a VFO.  
TRANSFERRING EXAMPLE IN VFO MODE  
Operating frequency : 21.320 MHz/USB (VFO)  
Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW  
qSelect VFO mode with V/M  
.
wSelect the memory channel to be transferred with  
/
.
∫
√
• Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the de-  
sired channel.  
or  
• Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-  
nel readout (below the frequency readout).  
• “--.---.--” appears if the selected memory channel is a  
blank channel. In this case transferring is not possible.  
ePush and hold V/M for 1 sec. to transfer the fre-  
quency and operating mode.  
Beep  
Beep  
Beep  
V/M  
Push for 1 sec.  
• Transferred frequency and operating mode appear on  
the frequency readout.  
D
Transferring in memory mode  
This is useful for transferring frequency and operating  
mode while operating in memory mode.  
When you have changed the frequency or operat-  
ing mode in the selected memory channel:  
• Displayed frequency, mode and filter setting are  
transferred.  
• Programmed frequency and mode in the memory  
channel are not transferred, and they remain in the  
memory channel.  
TRANSFERRING EXAMPLE IN MEMORY MODE  
Operating frequency : 21.320 MHz/USB (M-ch 16)  
Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW  
qSelect the memory channel to be transferred with  
/
in memory mode.  
∫
√
• And, set the frequency or operating mode if required.  
wPush and hold V/M for 1 sec. to transfer the fre-  
quency and operating mode.  
• Displayed frequency and operating mode are transferred  
to the VFO.  
Beep  
Beep  
Beep  
V/M  
Push for 1 sec.  
eTo return to VFO mode, push V/M momentarily.  
Programmed contents appear.  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMORY OPERATION  
8
■ Memory list screen  
The memory list screen simultaneously shows 9 mem-  
ory channels and their programmed contents. 15 mem-  
ory channels can be displayed in the wide memory list  
screen.  
You can select a desired memory channel from the  
memory list screen.  
D
Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
Z
Y
wPush [F-4•MEMORY] to select memory list screen.  
• [F-7•WIDE] switches the standard and wide screens.  
eWhile pushing and holding [F-1•ROLL], rotate the  
main dial to select the desired memory channel.  
•
and  
can also be used.  
∫
√
rPush EXIT/SET to exit memory list screen.  
EXIT/SET  
ROLL MEMORY WIDE  
Main dial  
F-1  
F-4  
F-7  
• Memory list screen  
D
Confirming programmed memory channels  
qSelect memory list screen as described above.  
wWhile pushing [F-1•ROLL], rotate the main dial to  
scroll the screen.  
ePush [F-2•SET] to select the highlighted memory  
channel, if desired.  
• “≈” appears beside the selected memory channel num-  
ber in the memory list screen and the selected memory  
channel contents are displayed below the frequency  
readout.  
EXIT/SET  
ROLL  
F-1  
SET  
F-2  
Main dial  
rPush EXIT/SET to exit memory list screen.  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
MEMORY OPERATION  
■ Memory names  
All memory channels (including scan edges) can be  
tagged with alphanumeric names of up to 10 charac-  
ters each.  
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols  
~
(! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ @)  
and spaces can be used.  
D
Editing (programming) memory names  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
DEL  
Keypad  
123 Symbol  
ABC abc  
F-3  
/
/
wPush [F-4•MEMORY] to select memory list screen.  
eSelect the desired memory channel.  
rPush [F-4•NAME] to edit memory channel name.  
• A cursor appears and blinks.  
• Memory channel names of blank channels cannot be  
edited.  
tInput the desired character by rotating the main dial  
or by pushing the keypad for number input.  
• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters.  
• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and symbols.  
• Push [F-1•Ω] or [F-2•≈] for cursor movement.  
• Push [F-3•DEL] to delete the selected character.  
• Push [F-4•SPACE] to input a space.  
Ω
≈
SPACE  
F-4  
F-1  
F-2  
• Pushing the transceiver’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter  
numerals.  
yPush EXIT/SET to input and set the name.  
• The cursor disappears.  
uRepeat steps e to y to program another memory  
channel’s name, if desired.  
iPush EXIT/SET to exit memory list screen.  
■ Memory clearing  
Any unused memory channels can be cleared. The  
cleared memory channels become blank channels.  
qSelect memory mode with V/M  
wPush [F-4•MEMORY] to select memory list screen.  
eSelect the desired memory channel with  
.
/
.
∫
√
rPush and hold [F-5•CLR] for 1 sec. to clear the con-  
tents.  
• The programmed frequency and operating mode disap-  
pear.  
tTo clear other memory channels, repeat steps e  
and r.  
CLR  
F-5  
Beep  
Beep  
Beep  
F-5  
(CLR)  
Push for 1 sec.  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMORY OPERATION  
8
■ Memo pads  
The transceiver has a memo pad function to store fre-  
quency and operating mode for easy write and recall.  
The memo pads are separate from memory channels.  
The default number of memo pads is 5, however, this  
can be increased to 10 in set mode if desired.  
(p. 12-15)  
Memo pads are convenient when you want to memo-  
rize a frequency and operating mode temporarily, such  
as when you find a DX station in a pile-up, or when a  
desired station is busy for a long time and you want to  
temporarily search for other stations.  
MP-W  
MP-R  
Use the transceiver’s memo pads instead of relying on  
hastily scribbled notes that are easily misplaced.  
D
Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads  
You can store the readout frequency and operating  
mode by pushing MP-W .  
MP-W  
When you store a 6th frequency and operating mode,  
the oldest stored frequency and operating mode are  
automatically erased to make room for the new set-  
tings.  
Newest  
Oldest  
Each memo pad must have its own unique combi-  
nation of frequency and operating mode; memo  
pads having identical settings cannot be written.  
Erased  
In this example, 21.276 MHz (USB) will be  
erased when 7.067 MHz (LSB) is written.  
D
Calling up a frequency from a memo pad  
You can call up the desired frequency and operating  
mode of a memo pad by pushing MP-R several  
times.  
MP-R  
• Both VFO and memory modes can be used.  
• The frequency and operating mode are called up, starting  
from the most recently written.  
Newest  
When you call up a frequency and an operating mode  
from memo pads with MP-R , the previously dis-  
played frequency and operating mode are automati-  
cally stored in a temporary pad. The frequency and op-  
erating mode in the temporary pad can be recalled by  
pushing MP-R several times.  
• You may think there are 6 memo pads because 6 different  
frequencies (5 are in memo pads and 1 is in the temporary  
pad) are called up by MP-R .  
MP-R  
Oldest  
MEMO PADS  
If you change the frequency or operating mode  
called up from a memo pad with the main dial, etc.,  
the frequency and operating mode in the temporary  
pad are erased.  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCANS  
Section 9  
■ Scan types ……………………………………………………………… 9-2  
■ Preparation ……………………………………………………………… 9-2  
■ Voice squelch control function ………………………………………… 9-3  
■ Scan set mode ………………………………………………………… 9-3  
■ Programmed scan operation ………………………………………… 9-4  
■ ∂F scan operation ……………………………………………………… 9-4  
■ Fine programmed scan/Fine ∂F scan ……………………………… 9-5  
■ Memory scan operation ………………………………………………… 9-6  
■ Select memory scan operation ……………………………………… 9-6  
■ Setting select memory channels ……………………………………… 9-7  
D Setting in scan screen ……………………………………………… 9-7  
D Setting in memory list screen ……………………………………… 9-7  
D Erasing the select scan setting …………………………………… 9-7  
■ Tone scan ……………………………………………………………… 9-8  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
SCANS  
■ Scan types  
• The scan function can be used on the main read-  
out only.  
• You can operate a scan while operating on a fre-  
quency using the split functions.  
PROGRAMMED SCAN  
∂F SCAN  
Repeatedly scans between two scan edge frequencies  
(scan edge memory channels P1 and P2).  
Repeatedly scans within ∂F span area.  
Start frequency  
Scan edge  
P1 or P2  
Scan edge  
P2 or P1  
–∂F frequency  
+∂F frequency  
Scan  
Scan  
Scan  
Jump  
Jump  
This scan operates in VFO mode.  
This scan operates in both VFO and memory modes.  
MEMORY SCAN  
SELECT MEMORY SCAN  
Repeatedly scans all programmed memory channels.  
Repeatedly scans all or one of 3 select memory channels.  
Blank channel  
Blank channel  
Mch 2  
★2  
Mch 3  
★1  
Mch 2  
★2  
Mch 3  
★1  
Mch 4  
Mch 4  
*“★1,” “★2” and “★3” show that the channel  
is specified as the select memory.  
*“★1,” “★2” and “★3” show that the channel  
is specified as the select memory.  
Mch 1  
★1  
Mch 5  
★1  
Mch 1  
★1  
Mch 5  
★1  
Mch 99  
★1  
Mch 7  
★1  
Mch 6  
★3  
Mch 99  
★1  
Mch 7  
★1  
Mch 6  
★3  
This scan operates in memory mode.  
This scan operates in memory mode.  
■ Preparation  
• Channels  
• Scan speed  
Scan speed can be selected from 2 levels, high or low,  
in scan set mode. See p. 9-3 for details.  
For programmed scan:  
Program scan edge frequencies into scan edge mem-  
ory channels P1 and P2.  
• Squelch condition  
For ∂F scan:  
Set the ∂F span (∂F scan range) in the scan screen.  
SCAN  
STARTS  
WITH  
PROGRAMMED  
MEMORY SCAN  
For memory scan:  
Program 2 or more memory channels except scan  
edge memory channels.  
SCAN  
The scan continues Scan pauses on  
until it is stopped each channel when  
manually, and does the scan resume is  
not pause even if it ON; not applicable  
For select memory scan:  
SQUELCH  
OPEN  
Designate 2 or more memory channels as select mem-  
ory channels. To designate the channel as a select  
memory channel, choose a memory channel, then  
push [F-3•SELECT] in the scan screen (memory  
mode) or in the memory list screen.  
detects signals.  
when OFF.  
Scan stops when detecting a signal.  
If you set scan resume ON in set mode, the  
scan pauses for 10 sec. when detecting a  
signal, then resumes. When a signal disap-  
pears while scan is paused, scan resumes  
2 sec. later.  
SQUELCH  
CLOSED  
• Scan resume ON/OFF  
You can select the scan to resume or cancel when de-  
tecting a signal in set mode. Scan resume ON/OFF  
must be set before operating a scan. See p. 9-3 for  
ON/OFF setting and scan resume condition details.  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCANS  
9
■ Voice squelch control function  
This function is useful when you don’t want unmodu-  
lated signals pausing or cancelling a scan. When the  
voice squelch control function is activated, the trans-  
ceiver checks received signals for voice components.  
If a received signal includes voice components, and  
the tone of the voice components changes within  
1 sec., scan pauses (or stops). If the received signal  
includes no voice components or the tone of the voice  
components does not change within 1 sec., scan re-  
sumes.  
➥ While a phone mode (SSB, AM or FM) is selected,  
push [VSC] (MF7) to switch the VSC (Voice Squelch  
Control) function ON and OFF.  
VSC  
• “VSC” appears when the function is activated.  
• The VSC function activates for any scan.  
• The VSC function resumes the scan on unmodu-  
lated signals, regardless of whether the scan re-  
sume condition is set to ON or OFF.  
■ Scan set mode  
When the squelch is open, scan continues until it is  
stopped manually— it does not pause on detected sig-  
nals. When squelch is closed, scan stops when de-  
tecting a signal, then resumes according to the scan  
resume condition. Scan speed and the scan resume  
condition can be set using the scan set mode.  
qPush [F-5•SCAN] to select scan screen.  
wPush [F-7•SET] to select scan set mode.  
ePush [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item.  
rRotate the main dial to select the desired condition.  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default  
setting.  
EXIT/SET  
∫
√
DEF  
F-4  
Main dial  
F-1  
F-2  
tPush EXIT/SET to return to scan menu.  
Scan Speed  
HIGH  
Select the desired scan speed from high and low.  
• HIGH : scan is faster  
• LOW : scan is slower  
Scan Resume  
ON  
Set the scan resume function ON and OFF.  
• ON : When detecting a signal, scan pauses for  
10 sec., then resumes. When a signal disap-  
pears, scan resumes 2 sec. later.  
• OFF : When detecting a signal, cancels scanning.  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
SCANS  
■ Programmed scan operation  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
wSelect VFO mode.  
eSelect the desired operating mode.  
• The operating mode can also be changed while scan-  
ning.  
rPush [F-5•SCAN] to select the scan screen.  
tSet [SQL] open or closed.  
• See page 9-2 for squelch condition.  
yPush [F-1•PROG] to start the programmed scan.  
EXIT/SET  
PROG  
F-1  
[SQL]  
Main dial  
• “  
” and decimal points blink while  
PROGRAM SCAN  
scanning.  
uWhen the scan detects a signal, scan stops, pauses  
or ignores it depending on the resume setting and  
the squelch condition.  
iTo cancel the scan, push [F-1•PROG].  
• Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.  
oPush and hold [F-6•RECALL] for 1 sec. to recall the  
frequency that is set before starting the scan, if de-  
sired.  
If the same frequencies are programmed into the  
scan edge memory channel P1 and P2, pro-  
grammed scan will not start.  
∂
■ F scan operation  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
wSelect VFO mode or a memory channel.  
eSelect the desired operating mode.  
• The operating mode can also be changed while scan-  
ning.  
rPush [F-5•SCAN] to select the scan screen.  
tSet the main band’s [SQL] open or closed.  
• See page 9-2 for squelch condition.  
EXIT/SET  
∂F  
∂F SCAN  
[SQL]  
Main dial  
F-2  
F-4  
ySet the ∂F span by pushing [F-4•∂F SPAN].  
• ±5 kHz, ±10 kHz, ±20 kHz, ±50 kHz, ±100 kHz,  
±500 kHz and ±1000 kHz are selectable.  
uSet center frequency of the ∂F span.  
iPush [F-2•∂F] to start the ∂F scan.  
• “  
” and decimal points blink while scanning.  
:F SCAN  
oWhen the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,  
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-  
ting and the squelch condition.  
!To cancel the scan, push [F-2•∂F].  
• Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.  
!Push and hold [F-6•RECALL] for 1 sec. to recall the  
frequency that was set before starting the scan.  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCANS  
9
■ Fine programmed scan/Fine ∂F scan  
In fine scan (programmed or ∂F), the scan speed de-  
creases when the squelch opens, but the transceiver  
keeps scanning. The scanning tuning step shifts from  
50 Hz to 10 Hz when the squelch opens.  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
wPush [F-5•SCAN] to select the scan screen.  
eSet for programmed scan or ∂F scan as described  
on previous page.  
rPush [F-1•PROG] or [F-2•∂F] to start a scan.  
• “  
” or “  
” and decimal  
PROGRAM SCAN  
:F SCAN  
points blink while scanning.  
tPush [F-3•FINE] to start a fine scan.  
EXIT/SET  
PROG  
F-1  
∂F  
FINE  
F-3  
F-2  
• “  
” or “  
” blinks in-  
FINE PROGRAM SCAN  
FINE :F SCAN  
stead of “  
tively.  
” or “  
,” respec-  
:F SCAN  
PROGRAM SCAN  
yWhen the scan detects a signal, the scan speed de-  
creases but scan does not stop.  
uPush [F-1•PROG] or [F-2•∂F] to stop the scan; push  
[F-3•FINE] to cancel the fine scan.  
• Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.  
iPush and hold [F-6•RECALL] for 1 sec. to recall the  
frequency that is set before starting the scan, if de-  
sired.  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
SCANS  
■ Memory scan operation  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
wSelect memory mode.  
ePush [F-5•SCAN] to select the scan screen.  
rSet [SQL] open or closed.  
• See page 9-2 for squelch condition.  
tPush [F-1•MEMO] to start the memory scan.  
• “  
ning.  
” and decimal points blink while scan-  
MEMORY SCAN  
EXIT/SET  
MEMO  
F-1  
[SQL]  
Main dial  
yWhen the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,  
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-  
ting and the squelch condition.  
uTo cancel the scan, push [F-1•MEMO].  
• Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.  
2 or more memory channels must be programmed  
for memory scan to start.  
■ Select memory scan operation  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
SELECT  
SEL No.  
F-3  
F-5  
wSelect memory mode.  
ePush [F-5•SCAN] to select the scan screen.  
rSet [SQL] open or closed.  
• See page 9-2 for squelch condition.  
tPush [F-5•SEL No.] several times to select the se-  
lect scan number from ★1, ★2, ★3 and ★1/★2/★3.  
yPush [F-1•MEMO] to start the memory scan.  
• “  
” and decimal points blink while scan-  
MEMORY SCAN  
ning.  
EXIT/SET  
MEMO  
F-1  
[SQL]  
Main dial  
uPush [F-3•SELECT] to start select memory scan;  
push [F-3•SELECT] again to return to memory scan,  
if desired.  
• “  
”
blinks  
instead  
of  
SELECT MEMORY SCAN  
“
” during select memory scan.  
MEMORY SCAN  
iWhen the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,  
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-  
ting and the squelch condition.  
oTo cancel the scan, push [F-1•MEMO].  
• Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.  
2 or more memory channels must be designated as  
select memory channels, as well as the same select  
scan channel number, for select memory scan to  
start.  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCANS  
9
■ Setting select memory channels  
D
D
D
Setting in scan screen  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
wSelect memory mode.  
ePush [F-5•SCAN] to select the scan screen.  
rSelect the desired memory channel to set as a se-  
lect memory channel.  
•
/
keys and direct keypad selections can be  
∫
√
used.  
tPush [F-3•SELECT] several times to set the mem-  
ory channel as a select memory ★1, ★2, ★3 or not.  
yRepeat steps r to t to program another memory  
channel as a select memory channel.  
uPush EXIT/SET to exit the scan screen.  
Setting in memory list screen  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
wPush [F-4•MEMORY] to select memory list screen.  
eRotate the main dial while pushing [F-1•ROLL] or  
[F-2•SET] to select the desired memory channel.  
•
/
keys and direct keypad selections can be  
∫
√
used.  
rPush [F-3•SELECT] several times to set the mem-  
ory channel as a select memory ★1, ★2, ★3 or not.  
tRepeat steps e to r to program another memory  
channel as a select memory channel.  
yPush EXIT/SET to exit the memory list screen.  
Erasing the select scan setting  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
wPush [F-4•MEMORY] to select memory list screen,  
or push [F-5•SCAN] to select scan screen.  
ePush and hold [F-3•SELECT] for 1 sec. to display  
memory select all clear window.  
rPush one of the following keys to clear all select  
scan setting.  
[F-1•★1]  
[F-2•★2]  
[F-3•★3]  
: Clears all ★1 setting.  
: Clears all ★2 setting.  
: Clears all ★3 setting.  
[F-4•★1,2,3] : Clears all select setting.  
tPush EXIT/SET to exit the memory list screen.  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
SCANS  
■ Tone scan  
The transceiver can detect subaudible tones in a re-  
ceived signal. By monitoring a signal that is being  
transmitted on a repeater input frequency, you can de-  
termine the tone frequency required to access the re-  
peater.  
qSet the desired frequency or memory channel to be  
checked for a tone frequency.  
DEF  
F-4  
T-SCAN  
F-6  
TONE  
wPush AM/FM several times to select FM mode.  
ePush and hold [TONE] (MF6) for 1 sec. to enter tone  
frequency screen.  
rPush [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to check the repeater tone  
frequency or tone squelch frequency, respectively.  
tPush [F-6•T-SCAN] to start the tone scan.  
• “SCAN” blinks while scanning.  
yWhen the tone frequency is detected, the tone scan  
pauses.  
EXIT/SET  
∫
√
F-1  
F-2  
• The tone frequency is set temporarily on a memory  
channel. Program the memory channel to store the tone  
frequency permanently.  
• The decoded tone frequency is used for the repeater  
tone frequency or tone squelch frequency.  
uTo stop the scan, push [F-6•T-SCAN].  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default  
frequency.  
iPush EXIT/SET to exit tone frequency screen.  
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION  
Section 10  
■ Antenna connection and selection ………………………………… 10-2  
■ Antenna memory settings …………………………………………… 10-3  
D Antenna type selection …………………………………………… 10-3  
D Temporary memory ………………………………………………… 10-4  
D Antenna selection mode …………………………………………… 10-4  
D Receive antenna I/O setting ……………………………………… 10-5  
■ Antenna tuner operation ……………………………………………… 10-6  
D Tuner operation …………………………………………………… 10-6  
D If the tuner cannot tune the antenna …………………………… 10-7  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION  
■ Antenna connection and selection  
The IC-7700 has 4 antenna connectors for the  
ANT  
HF/50 MHz bands, [ANT1], [ANT2], [ANT3], and  
[ANT4].  
For each operating band the IC-7700 covers, there is a  
band memory which can memorize the selected an-  
tenna. When you change the operating frequency out-  
side of a band, the previously used antenna is auto-  
matically selected (see below) for the new band. This  
function allows automatic switching of 4 separate an-  
tennas for HF and 50 MHz bands operation.  
• Antenna selection mode: “Auto”  
After an antenna has been selected for use (by push-  
ing [ANT] (MF1)), the antenna is automatically selected  
whenever that band is used.  
3.5/7 MHz 21/28 MHz  
bands bands  
50 MHz  
bands  
RX  
only  
[EXAMPLE]: a 3.5/7 MHz antenna is connected to  
[ANT1], a 21/28 MHz antenna is connected to [ANT2],  
a 50 MHz antenna is connected to [ANT3]. When the  
antenna selector function is set to “Auto,” an antenna  
is automatically selected when changing bands.  
A receive-only antenna can be specified for [ANT4].  
ANT 1  
ANT 4  
ANT 2 ANT 3  
• Antenna selection mode: “Manual”  
When “Manual” is selected, you can use the all an-  
tenna connectors, [ANT1] [ANT2], [ANT3] and [ANT4],  
however, band memory does not function. In this case  
you must select an antenna manually.  
ANT  
• Antenna selection mode: “OFF”  
In this case, only [ANT1] antenna connector can be  
used. [ANT] (MF1) switch does not function.  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION 10  
■ Antenna memory settings  
This function stores the antenna connector number for  
each frequency band.  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close multi-function  
screen, if necessary.  
Band keys  
ANT  
wPush and hold [ANT] (MF1) for 1 sec. to select an-  
tenna set screen.  
eSelect the desired frequency band with a band key.  
rPush [ANT] (MF1) several times to select the desired  
antenna number that you want to set for the se-  
lected frequency band.  
• “★” appears.  
ANT MW  
F-3  
tPush and hold [F-3•ANT MW] for 1 sec. to store the  
antenna selection into the antenna memory.  
• “★” disappears.  
yRepeat the steps e to t to store the antenna se-  
lection for another frequency bands, if desired.  
uPush EXIT/SET to exit antenna set screen.  
D
Antenna type selection  
When no antenna is connected to [ANT2], [ANT3],  
and/or [ANT4], these antenna connectors can be de-  
activated — deleting the antenna number from the  
available selections. This prevents the transceiver from  
accidentally transmitting into an unused antenna con-  
nector. In addition, a receive-only antenna can be  
specified for [ANT4].  
qSelect the antenna set screen as described above.  
wPush [F-7•ANT TYPE] to select antenna type set  
screen.  
ePush [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired an-  
tenna.  
rRotate the main dial to select the desired antenna  
condition from TX/RX, RX (ANT4 only) and OFF.  
• TX/RX : Select when an antenna is connected.  
∫
√
ANT TYPE  
F-7  
• OFF  
• RX  
: Select when no antenna is connected.  
: Select when a receive only antenna is  
connected. (available for the [ANT4] only)  
F-1  
F-2  
tPush EXIT/SET to exit antenna type set screen.  
✔ For your information  
The “OFF” antennas cannot be selected with [ANT]  
(MF1) switch operation, or with the antenna memory  
setting.  
When “RX” is selected for [ANT4], “1/R,” “2/R” and  
“3/R” selections will be added for the selection for both  
[ANT] (MF1) switch operation and the antenna memory  
setting. In these selections, the antenna connected to  
[ANT1], [ANT2] and/or [ANT3] will be used for trans-  
mission and the antenna connected to [ANT4] will be  
used for reception.  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION  
■ Antenna memory settings (continued)  
D
Temporary memory  
The antenna temporary memory memorizes the man-  
ually selected antenna. The selected antenna will be  
re-called even if frequency band has been changed.  
qSelect the antenna set screen.  
wPush [F-4•TEMP-M] to turn the temporary memory  
ON and OFF.  
eSelect the desired frequency band with a band key.  
rPush [ANT] (MF1) to select the desired antenna.  
• “★” appears when a different antenna from the original is  
selected.  
tPush [F-1•ANT MR] to re-call the original antenna.  
• “★” disappears.  
yPush EXIT/SET to exit antenna set screen.  
CAUTION!: Before transmitting with the manually  
selected antenna, make sure the selected antenna  
suits the operating frequency. Otherwise the trans-  
ceiver may be damaged.  
“★” indicators appear when a different  
antenna from the original is selected.  
Push [F-4•TEMP-M] to turn the  
temporary memory ON and OFF.  
D
Antenna selection mode  
The automatic antenna selection (antenna memory)  
and the [ANT] (MF1) switch function can be deactivated  
if desired.  
qSelect the antenna set screen.  
wPush [F-6•[ANT] SW] to select the antenna selec-  
tion from Auto, OFF and Manual.  
• Auto : Use the antenna memory. Antenna selec-  
tion with [ANT] switch is also available.  
• OFF : Only the antenna connected to [ANT1]  
can be used. [ANT] switch is deactivated.  
• Manual: Deactivate the antenna memory function.  
Antenna can be selected with [ANT]  
switch operation only.  
ePush EXIT/SET to exit antenna set screen.  
F-6  
[ANT] SW  
Push  
to select the  
antenna selection mode.  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION 10  
D
Receive antenna I/O setting  
In default setting, receive antenna connectors, [RX  
ANT-IN] and [RX ANT-OUT], on the rear panel are de-  
activated and are connected internally by the switch-  
ing relay. If you want to connect an external preamp or  
low-pass filter between the [RX ANT-IN] and [RX ANT-  
OUT], you must activate them as described below.  
qSelect the antenna set screen.  
wSelect the desired frequency band with a band key.  
ePush [F-1•RX-I/O] to activate the receive antenna  
connectors ([RX ANT-IN] and [RX ANT-OUT]).  
• “RX-I/O” indicators appear when [RX ANT-IN] and [RX-  
ANT-OUT] are active.  
Band keys  
rRepeat steps w and e, if desired.  
tPush EXIT/SET to exit antenna set screen.  
RX-I/O  
F-1  
“RX-I/O” indicators appear when [RX ANT-IN]  
and [RX ANT-OUT] are active.  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION  
■ Antenna tuner operation  
The internal automatic antenna tuner matches the  
transceiver to the connected antenna automatically.  
After the tuner matches an antenna, the variable ca-  
pacitor settings are memorized as a preset point for  
each frequency range (100 kHz steps). Therefore,  
when you change the frequency range, the variable ca-  
pacitors are automatically preset to the memorized set-  
ting.  
CAUTION: NEVER transmit with the tuner ON when  
no antenna is connected. This will damage the  
transceiver. Be careful of the antenna selection.  
D
Tuner operation  
➥ Push TUNER to turn the internal antenna tuner ON.  
The antenna is tuned automatically when the an-  
tenna SWR is higher than 1.5:1.  
• When the tuner is ON, [TUNER] switch indicator lights  
green.  
• While tuning, [TUNER] switch indicator blinks green.  
TUNER  
NOTES:  
• NEVER transmit without an antenna properly con-  
nected to antenna port in use.  
• When 2 or more antennas are connected, select  
the antenna to be used with [ANT].  
• If the SWR is higher than about 1.5:1 when tuning  
above 100 kHz on an antenna’s preset point, push  
and hold TUNER for 1 sec. to start manual tuning.  
• The internal tuner may not be able to tune in AM  
mode. In such cases, push and hold TUNER for  
1 sec. to manually tune.  
• MANUAL TUNING  
During SSB operation at low voice levels, the internal  
tuner may not be tuned correctly. In such cases, man-  
ual tuning is helpful.  
➥ Push and hold TUNER for 1 sec., to start manual  
tuning.  
• A side tone is emitted and [TUNER] switch indicator  
blinks red while tuning.  
• If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1  
after 20 sec. of tuning, the [TUNER] switch indicator  
goes out.  
• AUTOMATIC TUNER START (HF bands only)  
If you want to deactivate the tuner under conditions of  
VSWR 1.5:1 or less, use the auto tuner start function  
and turn the tuner OFF. This function activates the  
tuner automatically when the SWR exceeds 1.5:1.  
This function is turned ON in set mode. (p. 12-13).  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION 10  
■ Antenna tuner operation (continued)  
• PTT TUNER START  
The tuner is always tuned when the PTT is pushed  
after the frequency is changed (more than 1% from  
last-tuned frequency). This function removes the “push  
and hold TUNER ” operation and activates for the first  
transmission on a new frequency.  
This function is turned ON in set mode. (p. 12-13).  
• Antenna tuner of the IC-PW1  
When using an external antenna tuner such as the IC-  
PW1’s tuner, tune with the external antenna tuner, and  
turn OFF the IC-7700’s tuner. After tuning is com-  
pleted, turn the internal tuner ON. Otherwise, both  
tuners tune simultaneously and correct tuning may not  
be obtained.  
See the instruction manual included with each antenna  
tuner for their respective operations.  
D
If the tuner cannot tune the antenna  
Check the following and try again:  
• the [ANT] connector selection.  
• the antenna connection and feedline.  
• the untuned antenna SWR. (Less than 3:1 for HF bands; Less  
than 2.5:1 for 50 MHz band)  
• the transmit power. (8 W for HF bands; 15 W for 50 MHz band)  
• the power source voltage/capacity.  
If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1  
after checking the above, perform the following:  
• repeat manual tuning several times.  
• tune with a 50 Ω dummy load and re-tune the antenna.  
• turn power OFF and ON.  
• adjust the antenna feedline length.  
(This is effective for higher frequencies in some cases.)  
• Some antennas, especially for low bands, have a narrow  
bandwidth. These antennas may not be tuned at the edge  
of their bandwidth, therefore, tune such an antenna as fol-  
lows:  
[Example]: Suppose you have an antenna which has an  
SWR of 1.5:1 at 3.55 MHz and an SWR of 3:1  
at 3.8 MHz.  
q Push TUNER to turn the antenna tuner ON.  
w Select CW mode.  
e Turn OFF the break-in function. (p. 6-3)  
r Push TRANSMIT to set to the transmit condition.  
t Set 3.55 MHz and key down.  
y Set 3.80 MHz and key down.  
u Push TRANSMIT to return to the receive condition.  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CLOCK AND TIMERS  
Section 11  
■ Time set mode ………………………………………………………… 11-2  
■ Daily timer setting ……………………………………………………… 11-3  
■ Setting sleep timer …………………………………………………… 11-4  
■ Timer operation ………………………………………………………… 11-4  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 CLOCK AND TIMERS  
■ Time set mode  
The IC-7700 has a built-in calendar and 24-hour clock  
(accuracy ±75 sec. per month) with daily power  
ON/OFF timer functions. Before operating these timer  
functions, set the current date and time.  
EDIT / SET  
F-5  
123 Symbol  
ABC abc  
/
/
qPush EXIT/SET to close multi-function screen, if  
necessary.  
wPush [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.  
ePush [F-4•TIME] to select time set mode.  
rPush [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item.  
tRotate the main dial to set or select the desired  
value or condition.  
EXIT/SET  
Ω
≈
Ω ≈  
F-3  
DEF  
F-4  
Main dial  
F-1  
F-2  
yPush EXIT/SET to exit time set mode.  
Date  
2000  
–
1
–
1 ( Sat )  
Sets the date.  
z Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select between the year and the  
month/day, then rotate the main dial to select them.  
• The date setting and “DATE-set Push [SET]” indication  
blink.  
x Push [F-5•SET] to set the date.  
Time (Now)  
1:23  
Sets the local time.  
z Rotate the main dial to set the local time.  
• The time setting and “TIME-set Push [SET]” indication  
blink.  
x Push [F-5•SET] to set the time.  
CLOCK2 Function  
ON  
Turns the CLOCK2 indicator ON and OFF.  
CLOCK2 is convenient to indicate UTC or other coun-  
try’s local time, etc.  
• ON : The CLOCK2 indicator is displayed below the  
local time indication.  
• OFF : The CLOCK2 indicator does not display.  
CLOCK2 Offset  
0:00  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default  
value.  
Sets the desired off-set time period for CLOCK2 dis-  
play within –24:00 to +24:00 in 5 min. steps.  
CLOCK2 Name  
UTC  
z Push [F-5•EDIT] to select the name edit condition.  
• The cursor under the 1st character blinks.  
x Push [ABC], [abc], [123] or [Symbol] to select the  
character group, then rotate the main dial to select  
the character.  
Sets the desired 3-character name for CLOCK2.  
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols  
(! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ @)  
and spaces can be used.  
~
• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters.  
• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and sym-  
bols.  
• Push [F-1•Ω] or [F-2•≈] for cursor movement.  
• Push [F-3•DEL] to delete the selected character.  
• Push [F-4•SPACE] to input a space.  
• Pushing the transceiver’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also  
enter numerals.  
c Push EXIT/SET to set the name.  
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CLOCK AND TIMERS 11  
■ Daily timer setting  
The transceiver turns power ON and/or OFF automat-  
ically on the specified day and time, with the specified  
frequency settings.  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close multi-function  
screen, if necessary.  
TIMER2 /  
F-2  
≈
TIMER4 / CLR  
F-4  
TIMER5  
F-5  
SET  
F-7  
wPush and hold TIMER for 1 sec. to select timer set  
screen.  
ePush one of [F-1•TIMER1] to [F-5•TIMER5] to se-  
lect the desired timer.  
rRotate the main dial to select the timer action ON  
and OFF.  
tPush [F-2•≈] to select the “DAY” cell, then rotate the  
main dial to select the desired day of the week.  
• Select “– – –” not to specify the day of the week. The  
timer will function every day in this case.  
• Once a day of the week is selected, push [F-4•CLR] to  
select “– – –.”  
TIMER  
EXIT/SET  
TIMER1 /  
Ω
TIMER3  
F-3  
Main dial  
F-1  
yPush [F-2•≈] to select the “REPEAT” cell, then ro-  
tate the main dial to select the repeat function ON  
and OFF.  
• ON : The timer functions every selected day of the  
week. (repeats)  
• OFF : The timer does not repeat.  
uPush [F-2•≈] to select the “ON” cell, then rotate the  
main dial to set the desired transceiver power ON  
time.  
• When using power OFF timer only, push [F-4•CLR] to  
select “– – –.” This setting cannot be set when the power  
OFF timer is set to “– – –.”  
iPush [F-2•≈] to select the “OFF” cell, then rotate the  
main dial to set the desired transceiver power OFF  
time.  
• When using power ON timer only, push [F-4•CLR] to se-  
lect “– – –.” This setting cannot be set when the power  
ON timer is set to “– – –.”  
oPush [F-2•≈] to select the “Mch” cell, then rotate the  
main dial to select the desired memory channel  
number.  
• If using the currently set VFO condition, push [F-4•CLR]  
to select “– – –.”  
!Push [F-7•SET] to set the timer.  
• The timer indicator above TIMER switch lights green.  
!Repeat steps e to ! to set other timers, if desired.  
!Push EXIT/SET to exit timer set screen.  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 CLOCK AND TIMERS  
■ Setting sleep timer  
The sleep timer turns the transceiver power OFF au-  
tomatically after passing the set period. The timer can  
be set to 5–120 min. in 5 min. steps.  
The sleep timer function counts the ‘minute’ units,  
and does not count the ‘second’ units. For example,  
when the sleep timer is started at 12:00 59, first one  
minute past for just 1 sec. That is way it has a max.  
59 sec. error. This is normal, not a malfunction.  
qPush EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
CLR  
F-4  
SLEEP / SET  
F-7  
wPush and hold TIMER for 1 sec. to select timer set  
screen.  
ePush [F-7•SLEEP] to select the sleep timer set con-  
dition.  
• “– – –” blinks.  
rSet the desired time period using the main dial.  
• “TIMER–set Push [SET]” blinks.  
• Push [F-4•CLR] to select “– – –” to cancel the setting.  
tPush [F-7•SET] to set the time.  
• Push EXIT/SET to cancel the setting.  
• The timer indicator above TIMER switch lights green.  
yPush EXIT/SET to exit timer set screen.  
uThe transceiver emits 10 beeps and turns OFF after  
the sleep timer period elapses.  
TIMER  
EXIT/SET  
Main dial  
• The timer indicator blinks while beeping.  
• Push TIMER momentarily to cancel the sleep timer, if  
desired.  
■ Timer operation  
qPreset the daily timer as described previously.  
wPush TIMER momentarily to turn the timer function  
ON.  
POWER  
• The timer indicator above this switch lights green when  
the timer function is ON.  
ePush and hold POWER for 1 sec. to turn the power  
OFF.  
• The timer indicator lights continuously.  
rWhen the set time arrives, the power is automati-  
cally turned ON.  
TIMER  
tThe transceiver emits 10 beeps and turns OFF after  
the power-off period elapses.  
• The timer indicator blinks while beeping.  
• Push TIMER momentarily to cancel the sleep timer, if  
desired.  
Timer action in the timer set screen must be se-  
lected ON to enable timer operation, described in  
page 11-3 steps r.  
11-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MODE  
Section 12  
■ Set mode description ………………………………………………… 12-2  
D Set mode operation ………………………………………………… 12-2  
D Screen arrangement ……………………………………………… 12-3  
■ Level set mode ………………………………………………………… 12-4  
■ ACC set mode ………………………………………………………… 12-7  
■ Display set mode ……………………………………………………… 12-9  
■ Others set mode …………………………………………………… 12-12  
■ USB-Memory set menu …………………………………………… 12-19  
D USB-Memory set screen arrangement ………………………… 12-19  
D Save option set mode …………………………………………… 12-20  
D Load option set mode …………………………………………… 12-21  
■ File saving …………………………………………………………… 12-22  
■ File loading …………………………………………………………… 12-23  
■ Changing a file name ……………………………………………… 12-24  
■ Deleting a file ………………………………………………………… 12-25  
■ Unmounting USB-Memory ………………………………………… 12-25  
■ Formatting the USB-Memory ……………………………………… 12-26  
12-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 SET MODE  
■ Set mode description  
Set mode is used for programming infrequently  
changed values or conditions of functions. The IC-  
7700 has a level set mode, display set mode, time set  
mode, accessory set mode, Others set mode and  
USB-Memory set menu.  
D
Set mode operation  
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
USB  
F-7  
w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.  
• Pushing and holding EXIT/SET for 1 sec. also selects set  
mode menu screen.  
e Push [F-1•LEVEL], [F-2•ACC], [F-3•DISP],  
[F-4•TIME], [F-5•OTHERS] or [F-7•USB] to enter  
the desired set mode.  
r For level, accessory, display and Others set mode,  
push [F-7•WIDE] to toggle wide and normal screen.  
t Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item,  
then rotate the main dial to adjust/select the desired  
value or condition.  
Main dial  
EXIT/SET  
LEVEL ACC  
F-1 F-2  
DISP  
F-3  
TIME OTHERS  
F-4 F-5  
• Pushing [F-3•Ω ≈] operation may be necessary for  
some items.  
y Push EXIT/SET twice to exit set mode.  
12-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MODE 12  
D
Screen arrangement  
• Display set mode (p. 12-9)  
F-1  
F-2  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
F-7  
F-3  
• Set mode menu screen (p. 12-2)  
• Time set mode (p. 11-2)  
F-1  
F-2  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
F-7  
F-4  
• Level set mode (p. 12-4)  
• Others set mode (p. 12-12)  
F-5  
• ACC set mode (p. 12-7)  
• USB-Memory set menu (p. 12-19)  
F-2  
F-7  
12-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 SET MODE  
■ Level set mode  
SSB RX HPF/LPF  
– – – – – – –  
Sets the low-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and high-  
pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio in 100  
Hz steps in SSB mode. (default: OFF)  
NOTE: When this setting is active, below 2 items  
will be reset to default value, ‘0.’  
Tone (Bass)  
0
Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in SSB  
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)  
Tone (Treble)  
0
Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in SSB  
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)  
AM  
RX HPF/LPF  
– – – – – – –  
Sets the low-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and high-  
pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio in 100  
Hz steps in AM mode. (default: OFF)  
NOTE: When this setting is active, below 2 items  
will be reset to default value, ‘0.’  
Tone (Bass)  
0
Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in AM  
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)  
Tone (Treble)  
0
Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in AM  
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)  
FM  
RX HPF/LPF  
– – – – – – –  
Sets the low-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and high-  
pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio in 100  
Hz steps in FM mode. (default: OFF)  
NOTE: When this setting is active, below 2 items  
will be reset to default value, ‘0.’  
Tone (Bass)  
0
0
Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in FM  
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)  
Tone (Treble)  
Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in FM  
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)  
12-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MODE 12  
■ Level set mode (continued)  
CW  
RX HPF/LPF  
– – – – – – –  
Sets the low-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and high-  
pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio in 100  
Hz steps in CW mode. (default: OFF)  
RTTY RX HPF/LPF  
– – – – – – –  
Sets the low-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and high-  
pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio in 100  
Hz steps in RTTY mode. (default: OFF)  
PSK RX HPF/LPF  
– – – – – – –  
Sets the low-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and high-  
pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio in 100  
Hz steps in PSK mode. (default: OFF)  
SSB TX Tone (Bass)  
0
0
0
0
0
0
Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in SSB  
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)  
Tone (Treble)  
Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in SSB  
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)  
AM TX Tone (Bass)  
Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in AM  
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)  
Tone (Treble)  
Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in AM  
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)  
FM TX Tone (Bass)  
Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in FM  
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)  
Tone (Treble)  
Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in FM  
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)  
12-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 SET MODE  
■ Level set mode (continued)  
SSB TBW (WIDE)  
100 – 2900  
Sets the transmission passband width to wide setting  
by changing the lower and higher cut-off frequencies.  
Lower freq. : 100 (default), 200, 300 and 500 Hz  
Higher freq.: 2500, 2700, 2800 and 2900 Hz (default)  
SSB TBW (MID)  
300 – 2700  
Sets the transmission passband width to middle set-  
ting by changing the lower and higher cut-off frequen-  
cies.  
Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 (default) and 500 Hz  
Higher freq.: 2500, 2700 (default), 2800 and 2900 Hz  
SSB TBW (NAR)  
500 – 2500  
Sets the transmission passband width to narrow set-  
ting by changing the lower and higher cut-off frequen-  
cies.  
Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 and 500 Hz (default)  
Higher freq.: 2500 (default), 2700, 2800 and 2900 Hz  
%
%
Speech Level  
50  
50  
Sets the voice synthesizer audio output level from 0 to  
100% in 1% steps. (default: 50%)  
Side Tone Level  
Sets the side tone output level from 0 to 100% in 1%  
steps. (default: 50%)  
Side Tone Level Limit  
ON  
Turns the side tone output level limiting capability from  
ON and OFF. (default: ON)  
%
Beep Level  
50  
Sets the key-touch beep output level from 0 to 100%  
in 1% steps. (default: 50%)  
Beep Level Limit  
ON  
Turns the key-touch beep output level limiting capa-  
bility from ON and OFF. (default: ON)  
Phones Level Ratio  
1.00  
Sets the ratio for audio output level from the head-  
phone toward to the internal speaker within a range  
of 0.60 to 1.40 in 0.01 steps. (default: 1.00)  
12-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MODE 12  
■ ACC set mode  
%
50  
ACC AF Output Level  
• Outputs approx. 200 mV at 50% (default) setting.  
Sets the desired audio output level, output from  
[ACC1], within 0 to 100% in 1% steps.  
%
S/PDIF Output Level  
100  
Sets the desired output level of [S/P DIF], within 0 to  
100% in 1% steps. (default: 100%)  
%
ACC MOD Level  
50  
• Approx. 100 mV at 50% (default) setting.  
Sets the desired audio input level for modulation from  
[ACC1].  
%
50  
S/PDIF MOD Level  
Sets the desired input level for modulation from  
[S/P DIF], within 0 to 100% in 1% steps.  
(default: 50%)  
DATA OFF MOD  
MIC,ACC  
Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation input  
when data mode is not in use.  
• MIC  
• ACC  
: Use the signals from [MIC].  
: Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).  
• MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]  
(pin 4). (default)  
• S/P DIF  
: Use the signals from [S/P DIF].  
DATA1 MOD  
ACC  
Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation input  
when data 1 mode (D1) is in use.  
• MIC  
• ACC  
: Use the signals from [MIC].  
: Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).  
(default)  
• MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]  
(pin 4).  
• S/P DIF  
: Use the signals from [S/P DIF].  
DATA2 MOD  
MIC,ACC  
Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation input  
when data 2 mode (D2) is in use.  
• MIC  
• ACC  
: Use the signals from [MIC].  
: Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).  
• MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]  
(pin 4). (default)  
• S/P DIF  
: Use the signals from [S/P DIF].  
12-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 SET MODE  
■ ACC set mode (continued)  
DATA3 MOD  
MIC  
Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation input  
when data 3 mode (D3) is in use.  
• MIC  
• ACC  
: Use the signals from [MIC]. (default)  
: Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).  
• MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]  
(pin 4).  
• S/P DIF  
: Use the signals from [S/P DIF].  
SEND Relay Type  
Lead  
Selects the switching relay type for [RELAY] from  
Lead and MOSFET.  
• Lead  
: Use mechanical relay.  
(16 V DC/0.5 A max.; default)  
Select the suitable relay type when connecting a non-  
Icom linear amplifier.  
• MOS-FET: Use semiconductor type relay.  
(250 V/200 mA max.)  
External Meter Output  
Auto  
Selects the desired item for an external meter indica-  
tion.  
• Auto  
: Outputs the receiving signal strength level  
during receive, and outputs the selected  
level (selected with [METER]), during  
transmit. (default)  
• S  
: Outputs the receiving signal strength level  
during receive.  
• Po  
: Outputs the transmitting power level dur-  
ing transmit.  
• SWR  
• ALC  
: Outputs the VSWR level during transmit.  
: Outputs the ALC level during transmit.  
• COMP : Outputs the compression level during  
transmit.  
• VD  
: Outputs the drain terminal voltage of the  
final amplifier MOSFETs.  
• ID  
: Outputs the drain current of the final am-  
plifier MOSFETs.  
%
50  
External Meter Level  
• Approx. 2.5 V at 50% (default) setting for full-scale indica-  
tion. (4.7 kΩ impedance)  
Sets the output level for an external meter indication  
with in 0 to 100% range in 1% steps.  
12-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MODE 12  
■ ACC set mode (continued)  
REF IN/OUT  
OFF  
Selects the transceiver’s reference signal condition  
from IN, OFF and OUT.  
• IN  
: Use an external reference signal for the IC-  
7700. Turn the transceiver power OFF then  
ON to make the setting effective.  
• OFF : Not input/output the reference signal.  
(default)  
• OUT : Outputs the IC-7700 reference signal to ex-  
ternally connected equipment(s) for their ref-  
erence.  
NOTE: If the applied reference signal is off-fre-  
quency, or no signal is applied with “IN” selection,  
the IC-7700 will not work properly. Select “OFF” or  
“OUT” then reboot the IC-7700 in such case.  
%
50  
REF Adjust  
Adjusts the internal reference signal frequency within  
0 to 100% range in 1% steps during frequency cali-  
bration.  
NOTE: Default setting is different for each trans-  
ceiver.  
■ Display set mode  
%
LCD Unit Bright  
50  
80  
Adjusts the LCD unit brightness from 0 (dark) to 100%  
(bright) range in 1% steps. (default: 50%)  
Backlight (Switches)  
Adjusts the switch indicators brightness from 1 (dark)  
to 100 (bright) range in 1 steps. (default: 80)  
Display Type  
A
Selects the desired display type from A (Black back)  
and B (Blue back). (default: A)  
See p.13-4 for details.  
Display Font  
Basic (1)  
Selects the desired font for frequency readout from  
Basic (1), Basic (2), Italic, Round and Slim.  
(default: Basic (1))  
See p.13-4 for details.  
12-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 SET MODE  
■ Display set mode (continued)  
Meter Response  
MID  
Set meter needle response from SLOW, MID and  
FAST. (default: MID)  
This setting is effective for the standard and edge-  
wise meter type selections only.  
Meter Type (Normal Screen)  
Standard  
Selects the desired S/RF meter type during normal  
screen indication from Standard, Edgewise and Bar.  
(default: Standard)  
Meter Type (Wide Screen)  
Bar  
Selects the desired S/RF meter type during wide  
screen or mini scope indication from Edgewise and  
Bar. (default: Bar)  
Meter Peak Hold (Bar)  
ON  
Turns the meter peak hold function ON and OFF.  
(default: ON)  
This function is used for the bar meter only.  
Memory Name  
ON  
Sets the memory name indication, during memory  
mode operation, ON and OFF. (default: ON)  
• ON : The programmed memory name is displayed  
above the frequency indication.  
• OFF : No memory name is displayed even a mem-  
ory name is programmed.  
APF–Width Popup (APF OFF ON)  
ON  
ON  
Selects the pop-up display for the APF filter width  
from ON and OFF.  
(default: ON)  
MN–Q Popup (MN OFF ON)  
Enables the pop-up indication capability when the  
notch filter width is changed from ON to OFF.  
(default: ON)  
12-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MODE 12  
■ Display set mode (continued)  
Screen Saver Function  
60min  
Turns the screen saver function ON (15, 30 or 60  
The screen saver will activate when no operation is  
performed for the selected time period to protect the  
LCD from the “burn-in” effect.  
minutes) and OFF.  
(default: 60 min.)  
Screen Saver Type  
Bound  
Selects the screen saver type from “Bound,” “Rota-  
The screen saver indication can be displayed for your  
reference while pushing and holding [F-5•PREVIEW].  
tion” and “Twist.”  
(default: Bound)  
External Display  
OFF  
• At least 800×600 pixel resolution is required for the dis-  
play.  
Select “ON” when the external display is connected.  
(default: OFF)  
External Display Sync Pulse  
H
Selects the suitable pulse level for the connected ex-  
ternal display from H and L. (default: H)  
Opening Message  
ON  
Turns the opening message screen indication capa-  
bility ON and OFF. (default: ON)  
My Call  
Sets the introductory text, up to 10-character long,  
displayed in the opening screen.  
Usually, you set your call sign for the opening screen.  
z Push [F-5•EDIT] to select the name edit condition.  
• The cursor under the 1st character blinks.  
x Push [ABC] (MF6), [abc] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or  
[Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then  
rotate the main dial to select the character.  
• Push [ABC] (MF6) or [abc] (MF6) to toggle capital and  
small letters.  
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols  
(– / . @) and spaces can be used.  
• Push [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to toggle numerals  
and symbols.  
• Push [F-1•Ω] or [F-2•≈] for cursor movement.  
• Push [F-3•DEL] to delete the selected character.  
• Push [F-4•SPACE] to input a space.  
• Pushing the transceiver’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also  
enter numerals.  
c Push EXIT/SET to set the name.  
12-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 SET MODE  
■ Others set mode  
Calibration Marker  
OFF  
This item is used for a simple frequency check of the  
transceiver. (default: OFF)  
See p. 13-5 for calibration procedure.  
NOTE: Turn the calibration marker OFF after  
checking the frequency of the transceiver.  
Beep (Confirmation)  
ON  
A beep sounds each time a switch is pushed to con-  
firm it. This function can be turned OFF for silent op-  
eration. (default: ON)  
The beep output level can be set in level set mode.  
(p. 12-6)  
Beep (Band Edge)  
ON  
A beep sounds when an operating frequency enters  
or exits an amateur band. This functions independent  
of the confirmation beep setting (above). (default: ON)  
The beep output level can be set in level set mode.  
(p. 12-6)  
Beep Sound  
1000Hz  
Sets the desired key-touch beep sound frequency  
within 500 to 2000 Hz in 10 Hz steps. (default:  
1000 Hz)  
Quick SPLIT  
ON  
When this item is set to ON, pushing and holding  
SPLIT for 1 sec. sets the unselected VFO’s readout  
frequency to the selected VFO’s readout frequency  
and activates split operation.  
See p. 6-7 for details.  
(default: ON)  
12-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MODE 12  
■ Others set mode (continued)  
FM SPLIT Offset(HF)  
–0.100MHz  
Sets the offset (difference between transmit and re-  
ceive frequencies) for the quick split function. This set-  
ting is used for HF bands in FM mode only and is  
used to input the repeater offset for an HF band.  
The offset frequency can be set from –9.999 MHz to  
+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps. (default: –0.100 MHz)  
FM SPLIT Offset(50M)  
–0.500MHz  
Sets the offset (difference between transmit and re-  
ceive frequencies) for the quick split function. This set-  
ting is used for 50 MHz band FM mode only, and is  
used to input the repeater offset for the 50 MHz band.  
The offset frequency can be set from –9.999 MHz to  
+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps. (default: –0.500 MHz)  
SPLIT LOCK  
OFF  
When this item is ON, the main dial can be used to  
adjust the transmit frequency while pushing [XFC]  
even while the lock function is activated.  
(default: OFF)  
See pgs. 6-6, 6-7 for split frequency operation details.  
Tuner (Auto Start)  
OFF  
The internal antenna tuner has an automatic start ca-  
pability which starts tuning if the SWR is higher than  
1.5–3:1.  
• OFF : The tuner remains OFF even when the SWR  
is poor (1.5–3:1). (default)  
• ON : Automatic tune starts even when the tuner is  
turned OFF during HF bands operation.  
Tuner (PTT Start)  
OFF  
Tuning of the internal antenna tuner can be started  
automatically at the moment the PTT is pushed after  
the operating frequency is changed (more than 1%  
from last-tuned frequency). (default: OFF)  
12-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 SET MODE  
■ Others set mode (continued)  
Transverter Function  
Auto  
Selects the transverter operation condition from Auto  
and ON. (default: Auto)  
• ON : Turn the transverter operation ON.  
• Auto: The transceiver turns into transverter opera-  
tion condition when 2 to 13.8 V DC is applied  
to [ACC2] pin 6.  
Transverter Offset  
16.000MHz (14.000.00 30.000.00)  
Sets the desired offset frequency for the transverter  
operation within 0.000 to 99.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps.  
(default: 16.000 MHz)  
RTTY Mark Frequency  
2125  
Selects the RTTY mark frequency. RTTY mark fre-  
quency is switched between 1275, 1615 and  
2125 Hz. (default: 2125 Hz)  
2125 Hz is automatically selected when the internal  
RTTY decoder is used.  
RTTY Shift Width  
170  
Selects the RTTY shift width. There are 3 selectable  
values: 170, 200 and 425 Hz. (default: 170 Hz)  
170 Hz is automatically selected when the internal  
RTTY decoder is used.  
RTTY Keying Polarity  
Normal  
Selects the RTTY keying polarity. Normal or reverse  
keying polarity can be selected.  
(default: Normal)  
When reverse polarity is selected, Mark and Space  
are reversed.  
• Normal : Key open/close = Mark/Space  
• Reverse : Key open/close = Space/Mark  
PSK Tone Frequency  
1500  
Selects the desired PSK tone frequency for the PSK  
reception from 1000, 1500 and 2000 Hz.  
(default: 1500 Hz)  
SPEECH Language  
English  
HIGH  
Selects the speech language from English and Japan-  
ese. (default: English)  
SPEECH Speed  
Selects the speech speed from HIGH (faster) and  
LOW (slower). (default: HIGH)  
12-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MODE 12  
■ Others set mode (continued)  
SPEECH S-Level  
ON  
The IC-7700 speech processor has frequency, mode  
and signal level announcement. Signal level an-  
nouncement can be deactivated if desired.  
(default: ON)  
When “OFF” is selected, the signal level is not an-  
nounced.  
SPEECH [MODE] Switch  
OFF  
Selects the operating mode speech capability when a  
mode switch is pushed; ON or OFF.  
(default: OFF)  
When “ON” is selected, the selected operating mode  
is announced when a mode switch is pushed.  
Memopad Numbers  
5
Sets the number of memo pad channels available. 5  
or 10 memo pads can be set. (default: 5)  
MAIN DIAL Auto TS  
HIGH  
Sets the auto tuning step function for the main dial.  
When rotating the main dial rapidly, the tuning step  
automatically changes several times as selected.  
• HIGH : Auto tuning step is turned ON. Fastest tun-  
ing step during rapid rotation. (default)  
• LOW : Auto tuning step is turned ON. Faster tun-  
ing step during rapid rotation.  
There are 2 type of auto tuning steps: HIGH (Fastest)  
and LOW (Faster). (default: HIGH)  
• OFF  
: Auto tuning step is turned OFF.  
MIC Up/Down Speed  
HIGH  
Sets the rate at which frequencies are scanned when  
the microphone [UP]/[DN] switches are pushed and  
held. High or low can be selected.  
• HIGH : High speed (default; 50 tuning steps/sec.)  
• LOW : Low speed (25 tuning steps/sec.)  
Quick RIT/∂TX Clear  
OFF  
Selects the RIT/∂TX frequency clearing instruction  
with the CLEAR switch.  
• ON : Clears the RIT/∂TX frequency when  
CLEAR is pushed momentarily.  
• OFF : Clears the RIT/∂TX frequency when  
CLEAR is pushed and held for 1 sec.  
(default)  
12-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 SET MODE  
■ Others set mode (continued)  
[NOTCH] Switch (SSB)  
Auto/Manual  
Selects notch functions for SSB mode operation from  
Auto, Manual and Auto/Manual.  
• Auto  
• Manual  
: Only the auto notch can be used.  
: Only the manual notch can be used.  
• Auto/Manual : Both the auto and manual notch can  
be used. (default)  
[NOTCH] Switch (AM)  
Auto/Manual  
Selects notch functions for AM mode operation from  
Auto, Manual and Auto/Manual.  
• Auto  
• Manual  
: Only the auto notch can be used.  
: Only the manual notch can be used.  
• Auto/Manual : Both the auto and manual notch can  
be used. (default)  
DIGI–SEL VR Operation  
DIGI–SEL  
Selects [DIGI-SEL] control function from DIGI-SEL  
and APF.  
• DIGI-SEL : [DIGI-SEL] control functions as the digi-  
tal selector operation. (default)  
• APF  
: [DIGI-SEL] control functions as the  
audio peak filter adjustment.  
SSB/CW Synchronous Tuning  
OFF  
Selects the displayed frequency shift function from  
ON and OFF. (default: OFF)  
• ON : The displayed frequency shifts when the op-  
erating mode is changed between SSB and  
CW.  
When this function is activated, the audio pitch or  
tones of the received signal will remain the same  
even when the operating mode is changed between  
SSB and CW.  
• OFF : The displayed frequency does not shift.  
The frequency shifting value may differ according  
to the CW pitch setting.  
CW Normal Side  
LSB  
Selects the side band used to receive CW in CW nor-  
mal mode. (default: LSB)  
APF Type  
SHARP  
Set audio filter shape for APF from SOFT and  
SHARP. (default: SOFT)  
• SOFT : Soft filter shape makes distinguishing  
noise and signals easier. The audio filter  
width is related to the CW pitch setting.  
• SHARP : Sharp filter shape rejects interference  
signals.  
12-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MODE 12  
■ Others set mode (continued)  
External Keypad (VOICE)  
OFF  
Sets the external keypad for voice message trans-  
mission capability ON and OFF.  
• ON : Pushing one of external keypad switches,  
transmits the desired voice message contents  
during a phone mode operation.  
See page 2-7 for the equivalent circuit of an external  
keypad and connection.  
• OFF : External keypad does not function. (default)  
External Keypad (KEYER)  
OFF  
Sets the external keypad for keyer memory transmis-  
sion capability ON and OFF.  
• ON : Pushing one of external keypad switches,  
transmits the desired keyer memory contents  
during CW mode operation.  
See page 2-7 for the equivalent circuit of an external  
keypad and connection.  
• OFF : External keypad does not function. (default)  
CI–V Baud Rate  
Auto  
Sets the CI-V data transfer rate. 300, 1200, 4800,  
9600, 19200 bps and “Auto” are available. (default:  
Auto)  
When “Auto” is selected, the baud rate is automati-  
cally set according to the data rate of connected con-  
troller.  
CI–V Address  
74h  
To distinguish equipment, each CI-V transceiver has  
its own Icom standard address in hexadecimal code.  
The IC-7700’s address is 74h.  
When 2 or more IC-7700’s are connected to an op-  
tional CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER, rotate the main dial  
to select a different address for each IC-7700; the  
range is 01h to 7Fh.  
CI–V Transceive  
ON  
Transceive operation is possible with the IC-7700  
connected to other Icom HF transceivers or receivers.  
When “ON” is selected, changing the frequency, op-  
erating mode, etc. on the IC-7700 automatically  
changes those of connected transceivers (or re-  
ceivers) and vice versa.  
12-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 SET MODE  
■ Others set mode (continued)  
RS–232C Function  
CI–V  
Select [RS-232C] connector output data format from  
CI-V and Decode.  
• CI-V  
: Outputs data in CI-V format. (default)  
• Decode : Outputs decoded contents in ASCII code  
format.  
Decode Baud Rate  
9600  
Selects data transmission speed (Baud rate) when  
“Decode” is selected in “RS-232C Function” above;  
settings are 300, 1200, 4800, 9600 and 19200 bps.  
(default: 9600)  
Keyboard Type  
English  
Selects the connected keyboard type from Japanese,  
English, United Kingdom, French, French (Canadian),  
German, Portuguese, Portuguese (Brazilian), Span-  
ish, Spanish (Latin American) and Italian.  
(default: English)  
Keyboard Repeat Delay  
250ms  
Sets the time period for delay within 100 to  
1000 msec. in 50 msec. steps. (default: 250 msec.)  
When a key of the connected keyboard is pressed  
and held for the set period, the character is input con-  
tinuously.  
Keyboard Repeat Rate  
10.9cps  
Sets the repeating rate for the connected keyboard  
within 2.0 to 30.0 cps. (default: 10.9 cps)  
*cps=character per second  
• Available repeating rate  
2.0, 2.1, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7, 3.0, 3.3, 3.7, 4.0, 4.3, 4.6, 5.0,  
5.5, 6.0, 6.7, 7.5, 8.0, 8.6, 9.2, 10.0, 10.9, 12.0,  
13.3, 15.0, 16.0, 17.1, 18.5, 20.0, 21.8, 24.0, 26.7,  
30.0  
When a key of the connected keyboard is pressed  
and held, the character is repeatedly input with the set  
speed.  
IP Address (Valid after Reboot)  
192. 168. 0.  
1
Sets IP address for the IC-7700 when connecting to  
your PC or LAN (Local Area Network) through the  
Ethernet connector.  
Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make the  
setting effective. See p. 16-7 for details.  
Subnet Mask (Valid after Reboot)  
255. 255. 255. 0 (24bit)  
Sets subnet mask for the IC-7700 when connecting  
to your PC or LAN (Local Area Network) through the  
Ethernet connector.  
Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make the  
setting effective. See p. 16-7 for details.  
12-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MODE 12  
■ USB-Memory set menu  
D
USB-Memory set screen arrangement  
• USB-Memory set menu  
F-1  
F-2  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
F-7  
• Setting load screen (p. 12-23)  
• Firmware update (p. 16-4)  
Updating the firmware is very risky. If you make  
a
mistake, the IC-7700 may  
not operate properly, and repair at Icom Inc, (Japan) may be the only way to  
fix it.  
You undertake the updating of the firmware at your own risk and responsibility.  
Please refer to the firmware download homepage and/or the instruction manual  
for the correct procedures in updating the firmware.  
F-1  
F-2  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
F-7  
F-3  
• Load option set mode (p. 12-21)  
• Format menu (p. 12-26)  
F-4  
• Setting save screen (p. 12-22)  
• Unmount USB-Memory (p. 12-25)  
F-1  
F-2  
F-3  
F-4  
F-5  
F-6  
F-7  
F-5  
• Save option set mode (p. 12-20)  
12-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 SET MODE  
D
Save option set mode  
SAVE Contents  
All  
Selects file save condition from All and Select.  
(default: All)  
• All  
: Saves all the following contents.  
• Select : Saves the selected contents only.  
Memory & Settings  
YES  
This setting is fixed “YES.”  
• YES : Saves memory channel contents and set-  
tings of set modes.  
Voice TX Memory  
YES  
Selects the voice TX message save condition from  
YES and NO. (default: YES)  
• YES : Saves the voice TX message.  
• NO  
: Does not save.  
Voice RX Memory  
NO  
Selects the voice RX message save condition from  
YES and NO. (default: NO)  
• YES : Saves the voice RX message.  
• NO : Does not save.  
12-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MODE 12  
D
Load option set mode  
Load Contents  
Select  
Selects file load condition from All and Select.  
(default: Select)  
• All  
: Loads and sets the all following contents.  
• Select : Loads and sets the selected contents only.  
ANT Memory  
NO  
Selects the antenna memory setting loading condition  
YES and NO. (default: NO).  
• YES : Loads and sets the antenna memory.  
• NO  
: Use the original antenna memory setting.  
REF IN/OUT, REF Adjust  
NO  
Selects the reference signal setting load condition  
YES and NO. (default: NO).  
• YES : Loads and sets the reference signal setting.  
• NO : Use the original reference signal setting.  
IP Address, Subnet Mask  
NO  
Selects the IP address and subnet mask setting load  
condition YES and NO. (default: NO).  
• YES : Loads and sets the IP address and subnet  
mask setting.  
• NO  
: Use the original IP address and subnet  
mask setting.  
CI–V Address  
NO  
Selects the CI-V address setting load condition YES  
and NO. (default: NO).  
• YES : Loads and sets the CI-V address setting.  
• NO : Use the original CI-V address setting.  
Other Memory & Settings  
YES  
Selects memory channel contents and other settings  
load condition YES and NO. (default: YES).  
• YES : Loads and sets memory channel contents  
and other settings.  
• NO  
: Use the original memory channel contents  
and other settings.  
Voice TX Memory  
YES  
Selects the voice TX message load condition YES  
and NO. (default: YES).  
• YES : Loads and sets voice TX message.  
• NO : Use the original voice TX message.  
Voice RX Memory  
YES  
Selects the voice RX message load condition YES  
and NO. (default: NO).  
• YES : Loads and sets voice RX message.  
• NO : Use the original voice RX message.  
12-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 SET MODE  
■ File saving  
Memory channel contents, set mode settings, etc. can  
be saved into the USB-Memory for backup.  
q During set mode menu screen indication, push  
[F-7•USB] to select USB-Memory set menu screen.  
w Push [F-2•SAVE] to select setting save screen.  
e Change the following conditions if desired.  
OPTION  
F-5  
SAVE / OK  
F-6  
WIDE / CANCEL  
F-7  
• File name:  
z Push [F-4•EDIT] to select file name edit con-  
dition.  
• Push [F-1• DIR/FILE] several times to select the  
file name, if necessary.  
x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol]  
(MF7) to select the character group, then ro-  
tate the main dial to select the character.  
• [ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7): 0  
to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^ + –  
= ( ) [ ] { } _ ~ @ can be selected.  
EXIT/SET  
EDIT  
F-4  
DIR/FILE  
F-1  
Main dial  
• Push [F-1•Ω] to move the cursor left, push [F-2•≈]  
to move the cursor right, push [F-3•DEL] to delete  
a character and push [F-4•SPACE] to insert a  
space.  
c Push EXIT/SET to set the file name.  
• Save option  
z Push [F-5•OPTION] to enter save option set  
mode.  
x Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the item,  
then rotate the main dial to select the desired  
setting. (see p. 12-20 for details)  
• “Text” is the default setting.  
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the  
default setting.  
c Push EXIT/SET to return to the previous indi-  
cation.  
• Saving location  
z Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view  
screen.  
x Select the desired directory or folder in the  
USB-Memory.  
• Push [F-4•Ω ≈] to select the upper directory.  
• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select folder in the  
same directory.  
• Push and hold [F-4•Ω ≈] for 1 sec. to select a  
folder in the directory.  
• Push [F-5•REN/DEL] to rename the folder.  
• Push and hold [F-5•REN/DEL] for 1 sec. to delete  
the folder.  
• Push and hold [F-6•MAKE] for 1 sec. to making a  
new folder. (Edit the name with the same manner  
as the “• File name” above.)  
c Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] twice to select the file  
name.  
r Push [F-6•SAVE].  
• Confirmation screen appears.  
t Push [F-6•OK] to save.  
• After saving is completed, return to USB-Memory set  
menu automatically.  
12-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MODE 12  
■ File loading  
By loading the saved setting file from the USB-Mem-  
ory, you can easily set up another IC-7700—several  
operators settings can easily be applied to one IC-  
7700.  
q During set mode menu screen indication, push  
[F-7•USB] to select USB set menu screen.  
w Push [F-1•LOAD] to select setting load screen.  
• The indicator above the USB connectors and “USB” in-  
dicator on the display blink.  
SORT / OK  
F-6  
WIDE / CANCEL  
F-7  
• After the USB-Memory contents are displayed, the indi-  
cators stop blinking.  
e Push [F-5•OPTION] to select load option set mode,  
then set the desired loading conditions, if desired.  
• See page 12-21 for details.  
r Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired set-  
ting file.  
EXIT/SET  
DIR/FILE  
F-1  
∫
√
LOAD OPTION  
F-4 F-5  
F-2  
F-3  
t Push [F-4•LOAD].  
• Confirmation screen appears.  
y Push [F-6•OK] to starts loading.  
• After the loading is completed, the message dialog, “Re-  
boot the IC-7700,” appears.  
u Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make  
the setting effective.  
12-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 SET MODE  
■ Changing a file name  
The file name, saved in the USB-Memory, can be re-  
named from the transceiver as desired.  
q During setting save screen display, push  
[F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view screen.  
• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired folder.  
• “DECODE,” “SETTING” and “VOICE” folders are avail-  
able as the default.  
WIDE / CANCEL  
F-7  
• After the folder is selected, push and hold [F-4•Ω ≈] for  
1 sec. to display content folder(s), if available.  
w Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select file list screen.  
e Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired file.  
r Push [F-5•REN/DEL] momentarily to select the file  
name edit condition.  
t Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to  
select the character group, then rotate the main dial  
to select the character.  
EXIT/SET  
DIR/FILE  
F-1  
∫
√
Ω ≈  
REN/DEL  
F-5  
F-2  
F-3  
F-4  
• [ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7): 0 to 9  
(numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^ + – = ( ) [ ] { }  
_ ~ @ can be selected.  
• Push [F-1•Ω] to move the cursor left, push [F-2•≈] to  
move the cursor right, push [F-3•DEL] to delete a char-  
acter and push [F-4•SPACE] to insert a space.  
• Pushing the transceiver’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter  
numerals.  
y Push EXIT/SET to set the file name.  
12-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MODE 12  
■ Deleting a file  
RECOMMENDATION! Deleting the setting file is ir-  
reversible. Confirm the contents before deleting a  
setting file!  
q During setting save screen display, push  
[F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view screen.  
• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired folder.  
• “DECODE,” “SETTING” and “VOICE” folders are avail-  
able as the default.  
• After the folder is selected, push and hold [F-4•Ω ≈] for  
1 sec. to display content folder(s), if available.  
w Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select file list screen.  
e Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired file to  
be deleted.  
r Push and hold [F-5•REN/DEL] for 1 sec.  
• Confirmation screen appears.  
t Push [F-6•OK] to delete.  
• After the deleting, return to setting save screen auto-  
matically.  
■ Unmounting USB-Memory  
CAUTION! When removing the USB-Memory, un-  
mount operation is necessary. If you do not unmount  
the memory in this case, data in the USB memory  
may be corrupted.  
q Push and hold [F-6•UNMOUNT] for 1 sec.  
• Confirmation screen appears.  
w Push [F-6•OK] to unmount the USB-Memory.  
e After “  
” indication disappears, remove the  
USB  
USB-Memory.  
12-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 SET MODE  
■ Formatting the USB-Memory  
Saved data in the USB-Memory can be erased.  
IMPORTANT! Formatting erases all saved data in  
the USB-Memory. Making a backup file on your PC  
is recommended.  
q During USB-Memory set menu display, push and  
hold [F-4•FORMAT] for 1 sec.  
• Confirmation screen appears.  
w Push [F-6•FAT] or [F-7•FAT32] to select the format  
type, FAT or FAT32, respectively.  
• Confirmation screen appears.  
e Push [F-6•OK] to format.  
• Push [F-7•CANCEL] to cancel.  
r Returns to USB-Memory set menu indication auto-  
matically.  
NOTE: If no USB-Memory is inserted and [F-  
4•FORMAT] is selected as in step q, an error mes-  
sage appears.  
12-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE  
Section 13  
■ Troubleshooting ……………………………………………………… 13-2  
D Transceiver power ………………………………………………… 13-2  
D Transmit and receive ……………………………………………… 13-2  
D Scanning …………………………………………………………… 13-3  
D Display ……………………………………………………………… 13-3  
D Format USB-Memory ……………………………………………… 13-3  
■ Main dial brake adjustment ………………………………………… 13-3  
■ SWR reading …………………………………………………………… 13-4  
■ Screen type and font selections …………………………………… 13-4  
■ Frequency calibration (approximate) ……………………………… 13-5  
■ Opening the transceiver’s case ……………………………………… 13-6  
■ Clock backup battery replacement ………………………………… 13-6  
■ Fuse replacement …………………………………………………… 13-7  
■ Resetting the CPU …………………………………………………… 13-7  
■ About protection indications ………………………………………… 13-8  
■ Screen Saver Function ……………………………………………… 13-8  
13-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 MAINTENANCE  
■ Troubleshooting  
The following chart is designed to help you correct  
problems which are not equipment malfunctions.  
If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem or  
solve it through the use of this chart, contact you near-  
est Icom Dealer or Service Center.  
D
Transceiver power  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
REF.  
Power does not come on • Power cable is improperly connected.  
when the [POWER] switch • The internal power supply is turned OFF.  
• Re-connect the AC power cable correctly.  
• Turn the internal power supply ON.  
p. 2-5  
p. 3-2  
is pushed.  
• Circuit breaker is tripped.  
• Check for the cause, then re-set the circuit —  
breaker.  
D
Transmit and receive  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
REF.  
No sounds from the • Volume level is too low.  
speaker.  
• Rotate [AF] clockwise to obtain a suitable lis- p. 3-9  
tening level.  
• The squelch is closed.  
• Turn [SQL] to 10 o’clock position to open the p. 3-9  
squelch.  
• The transceiver is in transmit.  
• Push [TRANSMIT] to receive or check the p. 3-12  
SEND line of an external unit, if connected.  
Sensitivity is too low, and • The antenna is not connected properly.  
only strong signals are • The antenna for another band is selected.  
audible.  
• Re-connect to the antenna connector.  
• Select an antenna suitable for the operating p. 10-2  
frequency.  
—
• The antenna is not properly tuned.  
• Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to manually p. 10-6  
tune the antenna.  
• The attenuator is activated.  
• Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to select “ATT p. 5-9  
OFF.”  
Received audio is unclear • Wrong operating mode is selected.  
• Select a suitable operating mode.  
p. 3-8  
or distorted.  
• PBT function is activated.  
• Push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec. to reset the p. 5-12  
function.  
• Noise blanker is turned ON when receiving a • Push [NB] to turn the noise blanker OFF.  
strong signal.  
p. 5-16  
• Preamp is activated.  
• Push [P.AMP] (MF3) once or twice to turn the p. 5-9  
function OFF.  
• The noise reduction is activated and the [NR] • Set the [NR] control for maximum readability.  
control is too far clockwise.  
p. 5-17  
The [ANT] switch does not • The antenna switch has not been activated.  
function  
• Set the antenna switch in set mode to “Auto” or p. 10-4  
“Manual.”  
Transmitting is impossible. • The operating frequency is not inside a ham • Set the frequency to be in a ham band.  
band.  
p. 3-5  
Output power is too low.  
• [RF PWR] is set too far counterclockwise  
• [DRIVE] is set too far counterclockwise  
• [MIC] is set too far counterclockwise  
• The antenna for another band is selected.  
• Rotate [RF PWR] clockwise.  
• Set [DRIVE] to a suitable position.  
• Set [MIC] to a suitable position.  
p. 3-12  
p. 3-13  
p. 3-12  
• Select an antenna suitable for the operating p. 10-2  
frequency.  
• The antenna is not properly tuned.  
• Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to manually p. 10-6  
tune the antenna.  
No contact possible with • RIT or ∂TX function is activated.  
another station.  
• Push [RIT] or [∂TX] to turn the function OFF.  
pgs. 5-10,  
6-4  
p. 6-6  
• Split frequency function is activated.  
• Push [SPLIT] to turn the function OFF.  
• Set [MIC] to a suitable position.  
Transmit signal is unclear • [MIC] is set too far clockwise  
or distorted.  
p. 3-12  
Repeater cannot be  
accessed.  
• Split frequency function is not activated.  
• Programmed subaudible tone frequency is • Reset the frequency using set mode.  
wrong.  
• Push [SPLIT] to to turn the function ON  
p. 6-6  
p. 4-33  
13-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE 13  
D
Scanning  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
REF.  
Programmed scan does • Squelch is open.  
not stop.  
• Set [SQL] to the threshold point.  
p. 3-9  
Programmed scan does • The same frequencies have been programmed • Program different frequencies in scan edge p. 8-3  
not start. in scan edge memory channels P1 and P2. memory channel P1 and P2.  
Memory scan does not • 2 or more memory channels have not been • Program more than 2 memory channels.  
start programmed.  
p. 8-3  
Select memory scan does • 2 or more memory channels have not been • Designate more than 2 memory channels as p. 9-7  
not start  
designated as select channels.  
select channels for the scan.  
D
Display  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
REF.  
The displayed frequency • The dial lock function is activated.  
does not change properly. • A set mode screen is selected.  
•
Push [LOCK] to turn the function OFF.  
p. 5-17  
• Push [EXIT/SET] several times to exit the set p. 12-2  
mode screen.  
• The internal CPU has malfunctioned.  
• Reset the CPU.  
p. 13-7  
D
Format USB-Memory  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
REF.  
Format error appears • The inserted USB-Memory capacity is smaller • Insert a USB-Memory larger than 64 MB or p. 12-26  
when formatting in FAT32 than 64 MB. select the FAT format.  
Format error appears • The inserted USB-Memory capacity is larger • Insert a USB-Memory smaller than 2 GB or p. 12-26  
when formatting in FAT  
than 2 GB.  
select the FAT32 format.  
■ Main dial brake adjustment  
The tension of the main dial may be adjusted to suit  
your preference.  
The brake adjustment is located on the bottom side of  
the front panel. See the figure at left.  
[MAIN DIAL]  
Slide the brake adjustment to a comfortable tension  
level while turning the dial continuously and evenly in  
one direction.  
Brake  
adjustment  
Light  
Heavy  
13-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 MAINTENANCE  
■ SWR reading  
The SWR meter indicates the SWR over the transmis-  
sion line in all modes.  
q Push TUNER to turn the antenna tuner OFF.  
w Push and hold [METER] for 1 sec. to display multi-  
function meter.  
TRANSMIT  
METER  
e Push RTTY/PSK once or twice to select RTTY  
mode.  
r Push TRANSMIT .  
t Rotate [RF PWR] clockwise past the 12 o’clock po-  
sition for more than 30 W output power.  
y Read the SWR on the SWR meter gage.  
u Push EXIT/SET to close multi-function meter.  
TUNER  
RTTY/PSK  
EXIT/SET  
[RF PWR]  
The built-in antenna tuner matches the transmitter  
to the antenna when the SWR is lower than 3 : 1.  
Better than 1.5:1  
9
+
20  
5
+
40  
1
+
60dB  
A
5
10  
S
0
50  
2
100  
150  
15  
250 W  
200  
10  
ID  
0
3
Po  
SWR  
COMP  
1.5  
20  
10  
1
∞
0
dB  
44  
ALC  
VD  
52V  
■ Screen type and font selections  
2 types of screen images and 5 types of frequency  
readout indication fonts are available in the IC-7700.  
• Screen image example—  
Display Type: B, Display Font: Slim  
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close multi-function  
screen, if necessary.  
w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.  
e Push [F-3•DISP] to enter display set mode.  
r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select “Display Type”  
item when selecting the screen image, select “Dis-  
play Font” when selecting the frequency readout in-  
dication font.  
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired screen  
image or font.  
• Screen image is selectable from A (Black back) and B  
(Blue back).  
• Basic (1), Basic(2), Italic, Round and Slim are available  
for the frequency readout font.  
y Push EXIT/SET twice to exit from display set mode.  
13-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE 13  
■ Frequency calibration (approximate)  
A very accurate frequency counter is required to cali-  
brate the frequency of the transceiver. However, a  
rough check may be performed by receiving radio sta-  
tion WWV, WWVH, or other standard frequency sig-  
nals.  
CAUTION: The IC-7700 has been thoroughly ad-  
justed and tested at the factory before being  
shipped. You should not have to re-calibrate it.  
q Push SSB to select USB mode.  
w Push and hold PBT-CLR for 1 sec. to clear the  
PBT setting and make sure that the RIT/∂TX func-  
tion is not activated.  
e Set the frequency to the standard frequency station  
minus 1 kHz.  
• When receiving WWV or WWVH (at 15.00000 MHz) as  
a standard frequency, set the operating frequency for  
14.99900 MHz.  
Main dial  
EXIT/SET  
∫
ACC  
√
OTHERS  
F-5  
SET  
F-7  
/
F-1  
F-2  
• Other standard frequencies can be used.  
r Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
• Calibration marker item  
t Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.  
y Push [F-5•OTHERS] to enter Others set mode.  
u Push [F-1•Y] several times to select the “Calibra-  
tion Marker” item.  
i Rotate the main dial clockwise to turn the calibra-  
tion marker ON.  
o Push EXIT/SET once to return to set mode menu  
screen.  
! Push [F-2•ACC] to enter accessory set mode.  
! Push [F-2•Z] several times to select the “REF Ad-  
just” item.  
! Rotate the main dial to adjust for a zero beat with  
the received standard signal as shown at left.  
• Zero beat means that two signals are exactly the same  
frequency, resulting in a single tone being emitted.  
! Turn the calibration marker OFF in Others set  
mode.  
• REF Adjust item  
! Push EXIT/SET twice to exit set mode.  
13-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 MAINTENANCE  
■ Opening the transceiver’s case  
Follow the case opening procedures shown here when  
you want to replace the clock backup battery or inter-  
nal fuse.  
CAUTION!: DISCONNECT the AC power cable  
from the transceiver before performing any work on  
the transceiver. Otherwise, there is danger of elec-  
tric shock and/or equipment damage.  
CAUTION!: The transceiver weighs approx. 24 kg  
(53 lb). Always have two people available to lift or  
turn over the transceiver.  
q Remove the rack mounting handle from both side.  
See p. 2-3 for rack mounting handle detachment  
details.  
w Remove the 8 screws from the top of the trans-  
ceiver and the 6 screws from the sides, then lift up  
the top cover.  
e Turn the transceiver upside-down.  
CAUTION: NEVER HOLD THE MAIN DIAL OR  
ANY OTHER KNOBS when the transceiver is  
being turned upside down. This may damage the  
transceiver.  
r Remove 7 screws from the bottom, then lift up the  
bottom cover.  
■ Clock backup battery replacement  
The IC-7700 has a lithium backup battery (CR2032) in-  
side for clock and timer functions. The usual life of the  
backup battery is approximately 2 years.  
When the backup battery is discharged, the transceiver  
transmits and receives normally but cannot retain the  
current time.  
WARNING: DISCONNECT the AC power cable  
from the AC outlet before removing the transceiver’s  
cover.  
q Remove the top cover as shown above.  
w Replace the clock backup battery, located on the  
front panel as illustrated at left.  
• Make sure the battery polarity is correct.  
e Return the top cover to the original position.  
r Set the date and time in time set mode. (p. 11-2)  
13-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE 13  
■ Fuse replacement  
When no external DC output is available from [EXT  
DC] and ACC connectors, the internal fuse may be  
open. Replace the fuse in this case.  
WARNING: DISCONNECT the AC power cable  
from the AC outlet before removing the transceiver’s  
cover.  
q Remove the bottom cover as shown left.  
w Remove the 8 screws from the shield cover of the  
transceiver’s bottom side.  
e Replace the open fuse with a new, properly rated  
one (FGB 2 A) as shown at left.  
r Return the inside cover and bottom cover and  
screws to the original position.  
■ Resetting the CPU  
q Turn the main power switch on the rear panel ON.  
• Make sure the transceiver power is still OFF.  
F-INP  
F-IMP  
POWER  
MW  
ENT  
w While pushing and holding  
push POWER to turn power ON.  
• The internal CPU is reset.  
and MW  
,
ENT  
• The CPU start-up takes approx. 5 sec.  
• The transceiver displays its initial VFO frequencies  
when resetting is complete.  
e Correct the set mode settings after resetting, if de-  
sired.  
NOTE: Resetting CLEARS all programmed con-  
tents in memory channels and returns programmed  
values in set mode to default values.  
ALL CLEAR  
13-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 MAINTENANCE  
■ About protection indications  
The IC-7700 has a 2-step protection function to protect  
the final power amplifiers.  
The protector monitors the power amplifier tempera-  
ture and activates when the temperature becomes ex-  
tremely high.  
• Power down transmission  
Reduces the transmit output power to 100 W.  
“LMT” appears beside the transmit indicator during  
transmit.  
• Transmission inhibit  
Deactivates the transmitter.  
The transmit indicator is displayed in gray during  
transmit.  
When the protector is activated, wait until the power  
amplifier cools down using the transceiver in stand-  
by or receive condition.  
NOTE: DO NOT turn the transceiver power OFF  
when the protector is ON. If you do, the cooling fan  
will not function and it will take longer to cool the  
transceiver.  
Check the temperature  
The power amplifier temperature can be monitored in  
the multi-function meter, TEMP gauge.  
■ Screen saver function  
The IC-7700 has a screen saver function to protect the  
LCD from the “burn-in” effect.  
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.  
e Push [F-3•DISP] to enter display set mode.  
r Push [F-1•Y]/[F-2•Z] several times to select the  
“Screen Saver Function” item.  
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired time pe-  
riod for the screen saver activation from 15, 30,  
60 min. and OFF.  
• Deactivate the screen saver with “OFF” selection.  
y Push [F-2•Z] to select the “Screen Saver Type”  
item.  
Main dial  
EXIT/SET  
∫
√
DISP  
F-3  
PREVIEW  
F-5  
SET  
F-7  
F-1  
F-2  
u Rotate the main dial to select the screen saver type  
from “Bound,” “Rotation” and “Twist.”  
• Push and hold [F-5•PREVIEW] to display the indication  
for your reference.  
i Push EXIT/SET twice to exit set mode.  
13-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROL COMMAND  
Section 14  
■ Remote jack (CI-V) information ……………………………………… 14-2  
D CI-V connection example ………………………………………… 14-2  
D Data format ………………………………………………………… 14-2  
D Command table …………………………………………………… 14-3  
D To send/read memory contents …………………………………… 14-9  
D Band stacking register …………………………………………… 14-9  
D Codes for memory keyer contents ……………………………… 14-9  
D Codes for memory name, opening message  
and CLOCK2 name contents ……………………………………… 14-9  
D Offset frequency setting ………………………………………… 14-10  
D Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency setting ………………… 14-10  
D SSB transmission passband width setting …………………… 14-10  
D Color setting ……………………………………………………… 14-10  
D Bandscope edge frequency setting …………………………… 14-10  
D Data mode with filter width setting ……………………………… 14-10  
D Antenna memory setting ………………………………………… 14-10  
14-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 CONTROL COMMAND  
■ Remote jack (CI-V) information  
D
CI-V connection example  
The transceiver can be connected through an optional  
CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER to a PC equipped with an  
RS-232C port. The Icom Communications Interface-V  
(CI-V) controls the transceiver.  
IC-7700  
9–15 V DC  
Up to 4 Icom CI-V transceivers or receivers can be  
connected to a PC equipped with an RS-232C port.  
See p. 12-17 for setting the CI-V condition using set  
mode.  
personal  
computer  
ct- 17  
mini-plug cable  
D
Data format  
The CI-V system can be operated using the following  
data formats. Data formats differ according to com-  
mand numbers. A data area or sub command is added  
for some commands.  
Controller to IC-7700  
OK message to controller  
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
FE FE 74  
E0  
Cn  
Sc  
Data area  
FD  
FE FE E0  
74  
FB  
FD  
FE FE E0  
74  
Cn  
Sc  
Data area  
FD  
FE FE E0  
74  
FA  
FD  
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
IC-7700 to controller  
NG message to controller  
14-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROL COMMAND 14  
D
Command table  
Command  
Sub command  
Description  
Send frequency data  
Send mode data  
Command  
Sub command  
Description  
00  
01  
—
11  
—
Select/read attenuator  
(0=OFF; 1=6 dB; 2=12 dB;  
3=18 dB)  
Same as  
command 06  
12  
00 + RX ANT Select/read ANT1 selection  
(00=RX ANT OFF;  
01=RX ANT ON)  
01 + RX ANT Select/read ANT2 selection  
(00=RX ANT OFF;  
01=RX ANT ON)  
02 + RX ANT Select/read ANT3 selection  
(00=RX ANT OFF;  
01=RX ANT ON)  
03 + RX ANT Select/read ANT4 selection  
(00=RX ANT OFF;  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
—
—
—
—
Read band edge frequencies  
Read operating frequency  
Read operating mode  
Set operating frequency  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
07  
08  
12  
13  
Select LSB  
Select USB  
Select AM  
Select CW  
Select RTTY  
Select FM  
Select CW-R  
Select RTTY-R  
Select PSK  
Select PSK-R  
01=RX ANT ON)  
13  
14  
00  
01  
02  
Announce with voice synthesizer  
(00=all data; 01=frequency and  
S-meter level; 02=receive mode)  
01 + Level data [AF] level setting  
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW)  
02 + Level data [RF] level setting  
(0=max. CCW to 255=11 o’clock)  
03 + Level data [SQL] level setting  
(0=11 o’clock to 255=max. CW)  
05 + Level data [APF] level setting  
(0=Pitch–550 Hz, 128=Pitch,  
255=Pitch+550 Hz; 10 Hz steps)  
06 + Level data [NR] level setting  
(0=min. to 255=max.)  
07 + Level data Inside [TWIN PBT] setting or IF  
shift setting (0=max. CCW,  
128=center, 255=max. CW)  
08 + Level data Outside [TWIN PBT] setting  
(0=max. CCW, 128=center,  
255=max. CW)  
09 + Level data [CW PITCH] setting  
(0=300 Hz, 128=600 Hz,  
255=900 Hz; 5 Hz steps)  
0A + Level data [RF POWER] setting (0=max.  
CCW to 255=max. CW)  
0B + Level data [MIC] setting (0=max. CCW to  
255=max. CW)  
0C + Level data [KEY SPEED] setting (0=max.  
CCW to 255=max. CW)  
0D + Level data [NOTCH] setting  
(0=low freq. to 255=high freq.)  
0E + Level data [COMP] setting  
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW)  
0F + Level data [DELAY] setting  
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW)  
11 + Level data [AGC] control setting  
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW)  
12 + Level data [NB] control setting  
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW)  
13 + Level data [DIGI-SEL] setting  
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW)  
14 + Level data [DRIVE] setting  
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW)  
15 + Level data [MONI GAIN] setting (0=max.  
CCW to 255=max. CW)  
07  
08  
—
00  
01  
A0  
B0  
Select VFO mode  
Select VFO-A  
Select VFO-B  
Equalize VFO-A and VFO-B  
Exchange VFO-A and VFO-B  
—
Select memory mode  
Select memory channel  
*P1=0100, P2=0101  
0001–0101*  
09  
0A  
0B  
0E  
—
—
—
Memory write  
Memory to VFO  
Memory clear  
00  
01  
02  
03  
12  
13  
22  
23  
A1–A7  
Scan stop  
Programmed/memory scan start  
Programmed scan start  
∂F scan start  
Fine programmed scan start  
Fine ∂F scan start  
Memory scan start  
Select memory scan start  
Set ∂F scan span (A1=±5 kHz;  
A2=±10 kHz; A3=±20 kHz;  
A4=±50 kHz; A5=±100 kHz;  
A6=±500 kHz; A7=±1 MHz)  
Set as non-select channel  
Set as select channel  
(1=★1; 2=★2; 3=★3; when no  
data command is specified, the  
previously set number or “★1” is  
selected)  
B0  
B1  
B2  
Set the number for select memory  
scan (0=ALL; 1=★1; 2=★2; 3=★3)  
Set scan resume OFF  
D0  
D3  
Set scan resume ON  
0F  
10  
00  
01  
Turn the split function OFF  
Turn the split function ON  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
Select 10 Hz (1 Hz) tuning step  
Select 100 Hz tuning step  
Select 1 kHz tuning step  
Select 5 kHz tuning step  
Select 9 kHz tuning step  
Select 10 kHz tuning step  
Select 12.5 kHz tuning step  
Select 20 kHz tuning step  
Select 25 kHz tuning step  
16 + Level data [VOX GAIN] setting (0=max.  
CCW to 255=max. CW)  
17 + Level data [ANTI VOX] setting  
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW)  
14-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 CONTROL COMMAND  
D
Command table (continued)  
Command  
Sub command  
Description  
Command  
Sub command  
Description  
14  
18 + Level data [CONTRAST] setting (0=max.  
CCW to 255=max. CW)  
19 + Level data [BRIGHT] setting  
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW)  
1A  
03  
Send/read the selected filter width  
(SSB, CW, PSK: 0=50 Hz to  
40=3600 Hz; RTTY: 0=50 Hz to  
31=2700 Hz; AM: 0=200 Hz to  
49=10 kHz)  
Send/read the selected AGC time  
constant (0=OFF, 1=0.1/0.3 sec.  
to 13=6.0/8.0 sec.)  
15  
01  
02  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Read squelch condition  
Read S-meter level  
Read RF power meter  
Read SWR meter  
Read ALC meter  
Read COMP meter  
Read VD meter  
Read ID meter  
04  
050001  
Send/read SSB RX HPF/LPF  
(HPF: 0=Through, 1=100 to  
20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to  
24=2400, 25=Through)  
050002  
050003  
050004  
Send/read SSB RX Tone (Bass)  
level (0 =–5 to 10=+5)  
Send/read SSB RX Tone (Treble)  
level (0=–5 to 10=+5)  
Send/read AM RX HPF/LPF  
(HPF: 0=Through, 1=100 to  
20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to  
24=2400, 25=Through)  
Send/read AM RX Tone (Bass)  
level (0 =–5 to 10=+5)  
Send/read AM RX Tone (Treble)  
level (0=–5 to 10=+5)  
Send/read FM RX HPF/LPF  
(HPF: 0=Through, 1=100 to  
20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to  
24=2400, 25=Through)  
Send/read FM RX Tone (Bass)  
level (0 =–5 to 10=+5)  
Send/read FM RX Tone (Treble)  
level (0=–5 to 10=+5)  
Send/read CW RX HPF/LPF  
(HPF: 0=Through, 1=100 to  
20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to  
24=2400, 25=Through)  
Send/read RTTY RX HPF/LPF  
(HPF: 0=Through, 1=100 to  
20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to  
24=2400, 25=Through)  
Send/read PSK RX HPF/LPF  
(HPF: 0=Through, 1=100 to  
20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to  
24=2400, 25=Through)  
Send/read SSB TX Tone (Bass)  
level (0 =–5 to 10=+5)  
Send/read SSB TX Tone (Treble)  
level (0=–5 to 10=+5)  
Send/read AM TX Tone (Bass)  
level (0 =–5 to 10=+5)  
Send/read AM TX Tone (Treble)  
level (0=–5 to 10=+5)  
Send/read FM TX Tone (Bass)  
level (0 =–5 to 10=+5)  
16  
02  
Send/read Preamp setting  
(0=OFF; 1=preamp 1;  
2=preamp 2)  
Send/read AGC selection  
(0=OFF; 1=Slow; 2=Mid; 3=Fast)  
Send/read noise blanker setting  
(0=OFF; 1=ON)  
Send/read Audio peak filter set-  
ting for CW mode  
(APF type=SHARP: 0=OFF;  
1=320 Hz; 2=160 Hz; 3=80 Hz,  
APF type=SOFT: 0=OFF;  
1=WIDE; 2=MID; 3=NAR)  
Send/read noise reduction setting  
(0=OFF; 1=ON)  
Send/read auto notch setting  
(0=OFF; 1=ON)  
Send/read repeater tone setting  
(0=OFF; 1=ON)  
Send/read tone squelch setting  
(0=OFF; 1=ON)  
Send/read speech compressor  
setting (0=OFF; 1=ON)  
Send/read monitor setting  
(0=OFF; 1=ON)  
Send/read VOX function setting  
(0=OFF; 1=ON)  
Send/read Break-in function set-  
ting (0=OFF; 1=semi break-in;  
2=full break-in)  
Send/read manual notch setting  
(0=OFF; 1=ON)  
Send/read VSC setting  
(0=OFF; 1=ON)  
Send/read Manual AGC setting  
(0=OFF; 1=ON)  
Send/read DIGI-SEL setting  
(0=OFF; 1=ON)  
12  
22  
32  
050005  
050006  
050007  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
050008  
050009  
050010  
050011  
050012  
48  
4C  
4D  
4E  
4F  
50  
53  
050013  
050014  
050015  
050016  
050017  
050018  
050019  
050020  
050021  
050022  
Send/read twin peak filter setting  
(0=OFF; 1=ON)  
Send/read dial lock function set-  
ting (0=OFF; 1=ON)  
Send/read RX antenna connector  
setting (0=OFF; 1=ON)  
Send/read FM TX Tone (Treble)  
level (0=–5 to 10=+5)  
Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for  
wide (see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for  
mid. (see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for  
narrow (see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read speech level  
19  
1A  
00  
00  
Read the transceiver ID  
Send/read memory contents (see  
p. 14-9 for details)  
Send/read band stacking register  
contents (see p. 14-9 for details)  
Send/read memory keyer con-  
tents (see p. 14-9 for details)  
01  
02  
(0=0% to 255=100%)  
14-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROL COMMAND 14  
D
Command table (continued)  
Command  
Sub command  
Description  
Command  
Sub command  
Description  
1A  
050023  
Send/read CW side tone gain  
(0=min. to 255=max.)  
Send/read CW side tone gain limit  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read beep gain  
(0=min. to 255=max.)  
Send/read beep gain limit  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read headphones output  
ratio (0=0.60 to 255=1.40)  
Send/read AF output level to ACC  
(0=0% to 255=100%)  
1A  
050049  
Send/read memory name indica-  
tion setting (0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read audio peak filter width  
pop-up indication setting  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read manual notch width  
pop-up indication setting  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
050024  
050025  
050026  
050027  
050028  
050029  
050030  
050031  
050032  
050050  
050051  
050052  
Send/read screen saver set  
(0=OFF, 1=15 min., 2=30 min.,  
3=60 min.)  
050053  
050054  
050055  
050056  
050057  
050058  
Set/read screen saver type  
(0=Bound, 1=Rotation, 2=Twist)  
Send/read output signal setting for  
external display (0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read synchronous pulse  
level setting (0=L, 1=H)  
Send/read opening message indi-  
cation (0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read opening message con-  
tents (see p. 14-9 for details)  
Send/read date  
(20000101=1st Jan. 2000 to  
20991231=31st Dec. 2099)  
Send/read time  
Send/read S/P DIF output level  
(0=0% to 255=100%)  
Send/read MOD output level to  
ACC (0=0% to 255=100%)  
Send/read S/P DIF MOD output  
level (0=0% to 255=100%)  
Send/read MOD input connector  
during DATA OFF (0=MIC;  
1=ACC; 2=MIC/ACC; 3=S/P DIF)  
Send/read MOD input connector  
during DATA1  
(0=MIC; 1=ACC; 2=MIC/ACC;  
3=S/P DIF)  
Send/read MOD input connector  
during DATA2  
050033  
050034  
050035  
050059  
050060  
050061  
(0000=00:00 to 2359=23:59)  
Send/read CLOCK2 function  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read offset time for CLOCK2  
(240001=–24:00 to  
(0=MIC; 1=ACC; 2=MIC/ACC;  
3=S/P DIF)  
Send/read MOD input connector  
during DATA3  
240000=+24:00)  
(0=MIC; 1=ACC; 2=MIC/ACC;  
3=S/P DIF)  
Send/read relay type selection  
(0=Lead, 1=MOS-FET)  
Send/read external meter output  
selection  
(0=Auto, 1=S, 2=Po, 3=SWR,  
4=ALC, 5=COMP, 6=VD, 7=ID)  
Send/read external meter output  
level (0=0% to 255=100%)  
Send/read reference signal in/out  
setting (0=OFF, 1=IN, 2=OUT)  
Send/read reference signal fre-  
quency setting  
050062  
050063  
050064  
050065  
050066  
050067  
050068  
Send/read CLOCK2 name  
(up to 3-character; see p. 14-9)  
Send/read calibration marker  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read confirmation beep  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read band edge beep  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read beep audio frequency  
(50=500 Hz to 200=2000 Hz)  
Send/read quick split set  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
050036  
050037  
050038  
050039  
050040  
Send/read FM split offset –9.999  
to +9.999 MHz for HF  
(0=0% to 255=100%)  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read FM split offset –9.999  
to +9.999 MHz for 50 MHz  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read split lock set  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read tuner auto start set  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read PTT tune set  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
050041  
050042  
050043  
050044  
Send/read LCD unit backlight  
brightness (0=0% to 255=100%)  
Send/read switch indicator bright-  
ness (0=0% to 255=100%)  
Send/read screen image type  
(0=A, 1=B)  
Send/read frequency readout font  
(0=Basic (1), 1=Basic (2), 2=Italic,  
3=Round, 4=Slim)  
Send/read meter response setting  
(0=SLOW, 1=MID, 2=FAST)  
Send/read meter type  
(0=Standard, 1=Edgewise, 2=Bar)  
Send/read meter type during wide  
screen or mini scope indication  
(0=Edgewise, 1=Bar)  
050069  
050070  
050071  
050072  
050073  
050074  
050075  
050045  
050046  
050047  
Send/read transverter set  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read transverter offset  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read RTTY mark frequency  
(0=1275 Hz, 1=1615 Hz,  
2=2125 Hz)  
050048  
Send/read peak hold set for Bar  
meter (0=OFF, 1=ON)  
050076  
Send/read RTTY shift width  
(0=170 Hz, 1=200 Hz, 2=425 Hz)  
14-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 CONTROL COMMAND  
D
Command table (continued)  
Command  
Sub command  
Description  
Command  
Sub command  
Description  
1A  
050077  
Send/read RTTY keying polarity  
(0=Normal, 1=Reverse)  
Send/read PSK tone frequency  
(0=1000 Hz, 1=1500 Hz,  
2=2000 Hz)  
Send/read speech language  
(0=English, 1=Japanese)  
Send/read speech speed  
(0=Slow, 1=Fast)  
Send/read S-level speech  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read speech with a mode  
switch operation (0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read memo pad numbers  
(0=5 ch, 1=10 ch)  
Send/read main dial auto TS  
(0=OFF, 1=Low, 2=High)  
Send/read mic. up/down speed  
(0=Low, 1=High)  
Send/read quick RIT/∂TX clear  
function (0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read SSB notch operation  
(0=Auto, 1=Manual,  
1A  
050102  
Send/read subnet mask  
(1=128.0.0.0 to  
30=255.255.255.252)  
Send/read scope indication during  
TX (0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read scope max. hold  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read scope center frequen-  
cy set (0=Filter center, 1=Carrier  
point center, 2=Carrier point cen-  
ter (Abs. Freq.))  
Send/read waveform color for  
receiving signal  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read waveform color for  
max. hold  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read scope sweep speed  
for ±2.5 kHz span  
(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast)  
Send/read scope sweep speed  
for ±5 kHz span  
(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast)  
Send/read scope sweep speed  
for ±10 kHz span  
(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast)  
Send/read scope sweep speed  
for ±25 kHz span  
(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast)  
Send/read scope sweep speed  
for ±50 kHz span  
(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast)  
Send/read scope sweep speed  
for ±100 kHz span  
(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast)  
Send/read scope sweep speed  
for ±250 kHz span  
(0=Slow, 1=Mid., 2=Fast)  
Send/read scope edge frequen-  
cies for 0.03 to 1.60 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read scope edge frequen-  
cies for 1.60 to 2.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read scope edge frequen-  
cies for 2.00 to 6.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read scope edge frequen-  
cies for 6.00 to 8.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read scope edge frequen-  
cies for 8.00 to 11.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read scope edge frequen-  
cies for 11.00 to 15.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read scope edge frequen-  
cies for 15.00 to 20.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read scope edge frequen-  
cies for 20.00 to 22.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read scope edge frequen-  
cies for 22.00 to 26.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
050078  
050103  
050104  
050105  
050079  
050080  
050081  
050082  
050083  
050084  
050085  
050086  
050087  
050106  
050107  
050108  
050109  
050110  
050111  
050112  
050113  
050114  
050115  
050116  
050117  
050118  
050119  
050120  
050121  
050122  
050123  
2=Auto/Manual)  
Send/read AM notch operation  
(0=Auto, 1=Manual,  
050088  
2=Auto/Manual)  
050089  
050090  
050091  
050192  
050093  
050094  
050095  
050096  
050097  
Send/read DIGI-SEL control func-  
tion (0=DIGI-SEL, 1=APF)  
Send/read SSB/CW synchronous  
tuning function (0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read CW normal side set  
(0=LSB, 1=USB)  
Set/read APF type  
(0=SHARP, 1=SOFT)  
Send/read external keypad set  
for voice memory (0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read external keypad set  
for keyer memory (0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read CI-V transceive set  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read RS-232C function  
(0=CI-V, 1=Decode)  
Send/read RS-232C decode  
Baud rate (0=300, 1=1200,  
2=4800, 3=9600, 4=19200)  
Send/read keyboard type  
(00=English, 01=Japanese,  
02=United Kingdom, 03=French,  
04=French (Canadian),  
05=German, 06=Portuguese,  
07=Portuguese (Brazilian),  
08=Spanish, 09=Spanish (Latin  
American), 10=Italian)  
Send/read keyboard repeat delay  
(10=100 msec. to  
100=1000 msec.)  
Send/read keyboard repeat rate  
(0=2.0 cps to 31=30.0 cps)  
Send/read IP address set  
(0000000000000001=0.0.0.1 to  
0255025502550254=255.255.25  
5.254)  
050098  
050099  
050100  
050101  
14-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROL COMMAND 14  
D
Command table (continued)  
Command  
Sub command  
Description  
Command  
Sub command  
Description  
1A  
050124  
Send/read scope edge frequen-  
cies for 26.00 to 30.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read scope edge frequen-  
cies for 30.00 to 45.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read scope edge frequen-  
cies for 45.00 to 60.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read auto voice monitor set  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read voice memory short  
play time (3=3 sec. to 10=10 sec.)  
Send/read voice memory normal  
record time  
(5= 5 sec. to 15=15 sec.)  
Send/read contest number style  
(0=Normal, 1=190→ANO,  
2=190→ANT, 3=90→NO,  
4=90→NT)  
Send/read count up trigger chan-  
nel (1=M1, 2=M2, 3=M3, 4=M4)  
Send/read present number  
(1–9999)  
Send/read CW keyer repeat time  
(1=1 sec. to 60=60 sec.)  
Send/read CW keyer dot/dash  
ratio (28=1:1:2.8 to 45=1:1:4.5)  
Send/read rise time  
1A  
050151  
050152  
050153  
Send/read time stamp text font  
color (see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read text font color in TX  
buffer (see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read FFT scope averaging  
set for PSK decoder  
050125  
050126  
(0=OFF, 1=2, 2=3, 3=4)  
050154  
Send/read FFT scope waveform  
color set for PSK decoder  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read PSK AFC function tun-  
ing range (0=±8 Hz, 1=±15 Hz)  
Send/read PSK time stamp set  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read clock selection for time  
stamp (0=Local time, 1=CLOCK2)  
Send/read frequency stamp  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read received text font color  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read transmitted text font  
color (see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read time stamp text font  
color (see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read text font color in TX  
buffer (see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read scan speed  
(0=Low, 1=High)  
Send/read scan resume  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read antenna selection for  
0.03 to 1.60 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read antenna selection for  
1.60 to 2.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read antenna selection for  
2.00 to 6.00 MHz band  
050127  
050128  
050129  
050155  
050156  
050157  
050158  
050159  
050160  
050161  
050162  
050163  
050164  
050165  
050130  
050131  
050132  
050133  
050134  
050135  
(0=2 msec., 1=4 msec.,  
2=6 msec., 3=8 msec.)  
050136  
050137  
050138  
050139  
Send/read paddle polarity  
(0=Normal, 1=Reverse)  
Send/read keyer type (0=Straight,  
1=Bug-key, 2=ELEC-Key)  
Send/read mic. up/down keyer set  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read FFT scope averaging  
set for RTTY decoder  
(0=OFF, 1=2, 2=3, 3=4)  
Send/read FFT scope waveform  
color set for RTTY decoder  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read RTTY decode USOS  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
050166  
050167  
050168  
050169  
050170  
050171  
050172  
050173  
050174  
050175  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read antenna selection for  
6.00 to 8.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read antenna selection for  
8.00 to 11.00 MHz band  
050140  
050141  
050142  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read RTTY decode new line  
code  
Send/read antenna selection for  
11.00 to 15.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read antenna selection for  
15.00 to 20.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read antenna selection for  
20.00 to 22.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read antenna selection for  
22.00 to 26.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read antenna selection for  
26.00 to 30.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read antenna selection for  
30.00 to 45.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
(0=CR,LF,CR+LF, 1=CR+LF)  
Send/read RTTY diddle (0=OFF,  
1=Blank, 2=LTRS (Letter code))  
Send/read RTTY TX USOS  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read RTTY auto CR+LF by  
TX (0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read RTTY time stamp set  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read clock selection for time  
stamp (0=Local time, 1=CLOCK2)  
Send/read frequency stamp  
(0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read received text font color  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read transmitted text font  
color (see p. 14-10 for details)  
050143  
050144  
050145  
050146  
050147  
050148  
050149  
050150  
14-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 CONTROL COMMAND  
D
Command table (continued)  
Command  
Sub command  
Description  
1A  
050176  
Send/read antenna selection for  
45.00 to 60.00 MHz band  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
Send/read antenna temporary  
memory set (0=OFF, 1=ON)  
Send/read antenna selection  
(0=OFF, 1=Manual, 2=Auto)  
Send/read usage for ANT2  
(0=OFF, 1=TX/RX)  
Send/read usage for ANT3  
(0=OFF, 1=TX/RX)  
Send/read usage for ANT4  
(0=OFF, 1=TX/RX, 2= RX)  
Send/read VOX delay (0=0.0 sec.  
to 20=2.0 sec.)  
050177  
050178  
050179  
050180  
050181  
050182  
050183  
Send/read VOX voice delay  
(0=OFF, 1=Short, 2=Mid.,  
3=Long)  
050184  
050185  
Send/read NB depth (0=1 to 9=10)  
Send/read NB width  
(0=0 to 255=255)  
06  
07  
Send/read DATA mode with filter  
set (see p. 14-10 for detail)  
Send/read SSB transmit band-  
width (0=WIDE, 1=MID, 2=NAR)  
08  
09  
0A  
Send/read DSP filter shape  
(0= Sharp, 1= Soft)  
Send/read roofing filter set  
(0=3 kHz, 1=6 kHz, 2=15 kHz)  
Send/read manual notch width  
(0=Wide, 1=Mid., 2=Nar.)  
1B  
1C  
00  
01  
Send/read repeater tone frequen-  
cy (see p. 14-10 for details)  
Set/read TSQL tone frequency  
(see p. 14-10 for details)  
00  
01  
Send/read the transceiver’s condi-  
tion (0=Rx; 1=Tx)  
Send/read antenna tuner condi-  
tion  
(0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=Start tuning or  
while tuning)  
14-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROL COMMAND 14  
• Character’s code  
Character ASCII code  
D
To send/read memory contents  
Description  
Numerals  
When sending or reading memory contents, additional  
codes must be added to append the memory channel  
as follows.  
0–9  
30–39  
41–5A  
20  
A–Z  
Alphabetical characters  
Word space  
➥ Additional code: 0000–0101 (0100=P1, 0101=P2)  
space  
/
?
,
2F  
Symbol  
3F  
Symbol  
D
Band stacking register  
2C  
Symbol  
To send or read the desired band stacking register’s  
contents, combined codes of the frequency band and  
register codes as follows are used.  
.
2E  
Symbol  
^
✱
5E  
e.g., to send BT, enter ^4254  
2A  
Inserts contest number (can be  
used for 1 channel only)  
For example, when sending/reading the oldest con-  
tents in the 21 MHz band, the code “0703” is used.  
• Frequency band code  
Code Frequency band Frequency range (unit: MHz)  
D
Codes for memory name, opening  
message and CLOCK2 name contents  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
12  
1.8  
3.5  
7
1.800000– 1.999999  
3.400000– 4.099999  
6.900000– 7.499999  
9.900000–10.499999  
13.900000–14.499999  
17.900000–18.499999  
20.900000–21.499999  
24.400000–25.099999  
28.000000–29.999999  
50.000000–54.000000  
Other than above  
To send or read the desired memory name settings,  
the character codes, instructed codes for memory  
keyer contents as above, and follows are used.  
• Character’s code— Alphabetical characters  
10  
14  
18  
Character  
ASCII code  
Character  
ASCII code  
21  
a–z  
61–7A  
—
—
24  
28  
50  
• Character’s code— Symbols  
GENE  
Character  
ASCII code  
Character  
ASCII code  
!
$
&
?
’
21  
24  
26  
3F  
27  
2B  
3A  
3D  
3E  
29  
5D  
7D  
5F  
40  
#
%
¥
”
23  
25  
5C  
22  
60  
2D  
3B  
3C  
28  
5B  
7B  
7C  
7E  
• Register code  
Code  
01  
Registered number  
1 (latest)  
2
02  
`
03  
3 (oldest)  
+
:
–
;
=
>
)
<
(
D
Codes for memory keyer contents  
[
To send or read the desired memory keyer contents,  
the channel and character codes as follows are used.  
]
{
}
|
–
• Channel code  
_
@
Code  
01  
Channel number  
M1  
M2  
M3  
M4  
02  
03  
04  
14-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 CONTROL COMMAND  
D
D
Offset frequency setting  
Color setting  
The following data sequence is used when sending or  
reading the offset frequency setting.  
The following data sequence is used when sending or  
reading the color setting.  
q
w
e
r
t
y
q
w
e
r*  
0
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
X
0
X
X
0
X
XX  
R (Red)  
G (Green)  
B (Blue)  
Using 0000–0255 for each color element.  
D
Bandscope edge frequency setting  
*No need to enter for transverter offset frequency setting.  
†Transverter offset only; Fix to ‘0’ for split offset setting.  
The following data sequence is used when sending or  
reading the bandscope edge frequency setting.  
q
w
e
r
t
y
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
D
Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency  
setting  
The following data sequence is used when sending or  
reading the tone frequency setting.  
q*  
w
e
0
0
X
X
X
X
Lower edge  
Higher edge  
D
Data mode with filter width setting  
The following data sequence is used when sending or  
reading the data mode with filter width setting.  
*Not necessary when setting a frequency.  
q
w
X
X
X
X
D
SSB transmission passband width  
setting  
00=Data mode OFF  
01=FIL1  
02=FIL2  
The following data sequence is used when sending or  
reading the SSB transmission passband width setting.  
03=FIL3  
00=Data mode OFF  
01=Data mode 1 (D1)  
02=Data mode 2 (D2)  
03=Data mode 3 (D3)  
X
X
Lower edge: 0=100 Hz  
1=200 Hz  
2=300 Hz  
3=500 Hz  
Higher edge: 0=2500 Hz  
1=2700 Hz  
D
Antenna memory setting  
The following codes are used when sending or read-  
ing the antenna memory setting.  
2=2800 Hz  
3=2900 Hz  
0=ANT1, 1=ANT2, 2=ANT3, 3=ANT4,  
4*=TX: ANT1, RX: ANT4, 5*=TX: ANT2, RX: ANT4,  
6*=TX: ANT3, RX: ANT4  
*RX should be selected for ANT4  
14-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS  
Section 15  
■ Specifications ………………………………………………………… 15-2  
D General ……………………………………………………………… 15-2  
D Transmitter ………………………………………………………… 15-2  
D Receiver …………………………………………………………… 15-3  
D Antenna tuner ……………………………………………………… 15-3  
■ Options ………………………………………………………………… 15-4  
15-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS  
■ Specifications  
D
General  
• Frequency coverage (unit: MHz)  
Receiver  
:
0.030000–60.000000*1  
Transmitter  
1.800000–1.999999*2, 3.500000–3.999999*2,  
5.330500*3, 5.346500*3, 5.366500*3, 5.371500*3,  
5.403500*3, 7.000000–7.300000*2,  
10.100000–10.150000*2, 14.000000–14.350000*2,  
18.068000–18.168000*2, 21.000000–21.450000*2,  
24.890000–24.990000*2, 28.000000–29.700000*2,  
50.000000–54.000000*2  
*1Some frequency ranges are not guaranteed.  
*2Depending on versions.  
*3USA version only.  
• Operating mode  
• Number of memory channels  
• Antenna connector  
• Operating temperature range  
• Frequency stability  
: USB, LSB, CW, RTTY, PSK31, AM, FM  
: 101 (99 regular, 2 scan edges)  
: SO-239×4 (antenna impedance: 50 Ω)  
: 0˚C to +50˚C; +32˚F to +122˚F  
: Less than ±0.05 ppm (approx. 5 min. after from turn  
the main power, [I/O], ON, 0–50˚C; 32–122˚F)  
: 1 Hz  
• Frequency resolution  
• Power supply requirement  
• Power consumption  
: 85–265 V AC (universal input)  
:
Receive  
Stand-by  
Max. audio  
at 200 W  
200 VA typical  
210 VA typical  
800 VA  
Transmit  
• Dimensions (projections not included)  
• Weight  
: 425×149×437 mm; 1623⁄32×57⁄8×177⁄32 in  
: Approx. 22.5 kg; 50 lb  
• ACC 1 connectors  
• ACC 2 connectors  
• Display*  
• EXT-DISPLAY connector  
• CI-V connector  
: 8-pin DIN connector  
: 7-pin DIN connector  
: 7-inch (diagonal) TFT color LCD (800×480)  
: D-sub 15S  
: 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (1⁄8″)  
: D-sub 9-pin  
• RS-232C connector  
• USB connector  
: USB (Universal Serial Bus)1.1/2.0×2  
D
Transmitter  
• Transmit output power  
:
SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK31, FM  
5–200 W  
AM  
5–50 W  
• Modulation system  
:
SSB  
AM  
FM  
P.S.N. modulation  
Low power modulation  
Phase modulation  
: More than 60 dB (HF bands)  
More than 70 dB (50 MHz band)  
: More than 63 dB  
: More than 80 dB  
: ±9.999 kHz  
• Spurious emission  
• Carrier suppression  
• Unwanted side-band suppression  
∂
•
TX variable range  
• Microphone connector  
• ELEC-KEY connector  
• KEY connector  
• RELAY connector  
• ALC connector  
: 8-pin connector (600 Ω)  
: 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (1⁄4″)  
: 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (1⁄4″)  
: Phono (RCA)  
: Phono (RCA)  
15-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS 15  
D
Receiver  
• Receive system  
: Double conversion superheterodyne system  
• Intermediate frequencies  
:
1st  
2nd  
64.455 MHz  
36 kHz  
• Sensitivity (typical)  
:
SSB, CW, RTTY (BW=2.4 kHz, 10 dB S/N)  
0.100000– 1.799999 MHz 0.5 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)  
1.800000–29.990000 MHz 0.16 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)  
50.000000–54.000000 MHz 0.13 µV (pre-amp 2 ON)  
AM (BW=6 kHz, 10 dB S/N)  
0.100000– 1.799999 MHz 6.3 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)  
1.800000–29.990000 MHz 2 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)  
50.000000–54.000000 MHz 1 µV (pre-amp 2 ON)  
FM (BW=15 kHz, 12 dB SINAD)  
28.000000–29.990000 MHz 0.5 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)  
50.000000–54.000000 MHz 0.32 µV (pre-amp 2 ON)  
• Internal Modulate Distortion (typical)  
: Dynamic range 105 dB  
(at 14.100 MHz, 100 kHz separation, pre-amp OFF,  
CW mode; BW=500 Hz)  
• Selectivity  
:
SSB, RTTY (BW=2.4 kHz)  
More than 2.4 kHz/–3 dB  
Less than 3.6 kHz/–60 dB  
More than 500 Hz/–3 dB  
Less than 700 Hz/–60 dB  
More than 6.0 kHz/–3 dB  
Less than 15.0 kHz/–60 dB  
More than 12.0 kHz/–6 dB  
Less than 20.0 kHz/–60 dB  
: More than 70 dB (except IF through on 50 MHz band)  
:
CW (BW=500 Hz)  
AM (BW=6 kHz)  
FM (BW=15 kHz)  
• Spurious and image rejection ratio  
• Squelch sensitivity (pre-amp OFF)  
SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK31  
FM  
Less than 5.6 µV  
Less than 1 µV  
• RIT variable range  
: ±9.999 kHz  
• Audio output power  
• PHONES connector  
• EXT-SP connectors  
: More than 2.6 W at 10% distortion with an 8 Ω load  
: 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (1⁄4″)  
: 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (1⁄8″)/8 Ω  
D
Antenna tuner  
• Matching impedance range  
: 16.7 to 150 Ω unbalanced  
(HF bands; VSWR better than 3:1)  
20 to 125 Ω unbalanced  
(50 MHz band; VSWR better than 2.5:1)  
: 8 W (HF bands)  
• Minimum operating input  
15 W (50 MHz band)  
• Tuning accuracy  
: VSWR 1.5:1 or less  
• Insertion loss (after tuning)  
: Less than 1.0 dB  
*The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections that appear as small or dark spots. This is not a malfunction  
or defect, but a normal characteristic of LCD displays.  
Spurious signals may be received near the following frequencies. These are made in the internal circuit and does  
not indicate a transceiver malfunction.  
• 0.150 MHz  
• 10.490 MHz  
Spurious waveforms may be displayed on the spectrum scope screen regardless of the transceiver’s condition  
(Tx or Rx). They are made in the scope circuit. This does not indicate a transceiver malfunction.  
All stated specifications are typical and subject to change without notice or obligation.  
15-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS  
■ Options  
• IC-PW1/EURO HF/50 MHz ALL BAND 1 kW LINEAR AMPLIFIER  
Full-duty-cycle 1 kW linear amplifier including an auto-  
matic antenna tuner. Has automatic tuning and band  
selection capability when used with an Icom trans-  
ceiver. Full break-in (QSK) operation. The  
amplifier/power supply unit and the remote control unit  
are separate.  
• SM-20 DESKTOP MICROPHONE  
Unidirectional, electret microphone for base station  
operation. Includes [UP]/[DOWN] switches and a low  
cut function.  
• CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER  
For remote transceiver control using a PC. You can  
change frequencies, operating mode, memory chan-  
nels, etc. (software is not included)  
• SP-20 EXTERNAL SPEAKER  
4 audio filters; headphone jack; can connect to 2  
transceivers.  
• Input impedance  
: 8 Ω  
• Max. input power : 5 W  
• HM-36 HAND MICROPHONE  
Hand microphone equipped with [UP]/[DOWN] switch-  
es.  
15-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
Section 16  
■ General ………………………………………………………………… 16-2  
■ Caution ………………………………………………………………… 16-2  
■ Preparation …………………………………………………………… 16-3  
D Firmware and firm utility …………………………………………… 16-3  
D File downloading …………………………………………………… 16-3  
■ Firmware update— USB-Memory …………………………………… 16-4  
■ Firmware update— PC ……………………………………………… 16-6  
D Connections ………………………………………………………… 16-6  
D IP address setting ………………………………………………… 16-7  
D Updating from the PC ……………………………………………… 16-8  
16-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
■ General  
The IC-7700’s firmware can be updated if desired. By  
updating the firmware, new function(s) can be added  
and the improvement of performance parameters can  
be made.  
2 methods of firmware update are available: one uses  
the USB-Memory, and the other uses a PC. You can  
choose either methods according to your PC capabili-  
ties.  
At least one available USB (2.0 or 1.1) port is  
required to copy the downloaded firmware file.  
An Ethernet card/board (10 BASE-T/100 BASE TX  
compatible) is required when updating the firmware  
from the PC.  
The USB hub and Ethernet card/board are not sup-  
plied by Icom.  
Ask your PC dealer about a USB hub and an  
Ethernet card/board for details.  
• When only one PC connected to the Internet is avail-  
able  
➥ Refer to ■ Preparation (p. 16-3) and ■ Firmware  
update— USB-Memory (p. 16-4)  
• When two or more PCs connected to the Internet are  
available and they are connected to a LAN (Local  
Area Network)  
➥ Refer to ■ Preparation (p. 16-3) and either  
■ Firmware update— PC (p. 16-6) or  
■ Firmware update— USB-Memory (p. 16-4)  
Ask your dealer or distributor about how to update the  
firmware if you have no PC.  
■ Caution  
R CAUTION!: NEVER turn the transceiver power OFF  
while updating the firmware.  
You can turn the transceiver power OFF only when the  
transceiver displays that rebooting is required.  
If you turn the transceiver power OFF, or if a power fail-  
ure occurs during updating, the transceiver firmware  
will be corrupted and you will have to send the trans-  
ceiver back to the nearest Icom distributor for repair.  
This type of repair is out of warranty even if the war-  
ranty period is still valid.  
Recommendation!  
Backing up the settings and/or memory contents to the  
USB-Memory before starting the firmware update is  
recommended.  
Settings and/or memory contents will be lost or re-  
turned to default settings when the firmware update is  
performed.  
16-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 16  
■ Preparation  
D
Firmware and firm utility  
The latest firmware and the firm utility can be down-  
loaded from the Icom home page via the Internet. Ac-  
cess the following URL to download the firm utility and  
the latest firmware.  
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/index.htm  
For updating from the USB-Memory  
When updating the firmware from the USB-Memory,  
copy the downloaded firmware data (e.g. 7700_110.dat)  
to the USB-Memory (in “IC-7700” folder) using an avail-  
able USB port (USB hub may be required; purchased sep-  
arately from your PC dealer).  
D
File downloading  
q Access the following URL directly.  
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/index.htm  
w Read “Regarding this Download Service” carefully,  
then click [AGREE].  
e Click “Transceiver” link then click the firmware file  
link.  
Read carefully  
Click  
r Click [Save] in the displayed File Download dialog.  
Click  
t Select the desired location in which you want to  
save the firmware, then click [Save] in the displayed  
File Download dialog.  
Select the saving  
location  
• File download starts.  
y After download is completed, extract the file.  
• The firmware and the firm utility are compressed in “zip”  
format, respectively.  
• When updating the transceiver using with the USB-  
Memory, copy the extracted firmware (e.g.  
7700_110.dat) to the USB-Memory IC-7700 folder.  
• The USB-Memory must have been formatted by the IC-  
7700. (p. 12-26)  
7700_110.dat  
Click  
16-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
■ Firmware update— USB-Memory  
When updating the firmware with the USB-Memory, no  
IP address or subnet mask settings are necessary.  
q Copy the downloaded firmware data into the USB-  
Memory (“IC-7700” folder).  
FIRM UP /  
F-3  
√
OK  
F-6  
SET / USB / CANCEL  
F-7  
• The USB-Memory must have been formatted by the IC-  
7700.  
w Insert the USB-Memory into the USB connector.  
e Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
r Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.  
t Push [F-7•USB] to select USB-Memory set menu.  
EXIT/SET  
∫
DIR/FILE  
√
∫
FIRM UP  
F-4  
/
/
F-1  
F-2  
y Push and hold [F-3•FIRM UP] for 1 sec.  
u Read the displayed precaution carefully.  
• Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to scroll the indication.  
• Push [F-7•CANCEL] to cancel the firmware updating.  
i After you read and understand all of the precau-  
tions, push [F-6•OK].  
• [F-6•OK] appears only following the precautions.  
• Push [F-7•CANCEL] to cancel the firmware updating.  
o Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the firmware file,  
then push [F-4•FIRM UP].  
! Read the displayed precautions carefully.  
! If you agree, push and hold [F-6•OK] for 1 sec. to  
start the firmware update.  
• Push [F-7•CANCEL] to cancel the firmware updating.  
! While loading the firmware from the USB-Memory,  
the dialog as at left is displayed.  
16-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 16  
! After the firmware loading is completed, the trans-  
ceiver starts the update automatically and the dia-  
log at left is displayed.  
RWARNING!: NEVER turn the IC-7700 power  
OFF at this stage.  
The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.  
! When the dialog disappears, the precaution at left  
is displayed.  
! Read the precaution carefully, and then push  
[F-6•OK].  
• Return to USB-Memory set menu.  
! Push POWER to turn the IC-7700 power OFF, then  
ON again.  
SCOPE-DSP UPDATING...  
TRX-DSP UPDATING...  
! Depending on the update, one or two dialog boxes  
Please wait for 10sec.  
Please wait for 25sec.  
as at left appear in sequence.  
WARNING! NEVER turn power OFF.  
WARNING! NEVER turn power OFF.  
RWARNING!: NEVER turn the IC-7700 power  
OFF at this stage.  
The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.  
! After the dialog disappears, the firmware updating  
is completed and normal operation screen appears.  
16-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
■ Firmware update— PC  
D
Connections  
Connect the IC-7700 and the PC through a LAN (Local  
Area Network) as follows.  
Hub/Router*  
Ethernet cable*  
(Patch cable)  
to crossover port  
=
×
×
×
×
to WAN  
/Internet network  
*Purchased separately  
IC-7700  
PC1  
PC2  
(192.168.100.13)  
(192.168.100.11)  
(192.168.100.12)  
• IP address setting example  
PC1  
PC2  
IC-7700  
IP address  
192.168.100.11 192.168.100.12 192.168.100.13  
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0  
16-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 16  
D
IP address setting  
When updating the firmware from the USB-Memory,  
the following settings are not necessary.  
IMPORTANT!: A fixed (static) IP address is used for  
the IC-7700.  
When you connect the IC-7700 to a LAN, ask the  
network manager about a usable/assignable IP  
address and the subnet mask in advance.  
NEVER use an IP address that has already been  
used with another device in the network. If the IP  
address is duplicated, the network will crash.  
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-  
tion screen, if necessary.  
w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.  
e Push [F-5•OTHERS] to select Others set mode.  
EXIT/SET  
∫
√
Ω ≈  
OTHERS  
F-5  
SET  
F-7  
F-1  
F-2  
F-3  
r Push [F-1•Y]/[F-2•Z] several times to select “IP Ad-  
dress” item.  
t Push [F-3•Ω ≈] to select the desired part then ro-  
tate the main dial to set the desired or specified IP  
address.  
• “192.168.0.1” is the default setting.  
y Push [F-2•Z] to select “Subnet Mask” item.  
u Rotate the main dial to set the desired or specified  
subnet mask.  
• “255.255.255.0” is the default setting.  
i Push POWER to turn the transceiver power OFF,  
then ON to enable the IP address and subnet mask  
settings.  
16-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE  
D
Updating from the PC  
q Start up the IC-7700 Firm Utility.  
• The window as at left appears.  
w Read the caution in the window carefully.  
e Click [Yes] if you agree and continue the firmware  
updating.  
i7700  
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER  
Firm Utility  
===CAUTION===  
Updating the firmware is very risky. If you make a mistake, the IC-7700 may  
not operate properly, and repair at Icom Inc.(Japan) may be the only way to  
fix it.  
You undertake the updating of the firmware at you own risk and responsibility,  
Please refer to the firmware download homepage and/or the instruction manual  
for the correct procedures in updating the firmware.  
Also all preciously set conditions, the memory contents, etc will be lost when  
making a firmware update.  
Making a backup file of programmed contents and settings onto the USB-  
Memory before updating is recommended.  
Do you agree to all of the above?  
Click to  
continue  
r Select the firmware file, that has “dat” extension  
(e.g.: 7700_110.dat).  
• Click […], then select the file, as well as the location.  
t Type the IC-7700’s IP address into “IC-7700 IP Ad-  
dress” text box.  
IC-7700 Firm Utility  
i7700  
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER  
Click […] to selectthefirmware file.  
y Click [Start].  
(C) 2007 Icom Inc.  
Firmware File Name  
IC-7700 IP Address  
Type the IC-7700’s IP address here.  
Turn the IC-7700 power ON.  
When the normal operational screen appears, set the firmware file name  
and IP address, then click [Start] button.  
u The window as at left appears.  
Read the precaution in the window carefully.  
i Click [Yes] if you want to start the firmware update.  
Updating the main CPU firmware first.  
It will take approx. 1 minute.  
DO NOT turn the IC-7700 power OFF until "Completed" dialog is displayed.  
Depending on the updated contents, the sub CPU and/or DSP firmware will  
automatically be updated when rebooting the IC-7700 and this will take  
approx. 2 minutes. DO NOT turn the IC-7700 power OFF until the normal  
operational screen appears, in such case.  
Do you wish to start the firmware update?  
Click to start the  
firmware update  
16-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 16  
o The screen as at left is displayed.  
IC-7700 Firm Utility  
• The following dialog appears in the IC-7700 display.  
i7700  
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER  
Version 1.00  
(C) 2007 Icom Inc.  
Firmware File Name  
IC-7700 IP Address  
R9500 IP Address  
RWARNING!: NEVER turn the IC-7700 power  
OFF at this stage.  
The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.  
Connecting to the IC-7700.  
Connected to the IC-7700.  
Transfer in progress...  
Transfer successful.  
Start update.  
Please wait a while.  
! Click [OK] to finish the firmware update.  
• The “FIRMWARE UPDATING” dialog as above disap-  
pears.  
! Push POWER to turn the IC-7700 power OFF, then  
ON again.  
Firmware up dating for the main CPU is completed.  
Turn the IC-7700 power OFF, then ON again with [POWER] switch.  
After turning the power ON, the IC-7700 will work with the updated firmware.  
The sub CPU and/or DSP firmware update will start automatically depending on the updated contents,  
and this will take approx. 2 minutes.  
DO NOT turn the IC-7700 power OFF until the normal operational screen appears.  
Click [OK] to finish the firmware update.  
SCOPE-DSP UPDATING...  
TRX-DSP UPDATING...  
! Depending on the update, one or two dialog boxes  
as at left appear on the IC-7700 display in se-  
quence.  
Please wait for 10sec.  
Please wait for 25sec.  
WARNING! NEVER turn power OFF.  
WARNING! NEVER turn power OFF.  
RWARNING!: NEVER turn the IC-7700 power  
OFF at this stage.  
The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.  
! After the dialog disappears, the firmware update is  
completed and normal operation screen appears.  
16-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ABOUT CE  
INSTALLATION NOTES  
For amateur base station installations it is recom-  
mended that the clearance in front of the antenna array  
is calculated relative to the EIRP (Effective Isotropic  
Radiated Power). The clearance height below the an-  
tenna array can be determined in most cases from the  
RF power at the antenna input terminals.  
Forward clearance, EIRP by frequency band  
100 Watts 2 m  
1000 Watts 6.5 m  
10,000 Watts 20 m  
100,000 Watts 65 m  
In all cases any possible risk depends on the transmit-  
ter being activated for long periods. (actual recom-  
mendation limits are specified as an average during 6  
minutes) Normally the transmitter is not active for long  
periods of time. Some radio licenses will require that a  
timer circuit automatically cuts the transmitter after 1–2  
minutes etc.  
Different exposure limits have been recommended for  
different frequencies, a relative table shows a guide-  
line for installation considerations.  
Below 30 MHz, the recommended limits are specified  
in terms of V/m or A/m fields as they are likely to fall  
within the near-field region. Similarly, the antennas  
may be physically short in terms of electrical length  
and that the installation will require some antenna  
matching device which can create local, high intensity  
magnetic fields. Analysis of such installations is best  
considered in association with published guidance  
notes such as the FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97-01  
and its annexes relative to amateur transmitter instal-  
lations. The EC recommended limits are almost identi-  
cal to the FCC specified ‘uncontrolled’ limits and tables  
exist that show pre-calculated safe distances for differ-  
ent antenna types for different frequency bands. Fur-  
ther information can be found at http://www.arrl.org/.  
Similarly some types of emission, i.e., SSB, CW, AM  
etc. have a lower ‘average’ output power and the as-  
sessed risk is even lower.  
Versions of the IC-7700 which display the  
“CE” symbol on the serial number seal,  
comply with the essential requirements of  
the European Radio and Telecommunication  
Terminal Directive 1999/5/EC.  
This warning symbol indicates that this  
equipment operates in non-harmonised fre-  
quency bands and/or may be subject to li-  
censing conditions in the country of use. Be  
sure to check that you have the correct ver-  
sion of this radio or the correct programming  
of this radio, to comply with national licens-  
ing requirement.  
• Typical amateur radio installation  
Exposure distance assumes that the predominant ra-  
diation pattern is forward and that radiation downward  
is at unity gain (side lobe suppression is equal to main  
lobe gain). This is true of almost every gain antenna  
today. Exposed persons are assumed to be beneath  
the antenna array and have a typical height of 1.8 m.  
• List of Country codes (ISO 3166-1)  
Country  
Codes  
Country  
Codes  
The figures assume the worst-case emission of con-  
stant carrier.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Austria  
AT  
18 Liechtenstein  
LI  
LT  
Belgium  
Bulgaria  
Croatia  
Czech Republic  
Cyprus  
Denmark  
Estonia  
Finland  
BE 19 Lithuania  
BG 20 Luxembourg  
HR 21 Malta  
CZ 22 Netherlands  
CY 23 Norway  
DK 24 Poland  
EE 25 Portugal  
FI  
FR 27 Slovakia  
DE 28 Slovenia  
GR 29 Spain  
LU  
MT  
NL  
NO  
PL  
PT  
RO  
SK  
SI  
ES  
SE  
CH  
TR  
For the bands 10 MHz and higher the following power  
density limits have been recommended:  
10–144 MHz  
2 W/sq m  
EIRP clearance heights by frequency band  
1 Watts 2.1 m  
26 Romania  
10 France  
11 Germany  
12 Greece  
13 Hungary  
14 Iceland  
15 Ireland  
16 Italy  
10 Watts 2.8 m  
25 Watts 3.4 m  
100 Watts  
5 m  
HU 30 Sweden  
1000 Watts 12 m  
IS  
IE  
IT  
31 Switzerland  
32 Turkey  
33 United Kingdom GB  
17 Latvia  
LV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ABOUT CE  
DECLARATION  
OF CONFORMITY  
We Icom Inc. Japan  
1-1-32, Kamiminami, Hirano-ku  
Osaka 547-0003, Japan  
Düsseldorf 16th Nov.2007  
Place and date of issue  
Declare on our sole responsibility that this equipment complies with the  
essential requirements of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal  
Equipment Directive, 1999/5/EC, and that any applicable Essential Test  
Suite measurements have been performed.  
Icom (Europe) GmbH  
Himmelgeister straße 100  
D-40225 Düsseldorf  
Kind of equipment:  
HF/50 MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER  
Authorized representative name  
Type-designation: i7700  
H. Ikegami  
General Manager  
Version (where applicable):  
This compliance is based on conformity with the following harmonised  
standards, specifications or documents:  
i) EN 301489-1 v1.4.1 (2002-08)  
ii) EN 301489-15 v1.2.1 (2002-08)  
iii) EN 301 783 v1.1.1 (2000-09)  
iv) EN 60950-1 (2001):A11:2004  
iv)v)  
Signature  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Please record the serial number of your IC-7700 transceiver below for future servicing  
reference:  
Serial Number  
:
:
Date of purchase  
Place where purchased :  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IC-7700  
#03 (Europe)  
<Intended Country of Use>  
■AT ■BE ■CY ■CZ ■DK ■EE  
■FI ■FR ■DE ■GR■HU ■IE  
■IT ■LV ■LT ■LU ■MT ■NL  
■PL ■PT ■SK ■SI ■ES ■SE  
■GB ■IS ■LI ■NO■CH ■BG  
■RO■TR ■HR  
IC-7700  
#04 (France)  
<Intended Country of Use>  
■AT ■BE ■CY ■CZ ■DK ■EE  
■FI ■FR ■DE ■GR■HU ■IE  
■IT ■LV ■LT ■LU ■MT ■NL  
■PL ■PT ■SK ■SI ■ES ■SE  
■GB ■IS ■LI ■NO■CH ■BG  
■RO■TR ■HR  
IC-7700  
#05 (Italy)  
<Intended Country of Use>  
■AT ■BE ■CY ■CZ ■DK ■EE  
■FI ■FR ■DE ■GR■HU ■IE  
■IT ■LV ■LT ■LU ■MT ■NL  
■PL ■PT ■SK ■SI ■ES ■SE  
■GB ■IS ■LI ■NO■CH ■BG  
■RO■TR ■HR  
IC-7700  
#06 (Spain)  
<Intended Country of Use>  
■AT ■BE ■CY ■CZ ■DK ■EE  
■FI ■FR ■DE ■GR■HU ■IE  
■IT ■LV ■LT ■LU ■MT ■NL  
■PL ■PT ■SK ■SI ■ES ■SE  
■GB ■IS ■LI ■NO■CH ■BG  
■RO■TR ■HR  
IC-7700  
#07 (United  
Kingdom)  
<Intended Country of Use>  
■AT ■BE ■CY ■CZ ■DK ■EE  
■FI ■FR ■DE ■GR■HU ■IE  
■IT ■LV ■LT ■LU ■MT ■NL  
■PL ■PT ■SK ■SI ■ES ■SE  
■GB ■IS ■LI ■NO■CH ■BG  
■RO■TR ■HR  
1-1-32 Kamiminami, Hirano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Graco Inc Pressure Washer 308 505 User Manual
Grizzly Saw H6548 User Manual
Haier Washer Dryer HW80 1279 User Manual
Hamilton Beach Slow Cooker 33957 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Paint Sprayer 93305 User Manual
Heat Glo LifeStyle Indoor Fireplace 6000 GDVFL User Manual
Heath Zenith Home Safety Product SH 5411 User Manual
Heath Zenith Oven AC 6507 User Manual
Heatiator Indoor Fireplace ECO WINS18 User Manual
Husky Paint Sprayer Spray Gun User Manual